Home

Modicon Quantum with Unity - Guillevin Industrial Automation Group

1. Default screen System menus Sub menus Sub screens AON 33002479 07 2011 29 Product Description Accessing the Screens Default Screen Use the keys on the keypad to access the system menus and submenus Step Action 1 To access the screens ensure that the key switch is in the unlocked position a amp 2 To step down to a lower menu operate one of the following keys 3 To return to the previous menu press ESC The default screen is read only and contains the following fields Mode State Bat L port PCM 30 33002479 07 2011 Product Description The default screen displays the following information Fields Available Options Available Description Mode M Maintenance Mode only on safety processors S Safe Mode only on safety processors State RUN Application program is running RUN Prim RUN as Primary CPU processor only on Hot Standby processors RUN Stby RUN as Standby CPU processor only on Hot Standby processors RUN OffL RUN Offline Hot Standby processor not connected to another processor STOP Application program is NOT runni
2. Variables amp FB ins Open lt j Communication Export E Networks Nelete Be __t BEER Add user directory Program Add Hyperlink Animation Tables Zoom out 9 Operator Screens Properties Alt Enter 9 Documentation 94 33002479 07 2011 Start Communication with Unity Pro Properties of a Network Properties of a Network The contextual menu proposes the user to see again the properties of a configured network Here the user can change the NetLink name and the associated comment The figure shows the Ethernet property window J Station Configuration 1 J Communication 3 Networks te J Program Animation T J Derived Data Types 9 Derived FB Types 9 Variables amp FB instances Open Export Delete Add user directory Add Hyperlink Zoom out Properties Alt Enter Properties Network Ethernet_1 List of available Networks Ethemet_ _ T7 Change Name thernet Feo 33002479 07 2011 95 Start Communication with Unity Pro Delete an Existing Network Folder Delete an Existing Network Folder With a right mouse click above the network folder a contextual menu appears Here the user is able to delete the network configuration In this case the subfolder of
3. Home Page To access the Quantum home page enter the IP address of the module in his web browser No password is required to display the home page J FactoryCast Web Server NOE 771 11 Microsoft Internet Explorer Eile Edt View Favorites Tools Help Ell PES a g aje Back Forward Sto Refresh Home Searc Favorites Histe Mai Print Address 27 htp 139 158 13 143 T Go Links gt Schneider P Electric Home lt FactoryCast Copyright 2008 Schneider Automation SAS All Rights reserved Intemet Links From the Quantum home page you can access the following pages e Monitoring see page 269 e Diagnostics see page 270 e Setup see page 271 e Documentation Enter a user name and a password to access the services on these pages 268 33002479 07 2011 Embedded Web Pages Monitoring Home Page Home Page This page lists the various viewer services supported by the default Web site of the module and provides links for accessing the services you require Illustration The Monitoring home page looks like this FactoryCast NOE 771 11 a Schneider Home Documentation Monitoring Monitoring OSI ETDS EEEE PLCP T amp Custom Pages with passwore FactoryCast Copyright 2008 Schneider Autornation SAS All Rights reserved nemet To access a service click on a link The services include e Data editor for creating variable data tables to determine their v
4. Register Meaning CONTROL 1 11 read CTE CONTROL 2 Indicates the error status CONTROL 3 Number of words transferred CONTROL 4 Byte offset in the PLC register structure specifying from where the CTE bytes are read CONTROLJ 5 Routing register MSB slot of the NOE module 164 33002479 07 2011 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks Register Meaning CONTROL 6 Terminator FF hex CONTROL 9 CTE Indicator Implementation DATABUF The values in the CTE table are displayed in the DATABUF output when a CTE read operation is implemented The registers display the following CTE data CTE indicator implementation DATABUF Parameter Register Contents Frame type DATABUF 0 1 802 3 2 Ethernet IP address DATABUF 1 First byte of the IP address DATABUF 2 Second byte of the IP address DATABUF 3 Third byte of the IP address DATABUF 4 Fourth byte of the IP address Lower netmask DATABUF 5 Most significant word DATABUF 6 Least significant word Gateway DATABUF 7 First byte of the gateway DATABUF 8 Second byte of the gateway DATABUF 9 Third byte of the gateway DATABUF 10 Fourth byte of the gateway 33002479 07 2011 165 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks Write CTE Description A write CTE operation writes the CTE configuration table from the specified data DATABUF to a specified E
5. Serial Port Unit Address 1 Serial Port Baudrate 9600 Serial Port Parity Even Serial Port Databits RTU 8 Serial Port RS Mode RS 232 Serial Port Stopbits 1 33002479 07 2011 35 Product Description Submenu for TCP IP Ethernet PLC Communications submenus TCP IP Ethernet Screen Displays Fields Available Options Available Description TCP IP Ethernet IP Address Het HEH AEE HHH decimal numbers Displays IP address TCP IP Ethernet Subnet Mask Het HEH AEE HHH decimal numbers Displays Subnetwork Mask address TCP IP Ethernet IP Gateway Het HEH AEE HHH decimal numbers Displays Ethernet IP Gateway address TCP IP Ethernet MAC Address EEEE FE RE TE tt hexadecimal numbers Displays MAC Medium Access Control address read only Parameters can be modified only if no applications have been downloaded in NO CONF state 2 When a new PLC application has been downloaded the Ethernet address on the screen is only updated after accessing the highest level of the menu structure Modbus Plus PLC Communications submenus Fields Available Options Available Description HH Modifiable only if the key switch is in the unlocked position 1 64 Enter a valid Modbus Plus address Modbus Plus State Monitor Link Normal Link Sol
6. F F F F F F F F F F d Parameter description Parameter Description Model Family Quantum NOE Ethernet Module settings Module Address Not used Module Utilities For module service configuration options see above Module IP Address Overview of the IP address parameter set 102 33002479 07 2011 Start Communication with Unity Pro After selecting the model family TCP IP 10 100 Regular Connection the following mask appears The image also displays the activated module services ETHERNET_1 1 Model Address Model Utilities Rack Module NO lO Scanning a LI NO _ Global Data Model IP Address YES SNMP IP Address Subnetwork Mask Gateway Address_ NO__ Address Server OOT tb OPO SOFT G JOO eO WEB NTP IP Configuration Messaging vo Scanning Global Data SNMP Address Server NTP Bandwidth IP Address Configuration Configured Model Family TCP IP 10 100 Regular Connec Y IP address 13 12 10 14 Subnetwork mask 25 25 0 0 Gateway address 13 12 10 1 From a server r Ethernet configuration Ethernet II 8023 NOTE The availability of the displayed register depends on the selected model family and can vary After selecting the Yes option in module services the tab corresponding to the
7. 0200020 eee eee Modbus Application Protocol Service Classes 05 Modbus Application Protocol PDU Analysis TCP IP Specific Issues n oiire dera anaa aena eee eee Closing a TCP Connection 00 0 Reference Documents 0000 cece eee eee eee Installation and Configuration of a Modicon Quantum Platforme ane de BR eae eA a ee OVEIVICW 3 3 45 8 2s Sn th na Pad Rea anes aati bata dee tet eed installation ete ott ee A Lee bn tin Se a a ee ke Configuring the Rack with Unity Pro 1 2 eee ee Configuring the Ethernet Network with Unity Pro Configuring the I O Scanning Service 0 00 cece eee Building and Downloading the Configuration Program Diagnosing the Ethernet Module Using the Web Server 323 325 326 330 331 332 334 335 335 339 340 342 344 345 347 348 349 351 352 353 354 357 360 365 368 371 383 33002479 07 2011 10 33002479 07 2011 Safety Information A Important Information NOTICE Read these instructions carefully and look at the equipment to become familiar with the device before trying to install operate or maintain it The following special messages may appear throughout this documentation or on the equipment to warn of potential hazards or to call attention to information that clarifies or simplifies a procedure The addition of this symbol to a Danger or
8. The figure below shows the completed rack assembly for our example with the 140 NOE 771 01 module in slot 4 356 33002479 07 2011 Installation and Configuration Configuring the Ethernet Network with Unity Pro Introduction The following procedure describes how to add a new Ethernet network and link it to the Modicon Quantum module we configured in the previous section Setting Up the Network Perform the following steps to add the Ethernet network Step Action 1 Locate the Communications directory in the Project browser 2 Right click the Network subdirectory located under the Communications directory Select the New Network option to bring up the Add Network dialog box Scroll to Ethernet in the List of available Networks box 5 Enter a meaningful name for your network in the Change Name field NOE77101 was used in our example Add Network X Network Comment List of available Networks Ethernet v Change Name NOE77101 OK Cancel Help 6 Click OK 33002479 07 2011 357 Installation and Configuration Linking the Network to the NOE 77101 Module Perform the following steps to link the new logical Ethernet network with the NOE 77101 module Step Action 1 Double click Local Bus in the Project browser to show the rack configuration 2 Expand the Local Quantum Drop to show the ETHERNET port under the 140 NOE 77101
9. 33002479 07 2011 253 Using the NTP Time Service Time Zone Parameters Select a time zone from the drop down menu Time Zone Description DST Available Custom Yes GMT 12 00 Dateline Standard Time Eniwetok Kwajalein No GMT 11 00 Samoa Standard Time Midway Is Samoa No GMT 10 00 Hawaiian Standard Time Hawaii Honolulu No GMT 09 00 Alaskan Standard Time Anchorage Yes GMT 08 00 Pacific Standard Time Los Angeles Tijuana Yes GMT 07 00 Mexican Standard Time Chihuahua La Paz Mazatlan Yes GMT 07 00 Mountain Standard Time Arizona Phoenix No GMT 07 00 Mountain Standard Time Denver Yes GMT 06 00 Central Standard Time Chicago Yes GMT 06 00 Mexico Standard Time Tegucigalpa No GMT 06 00 Canada Central Standard Time Saskatchewan Regina No GMT 06 00 Central America Standard Time Mexico_city Yes GMT 05 00 SA Pacific Standard Time Bogota Lima Quito No GMT 05 00 Eastern Standard Time New York Yes GMT 05 00 Eastern Standard Time Indiana East Indianapolis No GMT 04 00 SA Western Standard Time Caracas La Paz No GMT 04 00 Pacific SA Standard Time Santiago Yes GMT 03 30 Newfoundland Standard Time Newfoundland St Johns Yes GMT 03 00 E South America Standard Time Brasilia Sao_Paulo Yes GMT 03 00 SA Eastern Standard Time Buenos A
10. Register Meaning CONTROL 6 Each address contains 1 byte of the 32 bit IP address where the MSB is bas in CONTROL 6 and the LSB is in CONTROL 9 CONTROL 9 Control Block Usage for SY MAX Ethernet Register Meaning CONTROL 1 2 Read data CONTROL 2 Indicates the error status CONTROL 3 Number of addresses to be read from the slave CONTROL 4 Determines the MW starting register in the slave to which the data is written e g 1 MW1 49 MW49 CONTROL 5 Routing register Most significant byte network adapter module slot Least significant byte destination drop number CONTROLJ 6 Terminator FF hex CONTROL 9 33002479 07 2011 149 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks Write Data Description A write operation transfers data from a master source device to a specified slave destination device on the network It uses a master transaction path and may require several cycles to complete To program an MBP_MSTR block to perform a write operation use function code 1 see page 137 NOTE Do not attempt to program an MBP_MSTR to write to its own drop address This action causes the function block to generate an error in the CONTROL 2 register of the control block see page 138 You can perform a write operation to a nonexistent slave register The slave detects the status and logs it This can last for several cycles Network Implementation The write
11. 33002479 07 2011 259 Using the Mail Service Mail Service Configuring the Mail Service As an authorized administrator use the SMTP Configuration Web page to e configure the service e set the IP address of the mail server Elsewhere in this guide is detailed information about configuring the electronic mail service see page 295 NOTE Default TCP Port The default TCP port number for SMTP is 25 Ensure that you configure the port specified by your local mail server Message Creation and Delivery A user defined event or condition triggers the MSTR block to create a message Each message uses one of three user defined headers Each message sent from the controller can contain text and variable information with a maximum of 238 bytes The project selects the appropriate header Each header contains e sender name e list of recipients e subject Header Examples The text and variable information can be defined and updated by an authorized administrator using an embedded Web page SMTP Configuration page Define mail headers to indicate different levels of importance For example e Header 1 could be Urgent problem reported by PLC 10 e Header 2 could be NOTIFICATION from substation 10 e Header 3 could be INFO message from water system Listing different recipients in each of the three headers ensures that the right information quickly flows to the right recipients The project adds pertinent information suc
12. El lt 9 UNITY Station Variables E J Communication E lt 3 Network t Ethemet_1 Ethernet_2 ut 1 4 SubsetENETLF in E lt j Configu ENETFE E 4 0 XBus 3 0 PremiumDrop m WO mg E Bi 0 TSXRKY 12EX Toveniew ceneri 0 1 140 CPU 534 2 No Link T Ink e choose a Network moO ome 40 NOE 771 11 Attaching a NetLink to a Module When a network is attached to a module the icon of the corresponding node is changed and the network editor displays the address of the module in the rack The Icon in the Network folder indicates whether the link is attached to a module or not Icon when no communication module is attached to the NetLink 4 my Icon when a communication module has been attached to the NetLink 33002479 07 2011 99 Start Communication with Unity Pro Link between Data and Communication Network Variables and Groups The groups of Ethernet network variables are created in the Ethernet network communication folders An IP domain determines a group In Unity Pro one network can support only one group In Data Editor the list of all current groups is provided to select in which group each Ethernet network variables is included Nevertheless the group field is also a free entry editing box in order to give a group name not yet defined in communication folder The build step c
13. Step Action 1 Enter the URL for example http hostname secure embedded ftp_passwd_config htm 2 At that URL m EE aa a user name and password Connect to 192 168 100 123 Ey to 192 168 100 123 7 Security User name Password l Remember my password Note The default User name is USER and the default Password is USERUSER Both should be changed by the system administrator during module installation 3 Upon supplying the user name password and clicking the OK button the Modify FTP Server User Name and Password page displays FTP Username and Password Modify Page Overview The following figure shows the page used for modifying the FTP user name and password Modify FTP Server User Name and Password New User Name 1 40 char New Password 8 40 char Reset Form Submit FTP Password Change Delete FTP Password File Copyright 1998 2004 Schneider Automation SAS All rights reserved 62 33002479 07 2011 Product Description Change the Username and Password At this point the system administrator should change the Username and Password to restrict future access to the system The following steps should be used Step Action 1 Type in the new Username in the New User Name field 2 Type in the new Password in the New Password field 3 Click the Submit FTP Password Change button The following figu
14. Web Diagnostics Web Configuration The embedded Web server provides Web pages to diagnose the following Transparent Factory Real Time services Diagnostic Service Description Global Data see page 81 e status of all Global Data services e status of all subscribed and published variables e publication subscription rate I O Scanning see page 79 e status of all I O Scanning services e status of individual scanned devices e actual I O scanning rate Messaging see page 77 e diagnostic information for Port 502 messaging Time Synchronization e status of client and link to the server see page 82 e date and time e status of Daylight Saving Time DST option Electronic Mail Notification e status of SMTP server see page 83 e track messages sent and received e track errors Bandwidth Monitoring e throughput measurement of NOE by service see page 84 NOTE All these pages are protected by the general HTTP password Elsewhere in this guide is a description of the web configuration pages see page 86 33002479 07 2011 87 Ethernet Communication Services Additional Ethernet Services Hot Standby The Ethernet Hot Standby system consists of two identical Modicon Quantum systems Each Quantum system contains e a Modicon Quantum Hot Standby with Unity controller 140 CPU 671 xx0 140 CPU 672 xx0 e aremote I O head e NOE 771 xx modules no more than six e a power supply The
15. CONTROL 7 Byte 3 of the IP address CONTROL 8 Byte 2 of the IP address 170 33002479 07 2011 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks Data Buffer Word Description CONTROL 9 Byte 1 of the IP address LSB CONTROL 10 Length of the DATABUF Request data bytes CONTROL 11 Length of the DATABUF Response received bytes NOTE This is read only it is set by option module after operation completion The MODBUS protocol defines a simple protocol data unit PDU independent of the underlying communication layers The data buffer DATABUF consists of contiguous registers that include both the Modbus Request PDU and the Modbus Response PDU DATABUF Modbus Request PDU Data Buffer Length is set in Data Request Length is set in the CONTROL 10 word the CONTROLS word Modbus Response PDU Data Response Start Response offset is set in the CONTROL 4 word NOTE To avoid overwriting the request the Response Offset value multiplied by 2 must be greater than the Request Length CONTROL 10 Data Response Length is set in the CONTROL 11 word 4 CAUTION LOSS OF DATA Verify that the Response Offset is greater than the Data Request Length Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage NOTE Both the Request and Response must be structured in little endian order Each word of 2 bytes of data in little
16. Physical Presentation and Mounting of Standard High End Modules Illustration Th 140 CPU 65 0 e figure shows a standard High End module and its components 140 CPU 651 60S Aere a standard processor safety processor red 1 model number module description color code 2 lens cover open 3 LCD display here covered by the lens cover 4 key switch 5 keypad with 2 red LED indicators 6 modbus port RS 232 RS 485 7 USB port 8 Modbus Plus port 9 PCMCIA slots A and B 10 LED indicators yellow for Ethernet communication 11 Ethernet port 12 battery user installed 13 reset button 14 2screws NOTE Quantum High End processors are equipped with two receptacles A and B in which to install Schneider PCMCIA cards other cards are not accepted 22 33002479 07 2011 Product Description Mounting Mounting the module onto the central back plane 1 Hang the module 2 Screw the module to the back plane 33002479 07 2011 23 Product Description CPU Controls and Displays Lens Cover Key Switch Reset Button The protective lens cover 2 in the CPU front panel can be opened by sliding upwards With the lens cover open you have access to the following items e key switch e battery e reset button The key switch 4 is a security feature and a memory protection switch The key switch has two positions locked and unlocked The key switch is only
17. Collision LED Error If the twisted pair cable has not been connected properly the Coll LED will shine steadily and the Link LED will be extinguished This condition does not occur with fiber optic modules The following figure shows the Collision LED 140 NOE 771 xx ETHERNET TCP IP Active Ready Link 328 33002479 07 2011 Maintenance Procedure for Responding to a Collision LED Error If the Collision LED fails to light use the following procedure Step Action 1 Make sure that the cable has been installed and is working properly 2 Verify that the Ethernet Hub Switch is working properly Collision LED Normal Condition If the Coll LED is flashing the module is reporting collisions on the Ethernet network While such collisions are normal the frequency of the flashes is an indication of the volume of traffic on the network The flashes may be so frequent that the LED appears to be shining steadily Heavy traffic will slow communications If response time is important to your application you should consider segmenting your network to reduce the frequency of collisions The following figure shows the Collision LED under normal conditions 140 NOE 771 xx ETHERNET TCP IP Run LED The following table describes the action to be taken if the Run LED is flashing The action depends on the number of flashes in sequence Number of Flashes in Sequence Action
18. Designation of user level who can capture information Authentication Failure Trap Enabled Turns on Community Name Checking After you make your modifications to any of the above parameters click Update SNMP A new page displays the following message Successfully updated SNMP database Note that this page contains the same links as those on the Configure SNMP page NOTE You must reset the module in order for the changes to take effect SNMP Community Strings Use strings to restrict access to the SNMP Agent These strings should be set to non trivial names during module installation 33002479 07 2011 279 Embedded Web Pages Modifying the SNMP Community Strings To configure the SNMP community strings Step Action 1 Enter the following URL into your browser http hostname secure embedded builtin submit Configure SNMP or click the SNMP link in the Setup home page to navigate to the SNMP Configuration page Enter the Community names for Set Get and Trap into the SNMP Configuration page as shown below SNMP Configuration System Name 140 NOE 771 01 Module System Description Quantum Ethernet TCPAP Comnumications Module Managers IP Addresses Manager I Manager II Agent Location SysLocation Contact SysContact Community Security Set NonTriv1 petar r Anthentication Failure Trap Enabled Get NonTriv2 Trap NonTriv4 Reset
19. EN and F Control Block R output pin turns ON if the operation aborts without success ESS output pin turns ON if the operation completes with success ROL and DATABUF output pins see page 136 define the operation O can be configured as additional parameters The format of the CONTROL block is described below Register Function Description CONTROL 1 Operation 16 close connection CONTROL 2 Error status Indicates detected error status see page 160 read only CONTROL 3 not used CONTROL 4 not used CONTROL 5 Routing Register High byte Ethernet communication module slot Low byte MBP on Ethernet transporter MET mapping index also known as Unit ID CONTROL 6 IP Address Byte 4 of the IP address MSB CONTROL 7 Byte 3 of the IP address CONTROL 8 Byte 2 of the IP address CONTROL 9 Byte 1 of the IP address LSB 33002479 07 2011 175 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks Read Write Data Introduction In a single transaction the MSTR read and write operations can transfer data from a master source device to a specified slave destination device then transfer data from this specified slave source to the master It uses a master transaction path and may require several cycles to complete To program an MBP_MSTR block to perform a combined read write operation use function code 23 see page 137
20. For each type of error try the suggested remedies in the order given If no remedy suggested here overcomes the error call your local service representative or call Schneider Electric customer service at 1 800 468 5342 for further directions Procedure for Responding to an Active LED Error Indicator If the Active LED fails to light the NOE module is not communicating with the backplane The following procedure describes the steps to perform to respond to an Active LED error Step Action 1 Make sure the NOE module and the controller are installed properly 2 Verify that the controller is working if it is not replace it 3 If neither the new controller nor the NOE module functions replace the backplane 326 33002479 07 2011 Maintenance Step Action 4 Make sure that no more than two network option modules including NOE NWM NOM and CRP 811 modules have been installed in the backplane with a 140 CPU 311 10 not more than six network option modules with a 140 CPU 434 12A 140 CPU 534 14A 140 CPU 651 x0 or 140 CPU 671 60 5 Check the version of the controller executive You must have version 2 0 or greater to support the Ethernet module Earlier versions do not recognize the module 6 If steps 4 and 5 above check out ok replace the NOE module Procedure for Responding to a Ready LED Error Indicator If the Ready LED fails to light the NOE module has
21. Security Access Change Verification The following figure shows the message that is generated if you click the Change HTTP Access or Change Write Password button Ethernet Configuration Successfully changed HTTP User Name and Password This modification will become effective on the next reboot Reboot Device Copyright 1999 2004 Schneider Automation SAS All rights reserved Clicking the Reboot Device button will reset the username and password for the NOE board NOTE The Reboot will take about 40 seconds Larger applications can take up to one 1 minute During the reboot all services provided by the NOE are not available 66 33002479 07 2011 Product Description Using BOOTP Lite to Assign Address Parameters Overview BOOTP Lite Utility A CAUTION UNINTENTIONAL OPERATION Ensure that the MAC address matches the intended IP address in your BOOTP server If you do not enter the correct address pairs into the BOOTP server you could communicate to the wrong device Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage The following information describes how to use the BOOTP Lite utility software Instead of a BOOTP server Schneider Electric s BOOTP Lite Server Software utility can be used to provide the IP address subnet mask and default gateway to the NOE 771 xx module Refer to the BOOTP Lite Server Software user documentation for instructions NOTE BOOTP
22. The combined read write operation can be used only with these two Quantum models e NOE 771 01 version 3 0 or later e NOE 771 11 version 3 0 or later Control Block Usage Register Content CONTROL 1 23 read write data CONTROL 2 Indicates the error status CONTROL 3 Number of registers to be sent to the slave CONTROL 4 Specifies the MW starting register in the slave to which the data will be written e g 1 MW1 49 MW49 CONTROL 5 Routing register Most significant byte network adapter module slot Least significant byte MBP on Ethernet Transporter MET mapping index CONTROLJ 6 Each address contains 1 byte of the 32 bit IP address where the MSB is in re CONTROLJ6 and the LSB is in CONTROL 9 CONTROL 9 CONTROL 10 Number of registers to be read from slave CONTROL 11 Specifies the MW starting register in the slave from which the data is read e g 1 MW1 49 MW49 NOTE When configuring the MBP_MSTR block for a read write data operation note that e The DATABUF output parameter is used to store in the following sequence both 1 the data to be written 2 the data to be read e The size of the DATABUF output parameter must equal the combined size of the data to be written and the data to be read if the size is smaller data will be overwritten and may be lost e Both the CONTROL and DATABUF parameters must be stored at located addresses f
23. 33002479 07 2011 229 SNMP The process is simple Compile file Load file into your manager Other SNMP Resources SNMP and related subjects are well documented on Web sites and in many books e As of this writing a useful description appears on Microsoft s Technet pages Browse to http Avww microsoft com technet Use the Search function to find Network Management for Microsoft Networks Using SNMP e Use an Internet search engine to search for an SNMP introduction tutorial or other resource e The SNMP FAQs from the news group comp protocols snmp appear on many com and org Web pages Search for the combination of comp protocols snmp and FAQ 230 33002479 07 2011 SNMP ASN 1 Naming Scheme ASN 1 Overview Abstract Syntax Notation One ASN 1 is a formal language for abstractly describing messages to be exchanged between distributed computer systems An Example Objects in a MIB are defined with the ASN 1 naming scheme that assigns each object a long prefix that guarantees that the name will be unique For example an integer that counts the number of IP datagrams that a device has received is named iso org dod internet mgmt mib ip ipinReceives The following figure depicts the ASN 1 naming scheme example TS iso 1 org 3 dod 6 internet 1 directory 1 mgmt 2 experimental 3 mib 2 system 1 interfaces 2 address ip 4 translation ipForwardin
24. 78 33002479 07 2011 Ethernet Communication Services 1 0 Scanner Introduction The functionality of your Ethernet module is further enhanced by the addition of an I O Scanner which you can configure with the Schneider Electric programming panels I O Scanner Features NOE version 3 5 and later include these enhancements Feature Availability Improvement Description Improved Timeout and Retry Unity Improves TCP 2004 version uses a variable timeout Transmission algorithm Concept connection management Older versions used a fixed timeout ProWORX Difference Faster retransmission rates Enable Disable I O Scanner Unity Reduces network traffic Use the Device Control Block entry Concept volume e Set 0 Enable channel for normal data exchange e Set 1 Disable channel Note Concept Users Concept uses diagnostic words Set FF Disable channel Send Modbus requests Unity Allows routers to Automatic across a router Concept connect remote I O ProWORX devices to a controller Dynamic TCP port allocation Unity Improves Reserves TCP client ports 3072 OxC00 Concept connection disconnectio through 4992 0x1380 ProWORX n performance Allocates ports dynamically Repetitive rate display Unity Check status using GUI Status displays in I O Scanning tab of module editor I O Scanner Parameters Functionality of the I O Scanner Parameter Value Max No of Devices 64 140
25. Delete an Entry On the Address Server Configuration page you can e Add a New Entry e Change an Entry e Delete an Entry e Refresh the data table The Address Server Configuration page allows you to choose different options for adding or altering the configurations of your NOE The options available to you are e select an entry e add an entry e change an entry e delete an entry 224 33002479 07 2011 Address Server Configuration Faulty Device Replacement Below we describe the method and options chosen to perform any of the four options listed above Screen shots are presented to accompany the Adding an entry section Selecting an Entry When the page displays by default no entries are selected Use the radio buttons in the first column to select an entry Only one entry may be selected at a time Adding an Entry When the Add a New Entry button is selected the Address Server Node Configuration page appears This page displays information about a device If you selected a device this page displays the device s configuration Configuration information appears in four of the five fields of the dialog box Only the Role information field is blank You should enter a Role name for example ENT_7 If no device is selected default values appear in all the fields Changing an Entry Before using this button you must select an entry in the database by choosing one of the radio buttons in the first column If you do n
26. This document is for users who want their Quantum PLC to communicate with devices over an Ethernet network It assumes that you have some knowledge of PLC systems and a working knowledge of Modsoft Concept ProWORX or Unity Pro programming tools You also need to understand the use of Ethernet networks and TCP IP This document describes the functionality of the Modicon Quantum Ethernet modules the NOE 771 xx and 140 NWM 100 00 and the Ethernet port of the 140 CPU 651 x0 modules Model Number Module Type 140 NOE 771 00 Ethernet Option Adapter 140 NOE 771 01 Ethernet Option Adapter 140 NOE 771 10 FactoryCast Ethernet Option Adapter 140 NOE 771 11 FactoryCast Ethernet Option Adapter 140 NWM 100 00 FactoryCast HMI Option Adapter 140 CPU 651 50 CPU with embedded Ethernet port 140 CPU 651 60 CPU with embedded Ethernet port This document describes how to install set up and use Ethernet enabled modules in a Modicon Quantum control system These modules allow the Quantum system to communicate with devices over an Ethernet network Topics addressed in this manual include e the hardware architecture of a Modicon Quantum Ethernet TCP IP module this module is designed to fit into a single slot on the standard Modicon Quantum backplane e capabilities and installation of the 140 NOE 771 xx and 140 NWM 100 00 modules in a Modicon Quantum system e capabilities of the Ethernet port on the 140 CPU 651 x0 CPU mod
27. a mpo Connection Options In order to run the configuration program it must first be downloaded to the PLC Prior to downloading the program the PLC must be connected to the PC containing the Unity Pro software The connection can be accomplished using a communication network such as Ethernet USB Modbus or Modbus Plus cabling We describe both the USB and Modbus cable setups in the following examples Connecting the PC to the PLC with a USB Cable Proceed as follows to connect the PC to the PLC with USB Step Action 1 Ensure that the Quantum system is powered up 2 Connect the PLC to the PC with a USB cable 3 On the PC click the Unity Pro PLC Set Address tab to bring up the Set Address dialog box PLC Simulator A Band Address Address TestCo v l 127 0 0 1 wr Meda Media l USB x TCPIP v 0 Communication Parameters Communication Parameters Ca H 365 33002479 07 2011 Installation and Configuration Step Action 4 Select USB in the PLC Media box 5 Leave the PLC Address field blank 6 Click OK 7 Proceed to Downloading and Running the Configuration Program see page 367 Connecting the PC to the PLC with a Modbus Cable Proceed as follows to connect the PC to the PLC with Modbus Step Action 1 Ensure that the Quantum system is powered up 2 Connect the PLC to the PC with a Modbus cable 3 On t
28. e NOK 1 SMTP server can NOT be reached OK 2 SMTP server can be reached smtpSrvChkFailCnt 9 number of times link to SMTP server has been detected as down 33002479 07 2011 265 Using the Mail Service 266 33002479 07 2011 Embedded Web Pages 11 Introduction This chapter presents the contents of the embedded Web pages contained in the Quantum 140 NOE 771 xx modules These Web pages enable you to access diagnostic information view configuration information and change the online configurations for the module What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Quantum Home Page 268 Monitoring Home Page 269 Diagnostics Home Page 270 Setup Home Page 271 Accessing the Web Utility Home Page 272 Configured Local Rack Page 273 CPU Configuration Page 274 CPU Configuration Screen Data Field Descriptions 275 Remote I O Status 276 Quantum PLC Data Monitor Page 277 SNMP Configuration 278 Global Data Publish Subscribe Utility Configuration 281 Configure Address Server Page 284 Configuring the Time Synchronization Service 287 Mail Service Configuration 295 Ethernet Module Diagnostic Pages 297 NTP Diagnostics Page 304 NOE Properties Page 306 Contacting Schneider Electric Page 307 33002479 07 2011 267 Embedded Web Pages Quantum Home Page
29. 200C Bad pattern for change address request 200D Bad address for change address request 200E The control block is not assigned or parts of the control block are located outside of the MW 4x range 30ss Exceptional response by Modbus slave see page 143 4001 Inconsistent response by Modbus slave 5001 Inconsistent response by the network 6007 Invalid slot ID 6mss Routing path error see page 144 The subfield m shows where the error occurred a 0 value means local node 2 means 2nd device in route etc 33002479 07 2011 141 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks TCP IP Ethernet Network Errors Hexadecimal error codes for TCP IP Ethernet Hex Error Code Meaning 5004 Interrupted system call 5005 I O error 5006 No such address 5009 Socket descriptor is invalid 500C Not enough memory 500D Permission denied 5011 Entry exists 5016 Argument is invalid 5017 Internal table has run out of space 5020 Connection is broken 5028 Destination address required 5029 Protocol wrong type for socket 502A Protocol not available 502B Protocol not supported 502C Socket type not supported 502D Operation not supported on a socket 502E Protocol family not supported 502F Address family not supported 5030 Address already in use 5031 Cannot assign requested address 5032 Socket operation on a non socket 5
30. 246 Using the R_NTPC Block for Time Synchronization 249 NTP Time Synchronization Service Operating Conditions 251 Configuring the NTP Time Service 0 000 cece eee eee 252 Electronic Mail Notification Service 257 Introducing the Electronic Mail Notification Service 258 Mail SENICE na o be ah nde Bd ead wtnoaite oleae Saas wo a E E dd 260 Using the MBP_MSTR Block for Mail Service Communication 262 Mail Service Error Codes 1 0 0 0 cece ett 264 Electronic Mail Notification Service Subtree 0000 265 Embedded Web Pages 000s seeeeeeeneeeee 267 Quantum Home Page cece eee 268 Monitoring Home Page 0 cece eee 269 Diagnostics Home Page 0 2 eee ee ee 270 Setup Home Page sei s5 wor a hess See eek nnana 271 Accessing the Web Utility Home Page 20 ee eee 272 Configured Local Rack Page 0 2 eee e eects 273 CPU Configuration Page 6 0 ects 274 CPU Configuration Screen Data Field Descriptions 275 Remote I O Status 2 0 0 0 ee tees 276 Quantum PLC Data Monitor Page aasan cece eee ee 277 SNMP Configuration 0 0 00 cette ee 278 Global Data Publish Subscribe Utility Configuration 281 Configure Address Server Page ce cece eee eee 284 Configuring the Time Synchronization Service 287 Mail Service Con
31. Also you can configure the SysContact and SysLocation via the configuration page in the module s embedded web pages After making changes in the SNMP Configuration Web page and to set those changes reboot the module using hot swap 234 33002479 07 2011 SNMP Configuring an NOE with TFE Private MIB Introduction A MIB a Management Information Base is an element used in network management Network management services are based on the need to monitor and manage e performance e fault occurrences e security Each MIB contains a finite number of objects Manage your MIB with a management station running an SNMP management application The management application uses GETs and SETs to retrieve system information and to set system environment variables Schneider Private MIB Schneider Electric obtained a Private Enterprise Number PEN from the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority IANA That number represents a subtree in the SNMP MIB a number that is a unique identifier used for Groupe Schneider The object identifier for the root of the Groupe Schneider subtree is 1 3 6 1 4 1 3833 and represents a path to the subtree as follows iso 1 org 3 dod 6 internet 1 private 4 enterprise 1 GroupeSchneider 3833 Transparent_Factory_Ethernet 1 Under the GroupeSchneider private MIB is a Transparent Factory Ethernet TFE private MIB Transparent_Factory_Ethernet 1 33002479 07 2011 235 SNM
32. Code 7301 Invalid opcode in an MSTR block request from the Quantum translator 7303 Read Write QSE module status 200 route address out of range 7309 Attempt to write to a write protected register when a status write is carried out 200 route 731D Invalid route found by the Quantum translator Valid routes e dest_drop OxFF e 200 dest_drop OxFF 100 drop dest_drop OxFF e All other routing values produce an error 734B One of the following errors occurred No CTE configuration extension table has been configured No CTE table entry has been made for the QSE model slot number No valid drop has been specified The QSE module has not been reset after the creation of the CTE Note After writing and configuring the CTE and downloading to the QSE module the QSE module must be reset for the modifications to become effective When using an MSTR instruction no valid slot or drop has been specified 33002479 07 2011 147 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks Read Data Description A read operation transfers data from a specified slave source device to a master destination device on the network It uses a master transaction path and may require several cycles to complete To program an MBP_MSTR block to perform a write operation use function code 2 see page 137 NOTE Do not attempt to program an MBP _MSTR to read to its own station address This action causes the function block to generate
33. Configuration 22 seuser enie chs Daye eee anne ie eas 104 Quantum NOE Ethernet Messaging Configuration 105 3 4 Selecting the Ethernet Coprocessor 00 cece eee eee eee 108 Selecting the Modicon Quantum with Unity Ethernet Controller 109 Configuring the IP Address of the Ethernet Controller 111 Modicon Quantum with Unity Ethernet Controller Messaging Contiguration aeg 22 etcks ke eed EN eet SE Te 112 Part Ill Using the Modicon Quantum with Unity Ethernet SGIVICES 3 i655 va APC innen ohh Gta ca ca ek ees 113 Chapter 4 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks 115 4 1 Communications Issues 1 0 0 0 000 eects 116 Overloaded Network 0 0 0 cece eee teens 116 4 2 IEC Data Transfer Functions 00 000 c cece eee eee 118 CREAD REG irnia aaa a e a E EANA sateen die oh eh 119 CWRITE REGS is cca ets ae ee ae Be eee EE eed 122 READ REG sje teehee tetas wetted Tate ttle otis Meth ah eos teak Aaa ot al ode 125 WRITE ARE Gig eaea bie ns certian abate se ea A AGr erie dr E ka 128 TCP2IP2ADDR sues itis cee Ad Aone ies Pea eae ioa 131 33002479 07 2011 4 3 MBPMS TR i At eh oe Ge a ees Sie aes 133 Bl ck Description sne sient teen inetd a Pea ie eed Re cea Ry dae bo 134 Operational Function Codes 0 0 0 c eee eee eee eee 137 Network Control Block Structures 00 0 eee eee eee 138 Modbus Plus SY MAX and Ethernet TCP IP Error Codes 141 C
34. Eastern Standard Time Indiana East Indianapolis No GMT 04 00 SA Western Standard Time Caracas La Paz No GMT 04 00 Pacific SA Standard Time Santiago Yes GMT 03 30 Newfoundland Standard Time Newfoundland St Johns Yes GMT 03 00 E South America Standard Time Brasilia Sao_Paulo Yes GMT 03 00 SA Eastern Standard Time Buenos Aires Georgetown No GMT 02 00 Mid Atlantic Standard Time South_Georgia No GMT 01 00 Azores Standard Time Azores Cape Verde Island Yes GMT Universal Coordinated Time Casablanca Monrovia No GMTO Greenwich Mean Time Dublin Edinburgh Lisbon London Yes GMT 01 00 Romance Standard Time Amsterdam CopenHagen Madrid Paris Vilnius Yes GMT 01 00 Central European Standard Time Belgrade Sarajevo Skopje Sofija Zagreb Yes GMT 01 00 Central Europe Standard Time Bratislava Budapest Ljubljana Prague Warsaw Yes GMT 01 00 W Europe Standard Time Brussels Berlin Bern Rome Stockholm Vienna Yes GMT 02 00 GTB Standard Time Athens Istanbul Minsk Yes GMT 02 00 E Europe Standard Time Bucharest Yes GMT 02 00 Egypt Standard Time Cairo Yes GMT 02 00 South Africa Standard Time Johannesburg Harare Pretoria No GMT 02 00 FLE Standard Time Helsinki Riga Tallinn Yes GMT 02 00 Israel Standard Time Israel Jerusalem Yes GMT 03 00 Arabic Standard Time Baghdad Yes GMT 03 00 Arab Standard Time Kuwait Riyadh No GMT 03 00 Russian Standard Time Moscow S
35. Entry Numbers See the table for mapping entry numbers to bits Each entry number represents a logical device on the network Setting Bits If Device Control Block bit is set to 0 Device is enabled e 1 Device is disabled Mapping Device Control Block Bits to I O Scanner Entry Numbers Single Word W Register MDx 4 W1 Table 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 115 J16 MW_ Entry x 1 Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 W2 Table 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 MW_ Entry x 2 Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 W3 Table 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 MW_ Entry X 3 Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Word 4 through Word 7 Table Entry 49 through 112 w8 Table 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 MW_ Entry x 8 Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 NOTE Bits are counted from right to left starting from bit O low bit Examples to configure MD1 4 as a device control block in the I O Scanner table use MW2 bit 15 to enable or disable table entry 1 Use MW3 bit 15 to enable or disable table entry 17 Double Word DW Register MDx 4 DW1 Table 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
36. Fiber Optic T Connector Ethernet Switch NOTE The following three items are required 1 Two identical systems 2 identical order of modules in each rack 3 identical software revisions The NOEs are connected to the same switch Connecting to the same switch is recommended because the NOEs communicate with each other in order to swap the IP address There are two reasons to connect to the same switch e f a failure to communicate between the NOEs occurs the time to swap increases e To minimize the probability of a failure connect the two NOEs to the same switch The other requirement for the switches is that they are on the same sub network 312 33002479 07 2011 Hot Standby NOE Module Configuration and Hot Standby TCP IP Configuration When the NOE module goes into service the first time it attempts to get its IP address from a BOOTP server If a BOOTP server is not available the NOE module derives its IP address from its MAC address Connecting to a BOOTP server or deriving the IP address from a MAC address gives you a connection to the NOE and you can then download a project to the PLC All standard rules apply to IP addressing with the additional restriction that the IP address cannot be greater than 253 or broadcast address minus 2 Also no other device can be assigned the configured IP 1 address 33002479 07 2011 313 Hot Standby NOE IP Address Assignment Configurin
37. HTTP Server Web Configuration and Diagnostics HTTP Server The Modicon Quantum with Unity Ethernet modules Hypertext Transport Protocol HTTP server is available as soon as the module receives an IP address Use the HTTP Server to 1 view e the module s Ethernet statistics e the controller and I O information e the server information BOOTP DHCP FDR e the diagnostic information for some Ethernet services 2 configure the module s Ethernet services Use Internet Explorer version 4 0 or higher For a complete list of services see the Key Features table see page 42 The HTTP server is protected with a default user name and password Default user name USER case sensitive Default password USER case sensitive Change either the user name or password via the Configuration page on the Ethernet modules embedded web pages see page 86 For the NOE 771 11 modules user names and passwords can be changed via the FactoryCast Configurator NOTE The NOE 771 xx and CPU 651 xx support a maximum of 32 HTTP simultaneous connections Browsers may open multiple connections so 32 HTTP connections do not indicate 32 simultaneous users NOTE The NOE 771 00 and NOE 771 01 modules do not support user downloaded Web pages You will need to purchase either the NOE 771 10 NOE 771 11 or the NWM 100 00 module to support user downloaded Web pages 86 33002479 07 2011 Ethernet Communication Services
38. Meaning CONTROL 1 3 get local statistics CONTROL 2 Indicates the error status CONTROL 3 Number of addresses to be read from local statistics 0 37 Note The size of databuf must be the size of this entry CONTROL 4 First address from which the statistics table must be read Reg1 0 CONTROL 5 Routing register Most significant byte Network adapter module slot CONTROL 6 CONTROL 9 Not used 152 33002479 07 2011 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks Clear Local Statistics Description A clear local statistics operation clears the values from words 13 22 in the statistics table of the local node The operation is carried out in one cycle and does not require a master transaction path To program an MBP_MSTR block to clear local statistics use function code 4 see page 137 Network Implementation A clear local statistics operation can be performed on Modbus Plus and TCP IP Ethernet networks see page 157 Control Block Usage for Modbus Plus Register Meaning CONTROL 1 4 clear local statistics CONTROL 2 Indicates the error status CONTROL 3 Reserved CONTROL 4 Reserved CONTROL 5 Routing register 1 is used to specify the address routing path address 1 of 5 of the node during a network transfer The last byte in the routing path that is not 0 is the destination mode Control Block Usage for TCP I
39. NOE Diagnostics Global Data 188 33002479 07 2011 I O Scanner Introduction This chapter discusses the Ethernet modules I O scanner capabilities What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page I O Scanner Concepts 190 Configuring the Quantum I O Scanner 194 I O Scanning Contextual Menu for Copy Cut Paste 199 I O Scanning with Multiple Lines 201 Introduction to Configuring Advantys from Unity Pro 203 Introduction to Configuring the PRM Master DTM 206 Property Box 208 Saving an Advantys Configuration in an Unity Pro Application 213 Managed Variables 214 I O Scanner Response Times Remote Input to Remote Output 216 33002479 07 2011 189 Transferring Data with the I O Scanner I O Scanner Concepts Introduction The I O Scanner is a feature that resides in an Ethernet NOE 771 00 01 11 and CPU 651 x0 modules The I O Scanner allows through a controller repeated reading from and or writing to scanned devices Use the I O scanner to transfer data between network devices Configure the I O Scanner with Schneider Electric s programming package Unity Pro I O Scanner configuration information see page 194 appears elsewhere in this guide Health Block Bits Each bit corresponds to an entry in the I O Scanner table Each entry in the table represents one logical device The bits contain the health status f
40. The Quantum NOE Ethernet module receives its IP address parameter through a BOOTP server on startup Ethernet configuration Select the default protocol as Ethernet or 802 3 104 33002479 07 2011 Start Communication with Unity Pro Quantum NOE Ethernet Messaging Configuration Introduction Ethernet messaging gives the user the opportunity to send and receive Ethernet messages Data traffic is handled by the client server procedure Parameter description Setting Description Connection configuration Activates general data transfer Access Activates data transfer between specific nodes IP Address Defines the node for the Ethernet Messaging procedure Access Control Activates or deactivates control of remote devices that are attempting to open a TCP connection to the module Messaging Tab The following procedure shows how to access the Messaging page Step Action 1 In the Unity Pro project browser go to the Structural view Expand the Communication folder until you locate the name of the Ethernet logical network associated with the module Right click the Ethernet logical network and select Open Result The module configuration screen appears Select the Messaging tab See the illustration below 33002479 07 2011 105 Start Communication with Unity Pro The Messaging tab is shown below Model Family TCPIP
41. Ver 1 0 or higher Modlink Ver 2 0 or higher Modsoft Ver 2 6 or higher ProWORX NxT Ver 2 1 or higher Firmware CPU Type and version Quantum Executive Ver 2 0 or higher NOE Upgradeable Field Upgradeable via FTP or Programming Panel Operating Conditions Temperature 0 to 60 C Humidity 0 to 95 Rh non condensing 60 C Altitude 15 000 ft 4500 m Vibration 10 57 Hz 0 0075 mm d a 57 150 Hz 1g 33002479 07 2011 335 Specifications Storage Conditions Temperature 40 to 85 C Humidity 0 to 95 Rh non condensing 60 C Free Fall 1 m unpackaged Shock 3 shocks axis 15 g 11 ms 140 NWM 100 00 Specification Table The main specifications for the Quantum 140 NWM 100 00 Ethernet module are described in the following table Specification Description Communication Ports One auto sensing 10 100 BASE T shielded twisted pair RJ 45 connector port and one 100 BASE FX MT RJ connector port Both ports transmit and receive Modbus commands encapsulated in TCP IP protocol Bus Current Required 900 mA Power Dissipation 4 5 W Fuse None Programming Software Type and version Concept Ver 2 6 or higher Unity Pro Ver 1 0 or higher Firmware CPU Type and version Quantum Executive Ver 2 6 or higher NOE Upgradeable Field Upgradeable via FTP or Programming
42. What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following sections Section Topic Page 3 1 How to Configure the Communication 92 3 2 Unity Soft Communication Links 97 3 3 Selecting the Ethernet Module 101 3 4 Selecting the Ethernet Coprocessor 108 33002479 07 2011 91 Start Communication with Unity Pro 3 1 How to Configure the Communication Overview This section describes how to configure the communication What s in this Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Add a New Network to the Communication Folder 93 Configure Network 94 Properties of a Network 95 Delete an Existing Network Folder 96 92 33002479 07 2011 Start Communication with Unity Pro Add a New Network to the Communication Folder Add a New Network to the Communication Folder After starting a new application the Communication folder under the Station tree branches the Network folder and the Routing table folder Premium platforms only These two folders are empty Under the Network folder the user can insert the networks by menu A click on the right mouse button above Network pops up a contextual menu The user selects the type of network he wants to add For easier use a network name will be suggested with the prefix of the network type Ethernet_1 or Modbus _1 By choosing a new network the next available number for the network is chosen automati
43. e lf the same PC is used for the import upload and export download and the Unity Pro Project Path has not changed the island configuration is synchronized with ACS e Ifthe same PC is not used for the import upload and export download or if the Unity Pro Project Path has changed either e Create a new island e Use the File menu gt Copy Island Contents function NOTE The new Device Name isl file is copied to the Project Path directory 33002479 07 2011 213 Tra nsferring Data with the I O Scanner Managed Variables At a Glance Variables of devices that are linked to Unity Pro through I O Scanning or DTM are managed variables They are created by the device configuration tool or by the DTM and are imported into Unity Pro They are named as a concatenation of the Property box see page 208 Device Name device symbol name Managed Variables in the Data Editor Advantys symbols become managed variables when imported into Unity Pro An Advantys managed variable name is a concatenation of the Advantys island name Advantys symbol name This Data Editor illustration shows managed variables with their device name prefixes and their Owner attributes Data Editor Variables Function Blocks Filter T amp EDT v ppt _ loppT Name Type v Address v Value Comment Owner v ONEN SBM Vano T MW200 J New _STB_R1 New STB DFB Types DDT Types Name PRM_MASTER 23 PROFIBUS S
44. from 0 65535 in multiples of e f you are running Unity Pro V2 0 or higher e 140 NOE 771 01 11 16 ms e 140 CPU 651 x0 10 ms e f you are running Unity Pro V4 0 e 140 NOE 771 01 11 5 ms min 200 ms max e 140 CPU 651 x0 5 ms Unit ID User configured Configure ID only if using a bridge Operation through a bridge Modbus bridge Supported Modbus Plus bridge Supported Elsewhere in this guide is information about I O scan response times for high performance communications modules see page 216 Using the I O Scanner with an IP Router NOTE The I O Scanners in the 140 NOE 771 x1 modules and 140 CPU 651 x0 send out requests with a Time To Live TTL of 10 which allows passage through multiple routers Device Control Block Important information about using the Device Control Block Registers The Device Control Block consists of registers either eight 8 single words or four 4 double words Contents of the registers are mapped in the controllers memory Each bit corresponds to an entry in the table see the tables below Disabling Devices Each I O Scanner device can be disabled To disable individual devices 1 Select the Device Control Block option on the I O Scanner tab in Unity Pro Insert a check mark in the box 2 Set the associated bit 1 33002479 07 2011 191 Transferring Data with the I O Scanner Mapping Device Control Block Bits to I O Scanner
45. no action is required since the daylight saving time start and end are automatically changed each year 2 Polling Time Parameter The time in seconds is the time between time updates from the NTP server The default is 5 seconds 3 Storing the Time Service Configuration The last time service configuration is saved internally in the Ethernet module 4 Replacing the Ethernet Module If the Ethernet module has to be replaced the stored configuration is lost and the system returns to the default configuration 288 33002479 07 2011 Embedded Web Pages Customizing Time Zone Parameters If you want a time zone not listed in the time zone table Step Action Comment 1 Write the text rules for the custom time zone 2 Using an FTP client store your rules in the file FLASHO wwwroot conf NTP customrules user ID ntpupdate password ntpupdate Root directory to store customrules is set by the FTP server as FLASHO wwwroot conf NTP 3 When the rules are written choose the drop down menu on the NTP Configuration web page and configure or reboot the module by selecting Time Zone Custom edited If the tz compiler detects a syntax error in customrules the error is logged in the file FLASHO wwwroot conf NTP error log 1 NTP component is not launched 2 NTP Status field in diagnostic web page displays NOT OK The NTP component looks for customrules calls the tz compiler and
46. 1 1 normal operation The low byte is managed by the controller e Set 0 e The clock value is NOT available e The date time is NOT updated within last two minutes e Set 1 e The date time is updated within the last two minutes e The date time is acceptable The high byte is managed by the NOE e Set 0 e The NTP server clock value is not available e Set 1 The updated date time is received from server and sent to the module at least once e within two minute time interval e acceptable 10 ms or less error For a valid time in the CPU the low and high bytes of the STATUS parameter must be set to 1 250 33002479 07 2011 Using the NTP Time Service NTP Time Synchronization Service Operating Conditions Introduction This material describes special operating conditions related to e powering up e stop or run PLC e downloading applications e configuring the time service Power up To establish the accurate Ethernet system network time the system does the following at power up e requires the Ethernet module to boot e uses the Ethernet module to obtain the time from the NTP server e requires a predefined interval until time is accurate user s configuration determines how long before time is accurate e may require several updates to achieve peak accuracy Once an accurate time is received the service sets the STATUS in the associated time service register The time service cl
47. 11 8 Reserved 7 4 Module type see table below 3 Reserved 0 half duplex 1 full duplex 1 0 not configured 1 configured 0 0 not running 1 running NOTE Bits are numbered from right to left starting with bit O low bit For example PLC running 0000 0000 0000 0001 and LED connection 1000 0000 0000 0000 The following table describes the word bit definitions for board status for the e 140 NOE 771 x1 version 3 5 e 140 NOE 771 x0 versions 1 02 and 2 0 e 140 CPU 651 x0 Bit Definition 15 12 Module type see table below 11 Reserved 10 0 half duplex 1 full duplex 9 0 not configured 1 configured 0 PLC not running 1 PLC NOE running 0 Link LED off 1 Link LED on 0 Appl LED off 1 Appl LED on 8 7 6 5 0 twisted pair 1 fiber 158 33002479 07 2011 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks 0 10 Mbit 1 100 Mbit 3 0 Reserved NOTE Bits are counted from right to left starting with bit O low bit For example PLC running 0x0100 Application LED 0x0040 and LED Connection 0x0080 Board Status Word Bit Definition by Module Type The following table describes the values of the module types Value of Bits 7 4 or 15 12 Module Type Note See the previous tables fo
48. 270 33002479 07 2011 Embedded Web Pages Setup Home Page Home Page Illustration The NOE 771 11 Setup page page lists the various services used to configure the module You can navigate to this page from the link on the Home Page see page 268 The Setup page looks like this FactoryCast NOE 771 11 Home Documentation Monitoring Control Schneider m eEleccric Setup Diagnostics Maintenance FactoryCast Copyright 2008 Schneider Automation SAS All Rights reserved I Intemet Setup Page Links These links are on the Setup page Link Result SNMP Provides the ability to configure the SNMP Agent in the NOE Address Server see page 284 Configure the IP assignments including showing the BOOTP and DHCP database Global Data see page 186 Displays the Global Data Configuration page Configure the Group Address Multicast filtering Distribution period Health Time Out Health Bits and Data Zones The Global Data Configuration page also displays a Variable Table NTP Configure the IP address of the primary and secondary NTP server Set a polling period Select a see page 287 time zone from the drop down list and automatic adjustment for daylight savings time Email Configure the email server s IP and Port default port is 25 If security is required select Enable see page 83 and set a Login and Password Create three mail h
49. 33002479 07 2011 73 Ethernet Communication Services Address Server Overview BOOTP Server NOE BOOTP Server DHCP Server The following information describes the services provided by the address server e BOOTP server e DHCP server The DHCP server responds to both a DHCP and a BOOTP server NOTE The BOOTP server is available on the 140 NOE 771 xx models The BOOTstrap Protocol BOOTP software compliant with RFC 951 is used to assign IP addresses to nodes on an Ethernet network Devices hosts on the network issue BOOTP requests during their initialization sequence ABOOTP server that receives the request will extract the required IP address information from its database and place it in BOOTP response messages to the requesting devices The devices will use the assigned IP addresses from the BOOTP server for all network communication NOTE In order for BOOTP to work properly you need to correctly configure the following e P address e subnetwork mask e gateway address Your NOE 771 xx module comes supplied with a BOOTP server This feature allows you to provide IP addresses to all the I O devices being serviced by the NOE 771 xx Providing a BOOTP server that is built into your NOE 771 xx module eliminates the need for an external BOOTP server NOTE The NOE 771 xx s BOOTP server can not provide its own IP address You can configure your NOE 771 xxs BOOTP server from the module s HTTP Web page Config
50. 364 671 140 CPU 65 150 with NOE 771 x1 v3 3 The 140 CPU 65 150 with an NOE 771 x1 v3 3 is used used for the following measurements 700 600 500 400 300 200 100 0 Time ms 0 50 100 150 200 250 PLC Scan Time ms The plot shows four lines representing the number of scanned devices e 1 device e 8 devices e 16 devices e 32 devices 217 Transferring Data with the I O Scanner The four lines are indistinguishable at this scale because the response times are so similar You can see the similarity in the following table of data from which the above graph was plotted Number of Devices to Scan Time from Scanned Device Input to Scanned Device Output ms 65150 NOE 771x1 v3 3 10 ms scan 20 ms scan 50 ms scan 100 ms scan 200 ms scan 1 device 35 61 153 302 602 8 devices 36 62 154 303 603 16 devices 38 64 155 305 606 32 devices 40 66 157 307 609 218 33002479 07 2011 Address Server Configuration Faulty Device Replacement Introduction This chapter covers the Address Server Configuration Faulty Device Replacement service available on the NOE 771 01 and 11 Transparent Factory Real Time modules and HE CPU modules The Faulty Device Replacement service offers you a method of handling device replacement without disrupting the system or service What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page
51. Address Server Configuration Faulty Device Replacement 220 Understanding Faulty Device Replacement 222 Configuring Faulty Device Replacement 224 33002479 07 2011 219 Address Server Configuration Faulty Device Replacement Address Server Configuration Faulty Device Replacement Overview The address server provides two capabilities 1 Standard BOOTP server behavior Enter the MAC address and IP configuration The NOE BOOTP server will provide the IP configuration when the device sends a BOOTP request 2 Faulty Device Replacement FDR behavior Enter the role name or the MAC address of the device The device will send its role name or the MAC address with its DHCP request With the DHCP response from the NOE the device will receive its IP Configuration plus the name and location of a configuration file The next step for an FDR compliant device is to download its configuration from the NOE NOTE Consult your Schneider Electric sales representative for the current list of FDR compliant devices The address server in the NOE supports both modes at the same time You select a mode by entering either the MAC address or the role name in the Address Server Node Configuration see page 284 page You may enter only one or the other but not both The Faulty Device Replacement capability allows automatic configuration of FDR compliant devices Identifying a Role Name Role Name Role names play an important role in F
52. Addresses 1 0 Scanning l M1 IW MW Global Data l MW only IW MW 1 All 1 0 Scanning and Global Data Health Bit Block address assignments for a Quantum safety application must be made in unrestricted memory address areas 48 33002479 07 2011 Product Description 1 3 Installing the Module Introduction This section contains installation and configuration information for the NOE 771 xx Ethernet modules What s in this Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Before You Begin 50 Cable Schemes 52 Security 54 Mounting the Module in the Quantum PLC Backplane 55 Connecting the Cable 57 Assigning Ethernet Address Parameters 58 Establishing the FTP Password 61 Establishing HTTP and Write Passwords for NOE 64 Using BOOTP Lite to Assign Address Parameters 67 33002479 07 2011 49 Product Description Before You Begin Initial Checks 4 CAUTION UNINTENTIONAL OPERATION If you do not enter the correct address pairs into the BOOTP server you could communicate to the wrong device e Ensure that the MAC address matches the intended IP address in your BOOTP server Having two or more devices with the same IP address can cause unpredictable operation of your network e Ensure that your Ethernet module receives a unique IP address Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage
53. B Specifications 335 C Quantum Ethernet TCP IP Modbus Application Protocol 339 D Installation and Configuration of a Modicon Quantum Platform 351 33002479 07 2011 323 324 33002479 07 2011 Maintenance A Introduction This chapter details information about system maintenance including accessing and clearing the crash log and downloading the new NOE exec What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Responding to Errors 326 Reading and Clearing the Crash Log 330 Downloading a New NOE Exec 331 Downloading a New NOE Exec via FTP 332 Downloading a New NOE Kernel 334 33002479 07 2011 325 Maintenance Responding to Errors Overview Detecting Errors The following information describes how to respond to errors on the NOE module When faults occur the NOE module s LED display can help you determine what went wrong The following figure shows the pattern that the LEDs should display during normal operation 140 NOE 771 xx ETHERNET TCP IP Active Ready Run Link The Run indicator will be solid The Coll collision LED may flash indicating that collisions are occurring on the Ethernet network Such collisions are normal If a fault occurs the normal LEDs may be extinguished or other indicators may light This topic discusses errors reported by the Active Ready Coll Link Kernel Appl and Fault indicators
54. Data publish subscribe utility is a powerful function incorporated into the NOE product line Implementing Global Data requires a configuration that spans many PLCs throughout the system Therefore we recommend pre planning your installation before implementation Pre planning saves time and money by e reducing errors which circumvents a debugging effort e ensuring system consistency Go to paper before computer We offer the following table to assist in system planning The Global Data Planning Spreadsheet below is a graphic representation of a recommended configuration table for system planning You can create your own table using the format below or you can download a Microsoft Exce spreadsheet template which is available on the Schneider public Web site Here is the graphic representation of the Global Data Planning Spreadsheet Parameter Variable ID Symbol Length Device Number Variable Checking Registers Public Status 1 2 3 1 VALVE_STATUS 20 PUB SUB NONE OK 2 VALVE_CONTROL_ 10 SUB NONE PUB OK 64 PUMP_CONTROL 50 SUB PUB NONE OK Device Publication Status OK OK OK Total Publication Size per Node 20 50 10 Total Subscription Size per Node 60 20 0 Group IP Address 239 255 255 0 Multicast Filtering Enabled OFF Default MW Address for MW100 Health Distribution Period 10 Health Timeout 1000 Data Zone MW200 Ent
55. Ethernet CONTROL Register Meaning CONTROL 1 10 reset optional module CONTROL 2 Indicates the error status CONTROL 3 No significance CONTROL 4 No significance CONTROL 5 Routing register see page 140 CONTROL 6 No significance CONTROL 9 33002479 07 2011 163 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks Read CTE Description A read CTE operation reads a specified number of bytes from the Ethernet configuration extension table in the specified buffer of PLC memory The bytes to be read start with a byte offset at the start of the CTE table The contents of the CTE table are displayed in the DATABUF output parameter see page 135 To program an MBP_MSTR block to perform a clear remote statistics operation use function code 11 see page 137 Network Implementation A read CTE operation can be performed on TCP IP Ethernet and SY MAX Ethernet networks Control Block Usage for TCP IP Ethernet Register Meaning CONTROL 1 11 read CTE CONTROL 2 Indicates the error status CONTROL 3 The length setting a value from 12 to 37 CONTROL 4 No significance CONTROL 5 Routing register Least significant byte mapping index Either a value displayed in the byte of the register or is not used ee significant byte network adapter module slot CONTROLJ 6 No significance CONTROLI9 Conirol Block Usage for SY MAX Ethernet
56. Example Entry This is the first column it has no name Valid range 1 128 Each entry represents an I O Scanning exchange on the network IP Address This is the IP address of the scanned 192 168 1 100 Ethernet slave device 362 33002479 07 2011 Installation and Configuration Parameter Description Example Device Name To configure a device Advantys island or DTM click the button to open the Property box see page 208 to start the device configuration software For an introduction to this procedure for Advantys go here see page 203 For an introduction to this procedure for DTMs go FDT Container NOTE While the Property box is open I O scanning cannot be edited MySTB1 or Master_PRM_DTM_10 Unit ID This field associates the slave address of the device connected to an Ethernet Modbus gateway with the IP address of that gateway e Value range 1 to 255 e Default value 255 When using a bridge enter the bridge index 1 to 255 in this field 255 Slave Syntax Use this drop down menu to pick the way RD Ref Slave and WR Ref Slave values are displayed There are 4 types of display available e Index 100 e Modbus 400101 e Modbus register e IEC 0 MW100 e M340 and Premium PLC slaves e IEC 1 MW101 e Quantum PLC slaves Index default value Health Timeout ms This field sets the maximum interval between the responses from
57. GMT 12 00 Fiji Standard Time Fiji Kamchatka Marshall Is No 294 33002479 07 2011 Embedded Web Pages Mail Service Configuration Configuring the Mail Service with the Email Configuration Page Use the module s embedded Web page to configure the Electronic Mail Notification service No other method is available Email Configuration 192 168 3 1 knight mycomp support_automation mycompany com Alarm 4 water level low Statio_N4 myManager mycompany com Warning Pump2 out of order Mail Service Command Buttons NOE _Pump2 support_automation mycompany com S Alarm 4 waterlevellow Statio N4 o myManager mycompany com S O Warning Pump2 out of order oY E DO E save Ganel O Button Description Save Saves the new Email configuration Note The previous configuration is no longer valid and it is not stored Cancel Cancels the entries in the fields The previous configuration is valid Disable Email Clears the stored configuration and disables the email service Note The next time the service is enabled a new configuration is required 33002479 07 2011 295 Embedded Web Pages Configurable Mail Service Parameters Parameter Description IP address of Email Enter a valid IP address This parameter identifies the SMTP server Port Default 25 If necessary you may enter a new value Password Authentic
58. Hot Standby modules are connected to each other via a fiber optic cable Both remote I O heads are connected to the remote I O network and to each other Schneider Electric recommends 1 remote I O networks use redundant cables drops are not redundant 2 switch connecting the NOEs to the network available switches e 499NES17100 e 499NOS17100 FactoryCast and User Customizable Web Pages Flash File System FactoryCast is a software package that you use to customize a Web site on the embedded Web server module The site can be accessed via a browser to view and modify data from a Modicon Quantum with Unity controller PLC FactoryCast provides all the Web pages and Java applets you need to view run time data from your controller You can use the FactoryCast default Web site simply by configuring the module and accessing it with a browser over an intranet Modules that use FactoryCast to add customized web pages on a site are e NOE 771 10 e NOE 771 11 e 140 NWM 100 00 The NOE 771 xx modules are equipped with a Flash File System which allows changing or updating the executive kernel and Web site files by an upload 88 33002479 07 2011 Modicon Quantum with Unity Ethernet Modules Services 33002479 07 2011 89 Ethernet Services 90 33002479 07 2011 Start Communication with Unity Pro 3 Introduction This chapter tells you how to begin Ethernet network configuration with Unity Pro
59. IP address or URL from your system administrator 2 Type the address or URL in the address or location box in the browser window The Schneider Electric Web Utility home page displays 3 On the Quantum home page see page 268 click Diagnostics 4 You will be requested to supply a user name and password 5 After supplying the user name password and clicking OK the Quantum Welcome Page appears The Quantum Welcome Page provides the links to all the Quantum configuration and diagnostic pages and to the Data Editor Data Monitor NOTE The default User Name is USER and the default password is USER Both should be changed by the system administrator during module installation 272 33002479 07 2011 Embedded Web Pages Configured Local Rack Page Overview The Configured Local Rack page shows the current configuration Diagnostics NOE Diagnostics ie Telemecanique a ng QUANTUM CONFIGURED LOCAL RACK lainienance Setup FactoryCast Copyright 1998 2004 Schneider Automation SAS All rights reserved Internet Configured Local Rack Page Overview The following table details the links on the Configured Local Rack page To view the pages related to each of these topics click the topic Link Display Global Data general diagnostics of the global data and a table of all see page 297 published subscribed variables in a dis
60. Johannesburg Harare Pretoria No GMT 02 00 FLE Standard Time Helsinki Riga Tallinn Yes GMT 02 00 Israel Standard Time Israel Jerusalem Yes GMT 03 00 Arabic Standard Time Baghdad Yes GMT 03 00 Arab Standard Time Kuwait Riyadh No GMT 03 00 Russian Standard Time Moscow St Petersburg Volgograd Yes GMT 03 00 E Africa Standard Time Nairobi No GMT 03 30 Iran Standard Time Tehran Yes GMT 04 00 Arabian Standard Time Abu Dhabi Muscat No GMT 04 00 Caucasus Standard Time Baku Tbilisi Yes GMT 04 00 Afghanistan Standard Time Kabul No GMT 05 00 Ekaterinburg Standard Time Ekaterinburg Yes GMT 05 00 West Asia Standard Time Islamabad Karachi Tashkent No GMT 05 30 India Standard Time Bombay Calcutta Madras New Delhi No GMT 06 00 Central Asia Standard Time Almaty Dhaka Yes 292 33002479 07 2011 Embedded Web Pages Time Zone Description DST Available GMT 05 00 SA Pacific Standard Time Bogota Lima Quito No GMT 05 00 Eastern Standard Time New York Yes GMT 05 00 Eastern Standard Time Indiana East Indianapolis No GMT 04 00 SA Western Standard Time Caracas La Paz No GMT 04 00 Pacific SA Standard Time Santiago Yes GMT 03 30 Newfoundland Standard Time Newfoundland St Johns Yes GMT 03 00 E South America Standard Time Brasilia Sao_
61. MET mapping index is 6 the first element of the data structure looks as follows High value byte Low value byte a p gt lt a B o 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 Op Oy By BeBe A LO High value byte Slots 1 16 Low value byte MBP on Ethernet Transporter MET mapping index 132 33002479 07 2011 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks 4 3 MBP_MSTR Overview This section describes the 14 different communication function provided in the MBP_MSTR function block What s in this Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Block Description 134 Operational Function Codes 137 Network Control Block Structures 138 Modbus Plus SY MAX and Ethernet TCP IP Error Codes 141 CTE Error Codes for SY MAX and TCP IP Ethernet 145 SY MAX Specific Error Codes 146 Read Data 148 Write Data 150 Get Local Statistics 152 Clear Local Statistics 153 Get Remote Statistics 154 Clear Remote Statistics 156 TCP IP Ethernet Network Statistics 157 TCP IP Ethernet Error Codes 160 Reset Optional Module 163 Read CTE 164 Write CTE 166 Send Email 168 Send Modbus Request 170 Close Connection Request 175 Read Write Data 176 33002479 07 2011 133 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks Block Description Function Description You can select one of 14 available network com
62. No IP address The module is No IP address The module is attempting to obtain an IP address attempting to obtain an IP address from a BOOTP server Module is from a BOOTP server set to its default IP address 6 Invalid IP configuration Likely Using default IP address cause Default gateway is not on the same subnet mask Module is set to its default IP address 7 No valid executive NOE present No valid executive NOE present Not used Not used Flash file system inoperative 33002479 07 2011 45 Product Description Connectors and Cabling Overview The following information describes the 10 100 BASE T and 100 BASE FX connectors 10 100 BASE T Twisted Pair Connector The NOE 771 xx NWM 100 00 and CPU 651 x0 modules 10 100 BASE T connector shown below is a standard RJ 45 twisted pair socket 8 q Pins lt aT ain Schneider Electric recommends that you use Category 5 STP cabling which is rated to 100 Mbps with an RJ 45 connector The eight pins are arranged vertically and numbered in order from the bottom to the top The RJ 45 pinout used by this module is e Receive Data 3 e Receive Data 6 e Transmit Data 1 e Transmit Data 2 100 BASE FX The 100 BASE FX connector for the NOE 771 xx NWM 100 00 and CPU 651 60 modules is an MT RJ socket or a mating fiber optic cable connector For the NOE 771 xx and NWM 100 00 you may need an MT RJ to
63. O modules is only possible when only one read or write job is carried out in every cycle If several jobs are sent per PLC cycle the communication stops without generating an error message in the status register of the function block The entire routing information is contained in data structure WordArr5 of input AddrFld The type of function block connected to this input and thus the contents of the data structure depends on the network used Please use e TCP IP Ethernet the function block TCP_IP_ADDR NOTE For experts The WordArr5 data structure can be used with constants as well NOTE This function block puts a heavy load on the network therefore the network load must be carefully monitored If the network load is too high the program logic should be reorganized in order to work with the READ_REG function block a variation of this function block that does not operate in a continuous mode but under command control 120 33002479 07 2011 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks SLAVEREG NO_REG REG_READ STATUS SLAVEREG is the start of the area in the addressed slave from which the source data is read The source area always resides within the MW word 4x register area SLAVEREG expects the source reference as offset within that area In 4x registers the leading 4 must be omitted For example 59 contents of the variables or value of the literal 40059 The parameter can be specified as direct
64. Panel Operating Conditions Temperature 0 to 60 C Humidity 0 to 95 Rh non condensing 60 C Altitude 15 000 ft 4500 m Vibration 10 57 Hz 0 0075 mm d a 57 150 Hz 1g Storage Conditions Temperature 40 to 85 C Humidity 0 to 95 Rh non condensing 60 C Free Fall 1 m unpackaged Shock 3 shocks axis 15 g 11 ms 336 33002479 07 2011 Specifications Specification Description Immunity International Standard IEC 61131 2 US Standard UL 508 European Standard EN61131 2 EN50081 2 Canadian Standard CAN CSA C22 2 No 142 Agency Approvals UL UL 508 CSA CSA 142 CE EN61131 2 Factory Mutual Class 1 Division 2 33002479 07 2011 337 Specifications 338 33002479 07 2011 Quantum Ethernet TCP IP Modbus Application Protocol C Introduction This chapter describes the Quantum Ethernet TCP IP Modbus Application Protocol What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Modbus Application Protocol Overview 340 Modbus Application Protocol PDU 342 Modbus Application Protocol Service Classes 344 Modbus Application Protocol PDU Analysis 345 TCP IP Specific Issues 347 Closing a TCP Connection 348 Reference Documents 349 33002479 07 2011 339 Ethernet TCP IP Modbus Application Protocol Modbus Application Pr
65. Red Flashes when the NOE is in crash state Run Green Flashes to indicate diagnostic code as described below Coll Red Flashes when Ethernet collisions occur Link Green On when Ethernet link is active Tx Act Green Flashes to indicate Ethernet transmission Rx Act Green Flashes to indicate Ethernet reception 10MB Green On when the module is connected to a 10 Megabit network 100MB Green On when the module is connected to a 100 Megabit network Fduplex On when Ethernet is operating in the full duplex mode Kernel Amber On when in Kernel Mode Flashing while in download mode Appl Green On when crash log entry exists 44 33002479 07 2011 Product Description Run LED Status The following table lists each available state of the Run LED indicator and provides diagnostic information for that state in both the 140 NOE 771x1 module and the 140 NWM 100 module Indicator State Status for 140NOE771x1 Status for 140NWM100 On steady Normal operation The NOE module is ready for network communication Normal operation The NOE module is ready for network communication Number of flashes in sequence 1 Not used Not used 2 Not used Not used 3 No Link the network cable is not No Link the network cable is not connected or is defective connected or is defective 4 Duplicate IP address The module Duplicate IP address The module will be set to its default IP address will stay off line 5
66. Standard Time Abu Dhabi Muscat No GMT 04 00 Caucasus Standard Time Baku Tbilisi Yes GMT 04 00 Afghanistan Standard Time Kabul No GMT 05 00 Ekaterinburg Standard Time Ekaterinburg Yes GMT 05 00 West Asia Standard Time Islamabad Karachi Tashkent No GMT 05 30 India Standard Time Bombay Calcutta Madras New Delhi No GMT 06 00 Central Asia Standard Time Almaty Dhaka Yes GMT 06 00 Sri Lanka Standard Time Columbo No GMT 07 00 SE Asia Standard Time Bangkok Hanoi Jakarta No GMT 08 00 China Standard Time Beijing Chongqing Hong Kong Urumqi No GMT 08 00 W Australia Standard Time Perth No GMT 08 00 Singapore Standard Time Singapore No GMT 08 00 Taipei Standard Time Taipei No GMT 09 00 Tokyo Standard Time Osako Sapporo Tokyo No GMT 09 00 Korea Standard Time Seoul No GMT 09 00 Yakutsk Standard Time Yakutsk Yes GMT 09 30 Cen Australia Standard Time Adelaide Yes GMT 09 30 AUS Central Standard Time Darwin No GMT 10 00 E Australia Standard Time Brisbane No GMT 10 00 AUS Eastern Standard Time Canberra Melbourne Sydney Yes GMT 10 00 West Pacific Standard Time Guam Port Moresby No 33002479 07 2011 255 Using the NTP Time Service Time Zone Description DST Available GMT 10 00 Tasmania Standard Time Hobart Yes GMT 10 00 Vladivostok Standard Time Vladivostok Yes GMT 11 00 Central Paci
67. The repetitive rate of the I O scanner table is a multiple of the rate displayed in the Repetitive Rate Step The real repetitive rate being executed by the I O scanner service is shown in the Repetitive Rate column Note An entry in the Repetitive Rate column is rounded up to the next multiple that was entered in the Repetitive Rate Step if the entry is not a multiple of the Repetitive Rate Step 33002479 07 2011 195 Transferring Data with the I O Scanner For example if the entry in the Repetitive Rate Step is 5 and you enter a 7 in the Repetitive Rate column the 7 is rounded up to 10 if you change the Repetitive Rate Step to 6 and enter a 7 in the Repetitive Rate column the 7 is rounded up to 12 I O Scanner Table Parameters The I O Scanner parameters are described in the table below Parameter Description Example Entry This is the first column it has no name Valid range 1 128 Each entry represents an I O Scanning exchange on the network IP Address This is the IP address of the scanned Ethernet 192 168 1 100 slave device Device Name To configure a device Advantys island or DTM MySTB1 or Click the button to open the Property box Master_PRM_DTM_10 see page 208 to start the device configuration software For an introduction to this procedure for Advantys go here see page 203 For an introduction to this procedure for DTMs go to FDT Container NOTE While the Property box
68. Three Check Ethernet connection Four Change IP address Five Provide IP address Six Connect using default IP address and configure Seven Download a new NOE Exec see page 331 Application LED If the module crashes it will note the reason in a log If the module is able to recover the Appl LED will light indicating that an entry has been made in the crash log You can read and clear the crash log see page 330 33002479 07 2011 329 Maintenance Reading and Clearing the Crash Log Overview The following information describes the crash log Introduction The crash log provides you with the ability to capture conditions that lead to an anomalous condition By providing the crash log to Schneider Electric technical support you can facilitate their assistance in resolving your problems NOTE The crash log is provided with the understanding that with a complex product in thousands of customer applications there may be conditions that require advance diagnostics The crash log is one of the tools used to solve complex problems The Crash Log If the Appl application indicator is on entries have been made in the crash log The log may hold up to 64K of entries Reading the Crash Log The crash log can be read from the embedded web pages or via FTP Procedure for Reading the Crash Log via FTP To access the crash log via FTP Step Action 1 Log in to the module s FTP server 2 Ch
69. Time Dublin Edinburgh Lisbon London z W Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving change em Etherneti Field Parameter Action NTP Server Configuration IP address of primary NTP server Enter a valid IP address IP address of secondary NTP server Enter a valid IP address Polling Period in seconds Enter a value min 1sec max 120sec e default 5 sec Time Zone Select from the drop down menu e Universal Time Coordinated GMT default e Custom time zone Automatically adjust clock for daylight This parameter is selected by default saving change check mark appears if daylight saving time is chosen 252 33002479 07 2011 Using the NTP Time Service Changing Time Service Parameters To make any changes to the time synchronization service Step Action 1 Enter changes in the appropriate field on the NTP Configuration page for one or all of the configurable parameters 2 Click Save Important Information about the Time Service NOTE About the time service 1 Automatically adjust clock for daylight savings change parameter If this check box is selected the module automatically corrects the local time to account for daylight saving time Therefore no action is required since the daylight saving time start and end are automatically changed each year 2 Polling Time Parameter The time in seconds is the time between tim
70. Times Remote Input to Remote Output Measurement Setup The set of curves below illustrates Quantum PLC response times when a signal is sent from a remote input module to a remote output module through a Quantum PLC Response Time The signal is 1 triggered by a Momentum input module with a response time of 2 ms 2 scanned into the Quantum PLC at a repetitive rate of 0 ms 3 copied to another internal variable within the PLC 4 written to a Momentum output module with a response time of 2 ms 140 CPU 434 12A with 140 NOE 771 x1 Module The 140 CPU 434 12A with an NOE 771 x1 v3 3 was used for the following measurements 800 700 600 500 400 300 200 100 0 0 50 100 150 200 250 PLC Scan Time ms Time ms 216 33002479 07 2011 Transferring Data with the I O Scanner The plot shows four lines representing the number of scanned devices e 1 device e 8 devices e 16 devices e 32 devices The four lines are indistinguishable at this scale because the response times are so similar You can see the similarity in the following table of data from which the above graph was plotted Number of Devices to Scan Time from Scanned Device Input to Scanned Device Output ms 434 12A NOE 771 x1 v3 3 10 ms scan 20 ms scan 50 ms scan 100 ms scan 200 ms scan 1 device 41 73 179 358 665 8 devices 42 75 180 360 666 16 devices 44 77 182 361 668 32 devices 46 79 185
71. VO Scanning Status NOK Number of transactions per sec 0 Number of connections 0 SCANNED DEVICE STATUS 1 16 17 32 33 48 49 64 Not configured a Scanned a Disabled a Fault NOTE Be aware that the green Scanning indicator may incorrectly remain green for a remote scanned device after the Ethernet cable gets removed from that device This inaccurate indication occurs when the health timeout value in the I O Scanning configuration screen is set to 0 see page 194 You should configure an operational health timeout value in the range 1 65535 in 1 ms increments If the health timeout value is set to any value in this range the Scanning indicator reports I O scanning health correctly 298 33002479 07 2011 Embedded Web Pages Messaging Page This page provides current information on the open TCP connections on port 502 The number of sent received messages on the port can be found at the top of this page A table provides for each connection numbered from 1 to 64 e remote IP Address e remote TCP port e local TCP port e number of messages sent from this connection e number of messages received from this connection e detected event number on this connection MESSAGING DIAGNOSTICS Number of Messages sent 2007 Number of Messages received 2007 Conn Remote address Remote port Local Port Mess sent Mess received Error sent 1 127 0 0 1 I 502 40 40 0 w 192 168 2 10 1240 502 356 356 0 3 139 168 2 10 1
72. Warning safety label indicates that an electrical hazard exists which will result in personal injury if the instructions are not followed personal injury hazards Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid possible injury or death A DANGER DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death or serious injury A WARNING WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided can result in death or serious injury This is the safety alert symbol It is used to alert you to potential 33002479 07 2011 11 PLEASE NOTE A CAUTION CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided can result in minor or moderate injury CAUTION CAUTION used without the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided can result in equipment damage Electrical equipment should be installed operated serviced and maintained only by qualified personnel No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising out of the use of this material A qualified person is one who has skills and knowledge related to the construction and operation of electrical equipment and its installation and has received safety training to recognize and avoid the hazards involved 12 33002479 07 2011 About the Book A At a Glance Document Scope
73. a PRM Master DTM the link between the DTM and the I O Scanning line is removed Copy line s Copy line s copies the selected lines but without the Device Name Paste line s Paste line s has 2 actions depending on its target line e Ifthe line is empty it fills the line with the copied line without a Device Name e Ifthe line is not empty it replaces the line with the copied line without a Device Name Be careful it also permanently deletes the Device Name link to the I O Scanning table and for an ACS or PRA configuration all its data and associated ACS symbols of the old line before replacing it with the copied line 33002479 07 2011 199 Transferring Data with the I O Scanner Menu Item Description Insert copied line s Insert copied line s inserts the copied line between the selected line and the line just above it Be careful with ACS or DTM configurations all the lines below the inserted line become desynchronized To synchronize these lines open and close the device configuration tool then do an Update from the Property box see page 208 Insert empty line Insert empty line inserts an empty line above the line selected line Inserting an empty line does not desynchronize the devices below the line but using this line for a new device can depending the number of words needed desynchronize the devices below the line Pack all lines Pack all lines remov
74. agent the value of the mask is an IP address with all the network bits set to 1 and all the host bits set to 0 profilelpGateway 17 the default Gateway IP address of the SNMP agent profileMacAddress 18 the Ethernet media dependent address of the SNMP agent NTP Subtree The NTP 1 subtree contains a set of common objects Service Indicates ntpStatus 1 the status of NTP service not server 1 1 Idle no configuration 2 2 Operational ntpSrvAddr 2 the IP address of NTP server in dot notation format ntpLnkSrvStatus 3 the status of link between module and NTP server 1 1 NOK module can not reach NTP server 2 2 OK ntpReqCnt 4 the number of requests sent to NTP server ntpRespCnt 5 the number of responses received from NTP server ntpErrCnt 6 the total number of communication errors ntpDate 7 date of the day ntpTime 8 time of the day ntpTimeZone 9 current time zone ntpDSTStatus 10 Daylight Savings Time status 1 1 ON Daylight Savings Time 2 2 OFF Standard Time ntpLastErr 11 Last error code generated by system 33002479 07 2011 241 SNMP SMTP Subtree The SMTP 1 subtree contains a set of common objects Service Indicates emaillndex 1 the index value in the email service table smtpStatus 2 the status of SMTP service not server 1 idle no configuration 2 operational smtpS
75. anomalies appears in red and bold The system detects the following anomalies Bad Role Name The valid Role Name characters are e a through z lower case e A through Z upper case e underscore Bad MAC Address The valid MAC Address characters are e 0 through 9 e A through F Wrong IP Address Wrong Subnet Mask Wrong Gateway Double Entry Each entry must have a unique Role Name or MAC Address If a duplicate Role Name or MAC Address is entered the system highlights the duplication Erroneous entries are not loaded into the DHCP server Therefore erroneous entries must be corrected before loading There are two ways of correcting the erroneous entries Correcting through Web page Make the changes on the Web page and submit the change Correcting through the Address Server configuration file Make the changes in the file and reboot the server 226 33002479 07 2011 Network Management Service SNMP 8 Introduction The following material describes SNMP and the Schneider private MIB Under the Schneider private MIB is the Transparent Factory Ethernet private MIB What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page SNMP 228 ASN 1 Naming Scheme 231 Configuring an NOE with SNMP 233 Configuring an NOE with TFE Private MIB 235 33002479 07 2011 227 SNMP SNMP Introduction This topic describes the Simple Network Manag
76. available only in online form at this time Title of Documentation Reference Number Quantum with Unity Ethernet Network Modules UNY USE 100 10 Quantum Hardware Reference Manual UNY USE 100 10 Quantum Discrete and Analog I O Reference Manual UNY USE 100 10 Quantum Experts and Communication Reference Manual UNY USE 100 10 Grounding and Electromagnetic Compatibility of PLC Systems User Manual UNY USE 100 10 Quantum and Premium Communication Architecture Reference Manual Part of this package Schneider Automation BOOTP Lite Ethernet IP Address Download 31002087 Utility for Schneider Automation Ethernet Products Instruction Sheet FactoryCast for Quantum Premium and Micro User Guide 31001229 Modicon Quantum Hot Standby with Unity User Manual UNY USE 107 10 Modbus Protocol Reference Guide PI MBUS 300 Open Modbus Specification http www modbus o rg FactoryCast HMI 140 NWM 100 00 User Guide 890 USE 152 You can download these technical publications and other technical information from our website at www schneider electric com We welcome your comments about this document You can reach us by e mail at techcomm schneider electric com 33002479 07 2011 15 16 33002479 07 2011 Modicon Quantum with Unity Ethernet Products Purpose This part introduces the Modicon Quantum with Unity products used for Ethernet communicat
77. block are located outside of the MW 4x range 3000 Generic Modbus failure code 30ss Exceptional response by Modbus slave see page 160 4001 Inconsistent response by Modbus slave ss Hexadecimal Value in 30ss Error Code ss hexadecimal value in 30ss error code ss hex Value Meaning 01 Slave does not support requested operation 02 Non existing slave registers were requested 03 An unauthorized data value was requested 160 33002479 07 2011 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks ss hex Value Meaning 05 Slave has accepted a lengthy program command 06 Function cannot currently be carried out lengthy command running 07 Slave has rejected lengthy program command Hexadecimal Error Codes TCP IP Ethernet Network An error on the TCP IP Ethernet network itself may produce one of the following errors in the CONTROL 1 register of the control block Hexadecimal error codes TCP IP Ethernet network Hex Error Meaning Code 5004 Interrupted system invocation 5005 I O error 5006 No such address 5009 The socket descriptor is not valid 500C Not enough storage space 500D Authorization denied 5011 Entry exists 5016 An argument is not valid 5017 An internal table has no more space 5020 There is interference on the connection 5023 This operation was blocked and the socket is no
78. by a looped nework cable that can cause problems of the HSBY system with NOEs Impact on CPU In order to serve the backplane communication the NOE has direct access DMA to the memory of the CPU module Therefore if the NOE goes into Kernel mode while accessing the CPU this may have an impact on the CPU behavior In rare cases it can even cause the Primary CPU to STOP In this case the Standby CPU will take the hand as Primary CPU 116 33002479 07 2011 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks Recommended Actions Take the following steps to protect against the unwanted effects of excessive broadcast traffic Step Action 1 Reduce the speed of the port allocated to communicate with the respective NOEs from 100Mb s to 10Mb s 2 Limit the potential effects of an overloaded network to the NOE by filtering it with an appropriate ConneXium switch set with a limit of 500 packets per second Schneider Electric offers a line of a configurable ConneXium switch capable of broadcast limiting 3 If the Ethernet switch must be set at 100Mb s speed the set the watchdog timer to 1 5 seconds independent of the number of NOEs Otherwise if the watchdog timer is set too low the the remaining system may also stop working if a persistent overloaded network occurs 33002479 07 2011 117 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks 4 2 IEC Data Transfer Functions Overview This s
79. configuration and transfer of data between network addresses can be done without using the MSTR IEC function block NOTE You must account for the following Ethernet I O scanning considerations during a switchover e If MSTR IEC function block is used for TCP IP only some of the opcode is used Therefore the block does not complete its transaction and it returns error code 0 8000 e While the NOE module is in the process of performing the transaction a new MSTR IEC function block may become active e The output states of the scanned I Os follows the state defined in the last value option configured in the I O scanning table of the NOE module in Unity Pro software These 2 states are either a set to 0 b hold last With the above considerations we recommend using switchover with Ethernet I O scanning for less critical applications 33002479 07 2011 321 Hot Standby Global Data Publish Subscribe Service FTP TFTP Server The Hot Standby primary CPU NOE is 1 station within a distribution group Distribution groups exchange application variables Exchanging application variables allows the system to coordinate all the stations in the distribution group Every station publishes local application variable in a distribution group for all other stations and can subscribe to remote application variables independent of the location of the producer The communication port has only 1 multicast address In this network
80. device takes precedence over a timeout ss Hexadecimal Value in 30ss Error Code ss hexadecimal value in 30ss error code ss Hex Value Description 01 Slave does not support requested operation 02 Non existing slave registers were requested 03 An unauthorized data value was requested 33002479 07 2011 143 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks ss Hex Value Description 05 Slave has accepted a lengthy program command 06 Function cannot currently be carried out lengthy command running 07 Slave has rejected lengthy program command ss Hexadecimal Value in 6mss Error Code NOTE Subfield m in error code 6mss is an Index in the routing information that shows where an error has been detected a 0 value indicates the local node 2 means the second device in the route etc The ss subfield in error code 6mss is as follows ss Hex Value Description 01 No response reception 02 Access to program denied 03 Node out of service and unable to communicate 04 Unusual response received 05 Router node data path busy 06 Slave out of order 07 Wrong destination address 08 Unauthorized node type in routing path 10 Slave has rejected the command 20 Slave has lost an activated transaction 40 Unexpected master output path received 80 Unexpected response received F001 Wrong destination node was specified fo
81. drop down menu Module Utilities No w Messaging s w 10 Scanning WEB Global Data WEB SNMP WEB w Address Server 5 Click the I O Scanning tab to display the I O scanning configuration screen Pnigntin erage 10 Scamming Jesis sae Jenan Z Device CornetBicck camvyrom Tom Tor Repetweraestey 0 E ware OR me ute ege oe Jovciion 1 z ane 0 a Tfaa 0 0 a aN US Sane mo ie z ANI 20 cy jawe mo o E mersis morei BEd woa zj reo n amm a w Hoas Tjamm m wo E 4 ane Spam 4 See te canoe a E I 2 f 6 Type in the parameter settings under each of the column headings for the I O Scanner Configuration Refer to the parameter definitions below 7 Click the validate check box in the upper tool bar to confirm the I O scanning parameter settings Tools Build PLC Debug Window Validate check box nm OG 7 4 360 33002479 07 2011 Installation and Configuration Health Block The Health Block number 1 lets you define the first word or bit in a health table That table can be up to 8 words IW or 128 bits l in length Each bit in the table represents the status of an individual device The table below shows how the bits are displayed based on the data type you use Bit Data Type l IW 1 l1 IW1 0 2 l 2 IW 1 1 16 116 IW1 15 17 l17 IW2 0 By default the table comprises words starting at IW1 0 If you want to set the table to bits you need to specify a l va
82. e subject To program an MBP_MSTR block to send email use function code 13 see page 137 Network Implementation A send email operation can be performed on a TCP IP Ethernet network Conirol Block Usage for TCP IP Ethernet Register Meaning CONTROL 1 13 send Email CONTROL 2 Indicates the email specific error codes see page 264 CONTROL 3 Number of words transferred CONTROL 4 Not used CONTROLJ 5 High byte slot address of the NOE module or OxFE for the 140 CPU 651 60 Low byte always 0 CONTROL 6 Not used CONTROL 9 168 33002479 07 2011 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks DATABUF Parameter Description Register Contents DATABUF 1 The mail header is the least significant byte with a value of 1 2 or 3 The most significant byte contains the number n of characters in the subject a value between 0 and 238 DATABUF 2 The data in ASCII format that will be copied into the Email message DATABUF 119 The first n characters are added to the configured Email subject The remaining characters 2 N 2 n are part of the message body where Nis the number of words transferred 33002479 07 2011 169 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks Send Modbus Request At a Glance Block Operation Control Block Use MSTR operation 15 to send generic Modbus requests on the network NOTE This operation is not
83. effective on the TCP IP profile and assists module operations in server and client mode 33002479 07 2011 107 Start Communication with Unity Pro 3 4 Selecting the Ethernet Coprocessor Introduction This section describes configuring the Modicon Quantum with Unity coprocessor 140 CPU 651 x0 What s in this Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Selecting the Modicon Quantum with Unity Ethernet Controller 109 Configuring the IP Address of the Ethernet Controller 111 Modicon Quantum with Unity Ethernet Controller Messaging Configuration 112 108 33002479 07 2011 Start Communication with Unity Pro Selecting the Modicon Quantum with Unity Ethernet Controller General Description After configuring Ethernet communication see page 93 the Ethernet module parameters can be configured When you select the model family all the corresponding communication module configuration options display automatically The module services allow the following settings to be made Setting Description No Setting deactivated Yes Setting activated Parameters are set using the Unity Pro menu window NOTE The availability of the displayed settings varies and depends on the selected model family The screen shot shows an example of the menu window of the Ethernet module CPU 651 x0 TCP IP 10 100 Extended connection ETHERNET_1 Mod
84. failed internal diagnostic tests The following procedure describes the steps to perform Step Action 1 Make sure that power has been applied to the backplane 2 If step 1 checks out ok replace the NOE module Procedure for Responding to a Link LED Error Indicator If the Link LED fails to light the NOE module is not communicating with the Ethernet hub switch The following procedure describes the steps to perform to respond to a Link LED error Step Action 1 Make sure that the cable has been installed correctly and the module is functioning properly Verify that the hub switch is working properly If steps 1 and 2 check ok replace the NOE module Kernel LED Error The following table describes the Kernel LED errors that may occur and how to respond to them If Then The Ready LED is on and the Kernel LED is flashing The module has detected an invalid software image The Ready LED is on and the Kernel LED is shining steadily An attempt to download a software image has failed and the module is in kernel mode Either of the above conditions exists Download a new NOE Exec see page 331 33002479 07 2011 327 Maintenance Fault LED The Fault LED will flash briefly following an error as the module attempts to recover The following figure shows the Fault LED 140 NOE 771 xx ETHERNET TCPAP Active Fault
85. file 15 Email Diagnostics Page EMAIL DIAGNOSTIC Email Status OK Link to Server Status E Email Server IP Address 10 208 84 86 Number of e mail sent ooo Number of Responses from Email Server B4 Number of Errors 0 Last Errors 0 Last Mail Header Used ooo Number of seconds elapsed since last e mail successfully sent j Number of times the link to the server has been detected down bo Parameter Description Email status Email service is correctly configured Ok Link to Server Status Ethernet module is connected to the SMTP server Status is checked at start up and at least every 30 minutes after start up e Green module connected to server e Red module NOT connected to server SMTP Server IP Address IP address of the SMTP server Number of e mails sent Total number of emails sent successfully 302 33002479 07 2011 Embedded Web Pages Parameter Description Number of Responses from SMTP Server Total number of SMTP messages received from the SMTP server Number of Errors Total number of e mails NOT sent because of an error Last Errors Reason for the last error with a code in hexadecimal 0 displays if no error occurs Last Mail Header Used Last header used by giving the number Number of seconds elapsed since last e mail successfully sent Counts the number of seconds since the last email was successfully sent Num
86. in a remote device A Modbus Request has to be sent on the network with the following Modbus Response Request Field Name Value Function code 04 Starting address High 00 172 33002479 07 2011 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks Request Field Name Value Starting address Low 64 Number of registers High 00 Number of registers Low 04 Response Field Name Value Function code 04 Byte count 08 Register 100 value High 00 Register 100 value Low 01 Register 101 value High 00 Register 101 value Low 02 Register 102 value High 00 Register 102 value Low 03 Register 103 value High 00 Register 103 value Low 04 Using the following CONTROL word values CONTROL 1 MSTR operation 15 CONTROL 2 Error Code refer to CONTROL block description read only CONTROL 3 DATABUF length 11 CONTROL 4 Response Offset 5 CONTROLJ5 Routing Register refer to CONTROL block description CONTROLJ6 IP1 refer to CONTROL block description CONTROLJ 7 IP1 refer to CONTROL block description CONTROLJ 8 IP1 refer to CONTROL block description CONTROLJ 9 IP1 refer to CONTROL block description CONTROL 10 Request Length 5 CONTROL 11 Response Length 10 the data encoding in the Data Buffer is as follows Field Value Description hex Request DATABUF 1 0400 Funct
87. is open I O scanning cannot be edited Unit ID This field associates the slave address of the 255 device connected to an Ethernet Modbus gateway with the IP address of that gateway e Value range 1 to 255 e Default value 255 When using a bridge enter the bridge index 1 to 255 in this field Slave Syntax Use this drop down menu to pick the way RD Index default value Ref Slave and WR Ref Slave values are displayed There are 4 types of display available e Index 100 e Modbus 400101 e Modbus register IEC 0 MW100 M340 and Premium PLC slaves e IEC 1 MW101 e Quantum PLC slaves 196 33002479 07 2011 Transferring Data with the I O Scanner Parameter Description Example Health Timeout This field sets the maximum interval between the 1500ms ms responses from a remote device After this time period expires the received data is invalid The health timeout should be longer than the repetitive rate For a Quantum NOE Ethernet module it also should be longer than the CPU scan time e Range 1ms to 65535 ms e Interval 1ms Repetitive rate The rate at which data will be scanned from 60ms ms 0 65535 in multiples of the Repetitive Rate Step e Ifyou are running Unity Pro V3 1 or lower with the following firmware versions e 140 NOE V4 0 or lower 16 ms e CPU V2 5 or lower 10 ms e Ifyou are running Unity Pro V4 0 or higher with the following fir
88. last Hold last Health Block NOTE This screen shows I O Scanner screen for an 140 NOE 771 01 or 11 module The I O Scanner screen is slightly different for the CPU 651 x0 it does not display a Health Block The Health Block number 1 lets you define the first word or bit in a health table That table can be up to 8 words IW or 128 bits l in length Each bit in the table represents the status of an individual device The table below shows how the bits are displayed based on the data type you use Bit Data Type l IW 1 l1 IW1 15 2 l 2 IW1 14 16 l16 IW1 0 17 l17 IW2 15 By default the table comprises words starting at IW1 0 If you want to set the table to bits you need to specify a l value in an increment of 16 11 116 I32 etc NOTE The Health Block is available only for the NOE 771 00 01 and 11 Itis not available for the CPU 651 x0 194 33002479 07 2011 Transferring Data with the I O Scanner NOTE For Safety Monitor applications the Health Block is mapped on M MW from the UMA zone instead of l lW Device Control Block The Device Control Block number 2 lets you disable any scanned device by setting a bit associated with that device to 1 The I O scanner closes the connection and sets the Health Bit to 0 unhealthy state To enable the Device Control Block select the checkbox in the O Scanner configuration dialog item 2 in the illu
89. move digit to digit in a modify mode field LED off Key inactive there is no e sub menu for menu option e scrolling around a screen scrolling around a field 26 33002479 07 2011 Product Description Indicators Overview The High End processors use two types of indicators 1 LCD display The Default Screen see page 30 serves as a Controller status screen 2 LED Indicators The functionality of the LEDs is described in a table after the figure The following figure shows the two types of indicators 140 CPU 6 0 Qa EJ fo brxs COM STS sTs High End processors 1 LCD Display lens cover closed 2 LED Indicators 33002479 07 2011 27 Product Description LED Description The following table shows the description for the LED indicators of the different High End CPU modules incompatibility between PLC OS and Copro firmware LEDs Indication Standard Processors Hot StandBy Processors 140 CPU 65 0 140 CPU 651 60S 140 CPU 671 60 140 CPU 671 60S 140 CPU 672 61 COM Controlled by the Coprocessor Controlled by the Coprocessor hardware yellow hardware e Indicates Primary or Standby activity e Indicates Ethernet activity STS Controlled by the Coprocessor Controlled by the Coprocessor firmware yellow software e Blinking system is redundant and ON Normal dat
90. program NTP Server Ethernet Network System NTP Request Counter NTP Response R_NTPC Premium System EN ENO H OUT1 OUT2 STATUS 82 33002479 07 2011 Ethernet Communication Services Electronic Mail Notification General The electronic mail notification service allows controller based projects to report alarms or events The automation controller monitors the system and can automatically create an electronic mail message alert with data alarms and or events Mail recipients can be either local or remote e Based on predefined events or conditions messages are created using the MBP_STR function block e The email message is constructed from predefined headers plus variables and text a maximum of 238 bytes This message is sent directly from the automation system to the local email server e Mail headers contain common predefined items recipient list sender name and subject These items can be updated by an authorized administrator Mail Service Client The NOE communications module and 140 CPU 651 x0 modules include an SMTP client When the module receives a specific request from the controller the module sends an email message to the mail server MBP_MSTR SMTP Server Ethernet 33002479 07 2011 83 Ethernet Communication Services Bandwidth Monitoring Overview Bandwidth Monitoring allows the user to access and monitor the NOE modu
91. refer to the topic Safety PLC Write Protection in the Unity Pro XLS Operating Mode Manual The 140 NOE 771 11 Ethernet module as a non interfering module cannot write data to safety restricted memory areas Instead the 140 NOE 771 11 Ethernet module can write data only to unrestricted memory areas The memory areas of a Quantum safety project are user configurable Using Unity XLS you can designate address ranges as either safety restricted or unrestricted For instructions on how to configure memory areas refer to the topic Configuration of Quantum Processors with Unity Pro XLS in the Unity Pro XLS Operating Mode Manual 33002479 07 2011 47 Product Description Health Bit Assignments ACAUTION RISK OF DATA LOSS The default address assignments for the following data blocks overlap e Global Data Health Bit block MW1 e I O Scanning Health Bit block MW1 e I O Scanning Device Control block MD1 You must edit these address assignments so they do not overlap If these address assignments overlap the PLC will overwrite data and the overwritten data will be lost Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage The 140 NOE 771 11 makes different address assignments regarding both I O Scanning and Global Data Health Bit Blocks for safety and non safety applications as follows Health Bit Block Non Safety Application Safety Application Addresses
92. relevant instructions must be followed Failure to use Schneider Electric software or approved software with our hardware products may result in injury harm or improper operating results Failure to observe this information can result in injury or equipment damage 2011 Schneider Electric All rights reserved 33002479 07 2011 Document Set Presentation This user manual is part of Schneider Electric s five volume Quantum Unity documentation set that is available under part number UNYUSE10010 It includes Modicon Quantum with Unity Ethernet Network Modules User Manual this book Quantum and Premium Communication Architecture Reference Manual Quantum TCP IP Configuration User Manual Quantum Modbus Plus Network Modules 140 ESI 062 10 Quantum ASCII Interface Module User Manual 33002479 07 2011 33002479 07 2011 Table of Contents Part Chapter 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 Chapter 2 Safety Information 000 cece eee eee eee About the Book 1 0 00 eee Modicon Quantum with Unity Ethernet Products Product Description iicvit teresa ee te eas Module Description 140 CPU 651 x0 0000 c eee eee 140 CPU 651 x0 Product Overview 20000 cece eee eae Physical Presentation and Mounting of Standard High End Modules CPU Controls and Displays 00 00 c eee eee ee INGICATOFS Scan Sta hoi coal on len bee ang tide n E nn de tart E EERS Using
93. revision OS H HH HH OSLoader revision Hardware Info HW Rev Hardware revision Copro Info IE Copro revision Fields are read only 33002479 07 2011 37 Product Description LCD Settings Menu LCD Settings menus and submenus Quantum LCD Settings gt LCD Settings 0 is black LCD Contrast 100 is green LCD Settings On LCD Light time Off 1 Min 5 Min 10 Min 15 Min LCD Contrast settings submenu Screen Displays LCD Screen Contrast Fields Available Description LCD Contrast EEEE Use the arrow keys to adjust the setting e Up arrow increases percent brighter e Right arrow decreases percent darker LCD Light setting submenus Screen Displays Fields Available Description LCD Light On LCD remains on permanently or until changed Off LCD remains off permanently or until changed 1 Min LCD remains on for 1 minute 5 Min LCD remains on for 5 minutes 10 Min LCD remains on for 10 minutes 15 Min LCD remains on for 15 minutes 38 33002479 07 2011 Product Description 1 2 Module Description 140 NOE 771 xx and 140 NWM 100 00 Overview This section contains the module descriptions for 140 NOE 771 xx and 140 NWM 100 00 What s in this Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Modicon Q
94. same way Multiple Line Length Configuration Example In this example the first the main O Scanning line 2 contains all the information for the exchanges with the device including the totals for the RD length and WR length The second line 2 contains the specific word lengths 125 and 100 needed so that it can also be used for part of the exchanges Line 2 needs a RD length of 300 word and a WR length of 110 words How many extra lines are needed e RD length 300 125 2 72 3 lines needed e WR length 110 110 1 10 2 lines needed The larger of the 2 numbers is used e Three lines are needed to accommodate the RD length 125 words 125 words 50 words for a total of 300 words e The 3 lines for the WR length are 100 words 10 words 0 words for a total of 110 words 33002479 07 2011 201 Transferring Data with the I O Scanner The second line 2 line 3 and line 4 correspond to the Modbus exchange queries When multiple lines are used only the RD length and WR length columns of these new lines can be edited In the case of ACS or DTM it supplies the RD length and WR length and they cannot be changed in the I O Scanning table NOTE It is not necessary to have a Device Name defined to use multiple lines The total number of words allowed in a I O Scanning table is e 4kW for Premium extended and Quantum networks e 2 KW for Premium ETY and M340 NOE modules Line Length for Multiple Word V
95. serves as Standby unit Offline Controller is neither Primary nor Standby unit Hot Standby Mode RUN STS steady Controller is active and is either serving as Primary Mode modifiable only PLC or able to take over the Primary CPU role if if the key switch needed Is a H STS Controller is transferring updating When the transfer un Oc ed flashing is done RUN stays on steady position OFFLINE STS steady Controller is taken out of service without stopping it or disconnecting it from power If the controller is the Primary PLC when the mode is changed to Offline control switches to the Standby PLC If the Standby PLC changes to Offline the Primary CPU continues to operate without a backup STS Controller is transferring updating When the transfer is flashing done OFFLINE stays on steady Hot Standby A or B FIRST Hot Standby Power Order Order Modifiable only SECOND NOTE To change the A B order the PLC must be in if the key switch the STOP mode is in the unlocked position Hot Standby Pressing the lt ENTER gt key confirms the Transfer Transfer This menu option is only enabled if the key The transfer initiates the request of a program update switch is in the unlocked position from the Primary PLC Pressing any other key cancels the Transfer initiation and returns to the Hot Standby Transfer menu option screen 33002479 07 2011 33 Product Description Screen Field Option Description Hot Sta
96. service the Modicon Quantum Hot Standby with Unity controllers are viewed like only 1 station The primary CPU NOE publishes the Hot Standby application variables and receives the subscription variables The secondary NOE global data service is in a stopped state When the Hot Standby switchover occurs the primary CPU NOE stops the global data service The NOE module does not publish the local variable during a switchover And after the switchover the new primary CPU NOE starts to publish application variables and to receive the subscription variables The FTP TFTP server is available as soon as the module receives an IP address Any FTP TFTP client can logon to the module Access requires the correct user name and password Modicon Quantum Hot Standby with Unity allows only 1 active FTP TFTP client session per NOE module When the Hot Standby switchover occurs the primary CPU and secondary NOEs close the FTP TFTP connection If you send an FTP TFTP request during the switchover the communication is closed Whenever you re open communication you must re enter a user name and a password 322 33002479 07 2011 Appendices Introduction The appendices provide supplementary reference information for the Quantum 140 NOE 771 xx series of modules and the 140 NWM 100 00 module What s in this Appendix The appendix contains the following chapters Chapter Chapter Name Page A Maintenance 325
97. the network will also be removed in application browser lt 3 Station J Configuration 9 Derived Data Types lt J Derived FB Types 3 Variables amp FB instances lt j Communication 5 Networks Beer t Delete Network Remove this Network OK Cancel NOTE If this removed network was previously attached to a communication module this module loses its link and it will work with its default parameters 96 33002479 07 2011 Start Communication with Unity Pro 3 2 Unity Soft Communication Links Overview This section presents the principle of communication implementation and describes the relationship between software configuration of networks and the hardware configuration of the network controllers What s in this Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Communication Configuration Principle 98 Link between Configuration and Communication 99 Link between Data and Communication 100 33002479 07 2011 97 Start Communication with Unity Pro Communication Configuration Principle Introduction Configuration The configuration of communication links between different devices with Unity Soft includes three different configuration parts e configuration of the network controller e configuration of the logical network e configuration of network variables The communication configura
98. the variables or value of the literal 40059 The parameter can be specified as direct address located variable unlocated variable or literal Number of registers to be read from the addressed slave 1 100 The NO_REG parameter can be specified as direct address located variable unlocated variable or literal Transition to ON state for one program cycle signifies receipt of new data ready to be processed The NDR parameter can be specified as direct address located variable or unlocated variable Transition to ON state for one program cycle signifies detection of a new error The ERROR parameter can be specified as direct address located variable or unlocated variable This word parameter addresses the first register in a series of NO_REG registers lying in series used as destination data area The REG_READ parameter must be entered as a direct address or located variable Error code see Runtime errors The STATUS parameter can be specified as direct address located variable or unlocated variable 33002479 07 2011 127 Transferring Data Using Communicati on Blocks WRITE_REG Function Description Upon request the WRITE_REG block writes a register area once rising edge of the REQ input It transfers data from the PLC via TCP IP Ethernet to an addressed slave EN and ENO can be configured as additional parameters NOTE About this function block e When programming this function
99. the IP address of the PRM device Open the I O Scanning configuration editor tab In the Module Utilities zone select YES for IO Scanning NI QO oy A Select the I O Scanning tab Results I O Scanning configuration editor opens Enter on a free line the IP address for the connection to be used to communicate with the PRM Bus Master Set correct values for the Read Ref and Write Ref parameters Enter RD length and WR length for the IP address line within the Read Ref and Write Ref constraints NOTE The lengths must be long enough for the expected configuration PRM Master DTM and its subnode DTMs 11 Validate the O Scanning screen 12 Click on the button next to Device Name cell Results The Property box see page 208 opens 13 Select DTM in the Device Type drop down menu 14 Select the protocol in the DTM Protocol drop down menu 15 Select a PRM Master DTM in the DTM Name drop down menu 16 Click on OK to validate the choices you made Results e The Device Type Device Protocol and Device Name are verified and saved e The Property box closes 206 33002479 07 2011 Transferring Data with the I O Scanner Step Action 17 Update the I O Scanning line refer to Updating I O Scanning for a PRM Master DTM see page 207 18 Build the Unity Pro application 19 Stop the PLC 20 Transfer
100. the Unity Pro application to the PLC 21 In the DTM Browser right click on PRM Master and select the Connect function 22 In the DTM Browser right click on PRM Master and select the Store data to device function 23 Run the application in the PLC Updating I O Scanning for a PRM Master DTM The following procedure updates the I O Scanning information for a PRM Master DTM Step Action 1 Configure and validate the PRM Bus Masters in the DTM Browser using the contextual Device menu function Open the I O Scanning configuration editor tab Click on the button that is next to the Device Name of the PRM Master DTM to update In the open Property box see page 208 click on the Update button Results e The PRM Master DTM modifications are synchronized with the Unity Pro application e The PRM Master DTM symbols are imported into the Unity Pro Data editor e The DTM Name is displayed in the I O Scanning configuration tab in black This indicates that the PRM configuration is synchronized e The Property box closes 33002479 07 2011 207 Transferring Data with the I O Scanner Property Box At Glance The Property box is the link between Unity Pro and a device configuration tool It is used to select and name a device and to launch the configuration tool for the device Property Box The following illustration is the Property box before sel
101. the controller over Ethernet Modbus TCP Connections and Commands The Ethernet module supports up to 64 simultaneous Modbus TCP server connections To guarantee consistency of changes to the controller configuration the Ethernet module allows only one programming panel to be logged in at a time The Ethernet modules supports these Modbus TCP commands Read Data Write Data Read Write Data Get Remote Statistics Clear Remote Statistics Modbus 125 Commands used by programming panels to download a new exec to the NOE For the 140 NOE 771 x1communication modules the maximum register size for read requests write requests or read write requests made using either a MBP_MSTR or Modbus command is as follows Command Request Type Maximum size Read 125 read registers Write 123 read registers Read Write 125 read registers 121 write registers 33002479 07 2011 77 Ethernet Communication Services Performance The following table shows the performance characteristics of the NOE Ethernet module s Modbus TCP server Parameter Value Typical Response Time ms 0 6 Number of Modbus connections client and server 64 NOE 771 x1 NWM 100 00 HE CPU 651 x0 16 Client NOE 771 x0 32 Server NOE 771 x0 Number of simultaneous login channels 1 NOTE Ethernet module s Modbus TCP performance measurements are made with a Modicon Quantum 140 CPU 534 14A PLC
102. the objects related to the Global Data service Service Indicates glbDataStatus 1 global status of the Global Data service e 1 idle e 2 operational e 3 stopped glbDataMaxPub 2 maximum number of published variables configured by the Global Data entity glbDataMaxSub 3 maximum number of subscribed variables configured by the Global Data entity glbDataPub 4 total number of publications sent to the network glbDataSub 5 total number of subscriptions received from the network glbDataPubErr 6 total number of publication errors detected by the local entity glbDataSubErr 7 total number of subscription errors detected by the local entity glbDataGlbSubHealth 8 global status of health for the Global Data subscribed variables 2 OK The health status of all subscribed variables is OK e 4 Warning At least one subscribed variable has a health fault glbDataPubTable 9 a table containing information on each published variable the number of publications the source IP address the number of errors glbDataSubTable 10 a table containing information on each subscribed variable the number of subscriptions the source IP address the number of errors Health Web Subtree The Web 5 subtree or group contains the objects related to the Web server service Service Indicates webStatus 1 global status of the Web service e 1 idle e 2 o
103. their NO_REG or REG_WRITE parameters NOTE A TCP IP communication between a Quantum PLC NOE 771xx and a Momentum PLC all TCP IP CPUs and all TCP IP I O modules is only possible when only one read or write job is carried out in every cycle If several jobs are sent per PLC cycle the communication stops without generating an error message in the status register of the function block The entire routing information is contained in data structure WordArr5 of input AddrFld The type of function block connected to this input and thus the contents of the data structure depend on the network used Please use e TCP IP Ethernet the function block TCP_IP_ADDR NOTE For experts The WordArr5 data structure can also be used with constants NOTE This function block puts a heavy load on the network The network load must therefore be carefully monitored If the network load is too high the program logic should be reorganized to work with the WRITE_REG function block which is a variant of this function block that does not operate in continuous mode but is command driven 33002479 07 2011 123 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks SLAVEREG NO_REG STATUS REG_WRIT SLAVEREG is the start of the area in the addressed slave to which the source data are written The destination area always resides within the MW word 4x register area SLAVEREG expects the destination address as offset within that area In 4x registers t
104. to create a network 374 33002479 07 2011 Glossary O Drop I O Map 1 0 Scan 1 0 Scan List I O scanner ICMP Internet IP Address One or two depending on the system type Remote I O Channels consisting of a fixed number of I O points An area in the controller configuration memory used to map input and output points Previously called traffic cop A procedure the processor follows to monitor inputs and control outputs A configuration table that identifies the targets with which repetitive communication is authorized Software component that is in charge of scanning Ethernet based Momentum IO in order to get inputs and set outputs Internet Control Message Protocol A protocol within TCP IP used to report errors in datagram transmission The global interconnection of TCP IP based computer communication networks Internet Protocol A common network layer protocol IP is most often used with TCP Internet Protocol Address A 32 bit address assigned to hosts using TCP IP 33002479 07 2011 375 Glossary layer Legacy MAC Address MBAP MBP_MSTR MIB Modbus NACK In the OSI model a portion of the structure of a device that provides defined services for the transfer of information In the sense of network communication Existing Components PLC products etc that do not provide special hardware support for Control Intranet Media Access Control address The hardware a
105. transactions per second 4200 Messaging Number of messages treated per second 410 NOTE The loads depend on controller scan times Each application has an expected scan time Therefore when evaluating loads ensure that the controller scan time is set to the expected scan time for the modeled application 84 33002479 07 2011 Ethernet Communication Services FTP Server Overview FTP Server The following information describes the services provided by the FTP Server The FTP server is available on all e 140 NOE 771 xx communications modules including the NOE module e CPU 651 x0 modules The FTP server on the NOE module and CPU 651 x0s is available as soon as the module receives an IP address Any FTP client can log on to the module which requires the client use the correct user name and password The FTP Server can e update the NOE module s firmware by downloading a new Exec e provide error log visibility by uploading error log files e upload download BOOTP server and SNMP configuration files NOTE There is only one FTP client per module The FTP server is protected with a default user name and password Default user name USER case sensitive Default password USERUSER case sensitive See the FTP password see page 61 topic to change the password or add delete usernames on the FTP server 33002479 07 2011 85 Ethernet Communication Services Embedded Web Pages
106. variables are exchanged with this service After configuration exchanges between all stations belonging to the same distribution group are done automatically The Global Data service uses MW 4x registers or unlocated variables for Global Data exchanges Key Features of Global Data The main features for Global Data are e One publisher and many subscribers e Adevice can publish one network variable of up to 512 MW words 4x registers or unlocated variables e A device can subscribe to up to 64 network variables of up to 2048 MW words 4x registers or unlocated variables A device subscribes to the complete network variable One distribution group per network IP address Application defined publication rate Up to 64 Global Data Network variables numbered from 1 to 64 can be part of the data distribution group e An NOE has only one multicast address Consequently it can only publish and subscribe within the group e Adevice can participate in several distribution groups by using multiple NOEs in the rack Global Data has an advantage over client server services when more than one subscriber is receiving the same data since only one transaction is necessary for all subscribers to receive the data There are two benefits e the reduction of overall network traffic e tighter synchronization of multiple subscribers 178 33002479 07 2011 Global Data Publish Subscribe Planning Your System Configuration The Global
107. verifies that the operation was successful Copy an Island File to a New Location The following procedure copies an Advantys island file isl to a new directory Step Action In ACS open an island configuration for example STB1 Select File menu gt Copy STB1 Contents In the Copy STB1 isl to window select the target directory AJOJN The message A copy of the island file has been saved with another name includes in the Log Window verifies that the operation was successful The name is new because its path has changed 33002479 07 2011 205 Transferring Data with the I O Scanner Introduction to Configuring the PRM Master DTM At a Glance The PRM Bus Master uses the Unity Pro I O Scanner to communicate with the CPU through an Ethernet port This requires configuring the PRM Master DTM in the Unity Pro Ethernet I O Scanning tab Configuring a PRM Master DTM The following procedure configures a PRM Master DTM in the I O Scanner Step Action 1 Install the PRM Master DTM on the Host PC NOTE After installing new DTMs the Hardware Catalog must be updated Add a PRM Master DTM to the connectivity tree in the DTM Browser using the contextual Device menu service In the DTM Browser select the PRM Master and use the contextual Device menu function to open the DTM PRM Offline Parameter screen In the General Setting part of this screen set
108. wire in for Ethernet II framing ge aei is Ethernet II framing if length gt 1500 802 3 pdu dst_addr 6 src_addr 6 length 2 data ip_pdu the common part of the packet begins here ip pdu ip hdr 20 data tcp_pdu tcp pdu tcp _hdr 24 data appl pdu mbap_pdu The mbap_pdu is the Modbus Application Protocol whose messages are received at a well known port The current maximum size of the mbap_pdu for this class of services in 256 bytes 33002479 07 2011 345 Ethernet TCP IP Modbus Application Protocol Structure and Content The structure and content of the mbap_pdu is defined to be mbap pdu inv_id 2 proto id 2 len 2 dst_idx 1 data mb_ pdu The header is 7 bytes long and includes the following fields inv_id 2 bytes invocation id used for transaction pairing proto id 2 bytes used for intra system multiplexing default is 0 for Modbus services len 2 bytes the len field is a byte count of the remaining fields and includes the dst_id and data fields The remainder of the pdu includes two fields dst_idx 1 byte destination index is used for intra system routing of packets currently not implemented data n bytes this is the service portion of the Modbus pdu mb pdu and is defined below The service portion of the Modbus Application Protocol called mb_pdu contains 2 fields mb pdu func_code 1 data n func_code 1 byte MB function code data
109. 0 0 Gateway address 139 124 10 1 From a server Ethernet configuration Ethernet Il QO 802 3 Description of the selection properties Selection Description Configured Activate the IP address Subnet mask and Gateway address The data is activated after the configuration is downloaded to the controller Client Server The Modicon Quantum with Unity Ethernet controller receives its IP address parameter through a BOOTP server on startup 33002479 07 2011 111 Start Communication with Unity Pro Modicon Quantum with Unity Ethernet Controller Messaging Configuration Introduction Send and receive messages though the Ethernet Data traffic is handled by the Client Server procedure The illustration shows the Ethernet Messaging dialog box ETHERNET_1 Module Address __ p Module Utilities Rack Module YES r VO Scanning Model Family TCP IP 10 100 Extended Connection r Ss YES Global Data Module IP Address YES SNMP IP Address Subnetwork Mask Gateway Address YES Address Server 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 IP Configuration Messaging 1 0 Scanning Global Data SNMP Address Server Bandwidth Connection configuration Access IP address 139 124 10 11 100 32 0 12 100 32 0 11 100 32 0 10 100 32 0 14 139 124 101
110. 0 0 0 205 217s 1933205 Use the default IP address of the NOE module as target address Use a class A subnet mask for connecting to every 84 0 0 0 address The gateway address is the IP of your PC The result is that MS Windows will now talk to any address that starts with an 84 that is directly connected to a hub or switch directly accessible to your machine or that can be seen by the specified route gateway 5 Confirm that there is a new entry in the active route table by typing C gt route print The following figure confirms that the new entry was added to the active route table Active Routes Network Address Netmask Gateway Address Interface Metric 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 205 217 193 205 205 217 193 205 1 84 0 0 0 255 0 0 0 205 217 193 205 205 217 193 205 1 127 0 0 0 255 0 0 0 127 0 0 1 127 0 0 1 1 33002479 07 2011 59 Product Description Step Action 6 Verify that a connection is made by typing C gt ping 84 0 0 2 The following figure shows that the connection is verified Reply from 8 bytes 32 time lt 10ms 4 0 0 2 Reply from 84 0 0 2 bytes 32 time lt 10ms Reply from 8100 2 bytes 32 time lt 10ms Reply from 8 bytes 32 time lt 10ms Specifying Address Parameters Consult your system administrator to obtain a valid IP address and an appropriate gateway and a subnet mask if required Then use your programming panel to make the appropriate changes BOOTP Serv
111. 011 Global Data Publish Subscribe The following illustration shows the Configuring Your NOE steps Enter Global Data configuration into NOE 1 Customize each NOE s Global Data configuration Download to each NOE in system Upload Global Data configuration to PC Start controller Stop controller Configuring the NOE Step Action 1 Select one NOE 2 Using your browser navigate to that NOE s Global Data Configuration page Follow these links Setup Global Data Enter the configuration s variable IDs symbols description and lengths Click the Update Global Data Configuration button to update the file This creates the file glbdata ini Full path follows ftp NOE_IP_ADDRESS wwwroot conf glbdata glbdata ini Note You substitute NOE _IP ADDRESS with an address like 192 168 000 010 Please check the address with your system administrator 5 Using the FTP process upload the glbdata ini file to a PC See the information below at Uploading a glbdata ini file 33002479 07 2011 187 Global Data Publish Subscribe Step Action 6 Stop each controller before you do the customization 7 Using the same path download the glbdata ini file to the other devices See the information below at Downloading a glbdata ini file 8 Connect your Web browser to each device to customize sta
112. 033 Network is unreachable 5034 Network dropped connection on reset 5035 Network caused connection abort 5036 Connection reset by peer 5037 No buffer space available 5038 Socket already connected 5039 Socket not connected 503A Cannot send after socket shutdown 503B Too many references cannot splice 503C Connection timed out see note below 503D Connection refused 142 33002479 07 2011 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks Hex Error Code Meaning 503E Network down 503F Text file busy 5040 Too many levels of links 5041 No route to host 5042 Block device required 5043 Host is down 5044 Operation now in progress 5045 Operation already in progress 5046 Operation would block 5047 Function not implemented 5048 Hardware length is invalid 5049 Route specified cannot be found 504A Collision in select call these conditions have already been selected by another task 504B Task ID is invalid 5050 No network resource 5051 Length error 5052 Addressing error 5053 Application error 5054 Client in bad state for request 5055 No remote resource may indicate no path to remote device see note below 5056 Non operational TCP connection 5057 Incoherent configuration NOTE e Error code 5055 can occur before a 503C error e No remote
113. 05 00 Ekaterinburg Standard Time Ekaterinburg Yes GMT 05 00 West Asia Standard Time Islamabad Karachi Tashkent No GMT 05 30 India Standard Time Bombay Calcutta Madras New Delhi No GMT 06 00 Central Asia Standard Time Almaty Dhaka Yes 33002479 07 2011 293 Embedded Web Pages Time Zone Description DST Available GMT 06 00 Sri Lanka Standard Time Columbo No GMT 07 00 SE Asia Standard Time Bangkok Hanoi Jakarta No GMT 08 00 China Standard Time Beijing Chongqing Hong Kong Urumqi No GMT 08 00 W Australia Standard Time Perth No GMT 08 00 Singapore Standard Time Singapore No GMT 08 00 Taipei Standard Time Taipei No GMT 09 00 Tokyo Standard Time Osako Sapporo Tokyo No GMT 09 00 Korea Standard Time Seoul No GMT 09 00 Yakutsk Standard Time Yakutsk Yes GMT 09 30 Cen Australia Standard Time Adelaide Yes GMT 09 30 AUS Central Standard Time Darwin No GMT 10 00 E Australia Standard Time Brisbane No GMT 10 00 AUS Eastern Standard Time Canberra Melbourne Sydney Yes GMT 10 00 West Pacific Standard Time Guam Port Moresby No GMT 10 00 Tasmania Standard Time Hobart Yes GMT 10 00 Vladivostok Standard Time Vladivostok Yes GMT 11 00 Central Pacific Standard Time Magadan Solomon Is New Caledonia Yes GMT 12 00 New Zealand Standard Time Auckland Wellington Yes
114. 0CPU65160 20 140NOE77100 39 140NOE77101 39 140NOE77110 39 140NOE77111 39 140NWM10000 39 A address server 74 219 Advantys 214 agency approvals 337 bandwidth monitoring 84 C communication blocks 115 configuring Ethernet devices 91 140NOE77100 49 140NOE77101 49 140NOE77110 49 140NOE77111 49 CREAD_REG 119 customer support 68 CWRITE_REG 122 D data transfer communication blocks IEC 118 diagnosing hot standby 29 DTM container 208 duplicate IP tests 377 E electronic mail notification 83 257 embedded web pages 86 267 F FactoryCast 88 FDR 219 flash file system 88 FTP 85 FTP servers 322 33002479 07 2011 383 Index G global data 81 177 322 H hot standby 88 309 hot standby network effects 320 I O scanner 79 189 I O scanning 321 installing Ethernet devices 140NOE77100 49 140NOE77101 49 140NOE77110 49 140NOE77111 49 IP addresses 310 K key switches 30 keypads 26 L local clients 320 M maintaining Ethernet modules 325 managed variables 214 MBAP 339 MBP_MSTR 133 menus high end CPUs 29 MIB 76 227 Modbus messaging 77 modes 316 N NTP time synchronization 82 245 O operating modes 316 P PRA Unity Pro 208 R READ_REG 125 remote clients 320 restriction 314 S services 140CPU65150 71 140CPU65160 71 140NOE77100 42 71 140NOE77101 42 71 140NOE77110 42 71 140NOE7711
115. 1 42 71 140NWM10000 42 77 address server 74 219 bandwidth monitoring 84 embedded web pages 86 267 FDR 219 FTP 85 global data 81 177 I O scanner 79 189 Modbus messaging 77 NTP time synchronization 82 245 SMTP electronic mail notification 83 257 SNMP 76 227 SMTP electronic mail notification 83 257 SNMP 76 227 specifications Ethernet modules 335 384 33002479 07 2011 Index T TCP_IP_ADDR 131 TFTP servers 322 time synchronization 82 245 transferring data communication blocks 115 U Unity Pro Advantys 208 DTM container 208 W web pages embedded 86 267 WRITE_REG 128 33002479 07 2011 385 Index 386 33002479 07 2011
116. 1 72 74 76 77 33002479 07 2011 VO Scanner i 2 2 od See eee dee be ie a eS A 79 Global Data i s vii sc sa necsar recur eg sra i aaa deep le a r aei eae ends 81 Time Synchronization 000 aaaea eaea 82 Electronic Mail Notification 0 0 cee eee 83 Bandwidth Monitoring 0 aaaea 84 PEP SOI Gl ssa 2 ecce a susie tees ald a Rata oSacera anaes fla E eae Bek 85 Embedded Web Pages HTTP Server Web Configuration and Diagnostics siya ice ape a toast dat ha tie se 2 hel ane oatcta ne a 86 Additional Ethernet Services 0 0 0 c eee eee eee 88 Part Il Modicon Quantum with Unity Ethernet Modules SCIVICES soi priod errara tE bet ee onde eda 89 Chapter 3 Start Communication with Unity Pro 91 3 1 How to Configure the Communication 0000 ee aee 92 Add a New Network to the Communication Folder 93 Configure Network 0 0 0 cece ete 94 Properties of a Network 2 2 2 eee 95 Delete an Existing Network Folder 0 0 eee eee eee 96 3 2 Unity Soft Communication Links 0 0 0 0 e eee eee 97 Communication Configuration Principle 00 eee eee 98 Link between Configuration and Communication 99 Link between Data and Communication 0000e eae 100 3 3 Selecting the Ethernet Module 0 0 0 c eee eee eee 101 Selecting the Quantum NOE Ethernet Module 102 IP
117. 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 MD_ Entry x 0 Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 192 33002479 07 2011 Transferring Data with the I O Scanner Double Word DW Register MDx 4 DW2 Table 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 MD Entry x 1 Bit 15 14 13 J12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Table 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 143 44 45 46 47 48 Entry Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 J19 18 17 16 Word 3 through Word 4 Table Entry 49 through 112 DW Table 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 12 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 MD Entry x 4 Bit 15 14 13 J12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 NOTE Bits are counted from right to left starting from bit O low bit For example to configure MD1 4 as a device control block in the I O scanner table use MD1 0 bit 31 to enable or disable table entry 1 Use MD1 1 bit 15 to enable or disable table entry 17 33002479 07 2011 193 Transferring Data with the I O Scanner Configuring the Quantum I O Scanner The I O Scanner Configuration Dialog IP Configuration When you click on the I O Scanning tab in the module Ethernet configuration screen the I O Scanner screen opens Health Block I iW Scanned peripherals Health Repetitive Time out te Hold
118. 10100 Regular connection Module IP Address jw 21 Emi 4 IV 5 IV 8 IV 7 IV Em oa IV EW EEE nei Local Bus Configuration parameters can be accessed in two areas on the Messaging tab screen e the Connection Configuration area e the Access Control area Connection Configuration Area The Connection Configuration area is used to e activate an access control utility e list the remote devices that can connect to the module according to a communication protocol 106 33002479 07 2011 Start Communication with Unity Pro Access Control The Access Control box is used to activate or deactivate control of remote devices that are attempting to open a TCP connection to the module The functionality depends on whether the box is checked or not e checked Access control management is activated and the Access column of the table is active no longer grayed out e The module can only communicate to the addresses entered in the 128 available spaces in the Slave IP Address column e With the module in client mode it can only connect to remote devices selected by the Access column in the Connection Configuration table e unchecked Access control management is inoperative and the Access column of the table is not active grayed out e With the module in server mode remote third party devices can connect as clients before communication with the module without being declared in the table NOTE Access control is only
119. 184 33002479 07 2011 Global Data Publish Subscribe Parameter Description Multicast filtering Activates an Ethernet module that supports multicast filtering From the drop down list select e None disable both GMRP amp IGMP Data will be sent to all end devices in the network e GMRP Make sure your client server and switches and routers support and enable GMRP e IGMP V1 Make sure your client server and switches and routers support and enable IGMP Note The following modules support IGMP V1 e 140 NOE 771 01 V4 4 or later 140 NOE 771 11 V4 4 or later e 140 CPU 651 50 60 V2 7 or later NOTE The IGMP and None features are only available in Unity 4 1 or later The screen shot shows an image of the data editor Variables DDT Types Function Blocks DFB Types Filter FP Name vi EDT DDT v IODDT Name Type Address Global Group Enet ID 4 VALVE_STATUS ARRAY 0 19 OF Word MW200 PUB plantgrp 1 E SE VALVE_CONTRO ARRAY 0 9 OF Word MW220 SUB plantgrp 2 4 PUMP_STATUS ARRAY 0 99 OF Word MW230 SUB plantgrp 3 Parameter description Parameter Description Name Variables symbols Type Variable type Address Variable address Global Data Type of Global Data Variable Options No Publish Subscribe Group Grou
120. 2 139 124 10 13 100 32 0 12 100 32 0 18 100 32 0 10 139 124 10 15 Access Control ojn Saon A G N RRRRRRNRRRRR Parameter description Setting Description Connection configuration Activates general data transfer Access Activates data transfer between specific nodes IP address Defines the node for the Ethernet Messaging procedure Access Control Activates or deactivates control of remote devices that are attempting to open a TCP connection to the module 112 33002479 07 2011 Using the Modicon Quantum with Unity Ethernet Services Purpose This part describes how to use the Ethernet services available on Modicon Quantum with Unity Ethernet modules What s in this Part This part contains the following chapters Chapter Chapter Name Page 4 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks 115 5 Global Data Publish Subscribe Utility 177 6 1 0 Scanner 189 7 Address Server Configuration Faulty Device Replacement 219 8 Network Management Service SNMP 227 9 NTP Time Synchronization Service 245 10 Electronic Mail Notification Service 257 11 Embedded Web Pages 267 12 Hot Standby 309 33002479 07 2011 113 Using Ethernet Services 114 33002479 07 2011 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks Introduction This chapter describe
121. 247 502 56 56 0 NOTE Following a request to close a connection the PLC may hold the connection open in its memory for a few minutes during which the table will reflect the open connection Number of Messages received is not reset after a port 502 connection is closed Therefore the count indicates the total number of messages that have been received since the module was started The remote address 127 0 0 1 is used as Private System Connection For Diagnostic Feature or SOAP Communications 33002479 07 2011 299 Embedded Web Pages Bandwidth Monitoring Page This page displays the load distribution of the Embedded Server module between the Global Data utilities O Scanning Messaging and other utilities BANDWIDTH MONITOR Global data 0 I O Scanner 0 Messaging 2 Others 98 HB clobal Data WO Scanning E Messaging Oo Other Ethernet Statistics Page The Ethernet Module Statistics page provides information about the status transmit and receive statistics and detected errors for the Embedded Server module Access this page by selecting the NOE module form the local rack or use the hyperlink Statistics The following graphic is an example Ethernet Module Statistics page ETHERNET MODULE STATISTICS Status Running Link Appl Host Name Reference 140 NOE 771 10 MAC Address Rack 4 IP Address Slot Unknown Subnet Mask Transmit Speed 10 MB Gateway Address Unknown 31
122. 307 Embedded Web Pages 308 33002479 07 2011 Hot Standby 12 Overview The Quantum Ethernt module offers a Hot Standby configuration available for Quantum controllers What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Quantum Hot Standby for Unity Pro 310 Hot Standby Topology 312 NOE Module Configuration and Hot Standby 313 NOE IP Address Assignment 314 NOE Operating Modes in Quantum Hot Standby System 316 NOE IP Address Swap Times 319 Network Effects of Modicon Quantum Hot Standby with Unity Solution 320 33002479 07 2011 309 Hot Standby Quantum Hot Standby for Unity Pro The Hot Standby Solution 4 CAUTION RISK OF INCREASE OF TIME TO SWAP Whenever possible use of a switch not a hub to connect the NOE modules to each other or to the network Schneider Electric offers switches Contact a local sales office for more information Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage A WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION Design your application so that unmonitored modules support communication only to noncritical parts of the application Failure to follow these instructions can result in death serious injury or equipment damage In the hot standby solution two identically configured PLC systems are set up to control the same application One PLC the primary runs the
123. 33002479 07 2011 319 Hot Standby Network Effects of Modicon Quantum Hot Standby with Unity Solution Overview Browsers Remote Clients Local Clients The Modicon Quantum Hot Standby with Unity Pro solution is a powerful feature of NOEs a feature that increases the reliability of your installation Hot Standby uses a network and using the Hot Standby feature over a network can affect the behavior of browsers remote and local clients I O scanning service global data service e FTP TFTP server The following are factors you may encounter while using the Modicon Quantum Hot Standby with Unity solution If a browser requests a page and during the process of downloading that page an IP address switchover occurs the browser either hangs or times out Click the Refresh or Reload button Hot Standby switchover affect remote clients A NOE module resets under the following conditions Remote Connection Request during Hot Standby If a remote client establishes a TCP IP connection during a Hot Standby switchover the server closes the connection using a TCP IP reset Hot Standby Switchover during Remote Connection Request If a remote client makes a connection request and a Hot Standby switchover occurs during the connection request the sever rejects the TCP IP connection by sending a reset Outstanding Requests If there is an outstanding request the NOE module does not respond to the request but the NOE module
124. 33002479 09 Modicon Quantum with Unity Ethernet Network Modules User Manual 07 2011 Schneider Electric www schneider electric com The information provided in this documentation contains general descriptions and or technical characteristics of the performance of the products contained herein This documentation is not intended as a substitute for and is not to be used for determining suitability or reliability of these products for specific user applications It is the duty of any such user or integrator to perform the appropriate and complete risk analysis evaluation and testing of the products with respect to the relevant specific application or use thereof Neither Schneider Electric nor any of its affiliates or subsidiaries shall be responsible or liable for misuse of the information contained herein If you have any suggestions for improvements or amendments or have found errors in this publication please notify us No part of this document may be reproduced in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without express written permission of Schneider Electric All pertinent state regional and local safety regulations must be observed when installing and using this product For reasons of safety and to help ensure compliance with documented system data only the manufacturer should perform repairs to components When devices are used for applications with technical safety requirements the
125. 61058 NOTE Refer to Modicon Quantum Ethernet TCP IP Module User Guide 840 USE 107 and Modicon Quantum Ethernet TCP IP Module User Guide 840 USE 115 for definitions of terms 300 33002479 07 2011 Embedded Web Pages NTP Diagnostics Page GMT 05 00 Eastern Standard Time New York NTP DIAGNOSTICS 16 51 15 Time synchronization service parameters Parameter Description NTP status Service is correctly configured OK NTP server status NTP client is connected to the NTP server and if the server is Primary or Standby NTP requests Total number of client requests sent to the NTP server NTP responses Total number of server responses sent from the NTP server Number of errors Total number of unanswered NTP requests Last error code Last error code received from the NTP client Date Date in d m y format Time Time Time zone Time zone plus or minus Universal Time Coordinated UTC DST Daylight saving time DST parameter is either 1 on enabled 2 off disabled 301 Embedded Web Pages Last Error field displays values which indicate the type of detected event Type of detected event Value Component OK and running 0 Excessive network traffic or server overload 1 Bad parameters in the configuration 3 Component is disabled 4 Incorrect IP 9 Time zone file absent 14 Incorrect syntax in the customrules
126. 77 Glossary PING PLC port protocol repeater RFC router server Packet Internet Groper A program used to test whether a destination on a network can be reached Programmable Logic Controller An access point for data entry or exit within a host using TCP services Describes message formats and a set of rules used by two or more devices to communicate using those formats R A device that connects two sections of a network and conveys signals between them without making routing decisions or filtering packets Request For Comment Paper identified by a number in Internet world They define the state of art regarding Internet protocols ruled by IETF Internet Engineering Task Force http www ietf org A device that connects two or more sections of a network and allows information to flow between them A router examines every packet it receives and decides whether to block the packet from the rest of the network or transmit it The router will attempt to send the packet through the network by the most efficient path S Provides services to clients This term may also refer to the computer on which the service is based 378 33002479 07 2011 Glossary SMTP SNMP socket stack STP subnet subnet mask switch TCP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol A common protocol used to transfer e mail messages Simple Network Management Protocol The association of a port with an IP add
127. Application Protocol Modbus Application Protocol PDU Overview Description The following information describes the structure and content of the Modbus Application Protocol PDU The Modbus Application Protocol PDU mbap_pdu is received at TCP port number 502 The current maximum size of the mbap_pdu for this class of services is 256 bytes The structure and content of the mbap_pdu is defined to be mbap pdu inv_id 2 proto _id 2 len 2 dst_idx 1 data mb_pdu The header is seven bytes long and includes the fields listed in the following table Field Description inv_id 2 bytes invocation id used for transaction pairing proto_id 2 bytes used for intra system multiplexing default is 0 for Modbus services len 2 bytes the len field is a byte count of the remaining fields and it includes the dst_id and data fields The remainder of the pdu includes two fields Field Description dst_idx 1 byte destination index is used for intra system routing of packets currently not implemented data n bytes this is the service portion of the Modbus pdu mb_pdu and it is defined below The service portion of the Modbus Application Protocol called mb_pdu contains two fields mb pdu func_code 1 data n The following table describes the fields in mb_pdu Field Description func_code 1 byte Modbus function code data n bytes this field is function code dependent an
128. Complete the following checks before installing the module e Determine how the module will be assigned its Ethernet address parameters The default method is BOOTP e Verify that your Ethernet network is properly constructed e Verify that you are using the proper cabling scheme for your application Cabling Schemes see page 52 Determine the Appropriate Ethernet Address Parameters Consult your system administrator to determine whether e you must configure new IP gateway and subnet mask addresses or e the module will obtain its Ethernet address parameters from a BOOTP server Assigning Ethernet Address Parameters If the administrator assigns new address parameters you will need to configure the module through the Unity Pro interface module configuration screen Verify the Network Topology Because the module includes an Ethernet embedded web server you must use a cross link cable to connect it to another device Do not use a standard cable For the network to operate properly you must route the cable for each device through an Ethernet hub or switch 50 33002479 07 2011 Product Description The following figure shows two incorrect network topologies NOE The following figure shows a correct network topology ee O m NOE hub switch _ a 20 o0 zZ O m an 33002479 07 2011 51 Product Description Cable Sche
129. E Station oy Configuration A 1 Local Bus j E r ry 1 Local Quantum Drop 4 ofl 1 140 YEP 016 00 By t wocrste xo em W 2 3 140 CPU 65150 ooo 4 MONDE 77101 ETHERNET Double click the ETHRNET port to bring up the network link screen Under Please choose a network scroll to locate the name of your logical network NOE77101 in our example 1 4 Ethernet Be ETH TCP IP Overview a Genera I O objects Please choose a network NOE 77101 v Click the validate check box in the upper toolbar to confirm the network link configuration Tool Buld PLC Debug Window Validate check box A Bie 358 33002479 07 2011 Installation and Configuration Assigning an IP Address to the 140 NOE 771 01 Module Perform the following steps to assign an IP address to the 140 NOE 771 01 communication module Step Action 1 Locate the Communications Networks directory in the Project browser 2 Double click your new logical network NOE77101 in our example to open the NOE077101 configuration screen IP Configuration Messaging IP address configuration Configured IP address 192 168 1 200 Subnetwork mask 295 255 255 0 Gateway address 0 0 0 0 From a server Ethernet cenfiguration Eremet 1 9023 3 Click Configured in the IP Address Configuration group circled area shown abov
130. Lite Server Software and user documentation are available for download at www modicon com 33002479 07 2011 67 Product Description 1 4 Customer Support Overview This section tells you how to get customer support from Schneider Electric s documentation and regional help centers What s in this Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Customer Support Documentation 69 Contact Information 70 68 33002479 07 2011 Product Description Customer Support Documentation Support Documentation If you have any problems please first consult the documentation listed above or the MS Windows documentation For the most up to date NOE Ethernet controller information please Step Action 1 Access the Schneider Electric Web site 2 Search technical information 3 Select Quantum from the list of cross product families 4 Access either e resolutions for resolutions to product issues product manuals for the most recently published user documentation product announcements 33002479 07 2011 69 Product Description Contact Information Contact Information Please find the nearest Schneider Electric sales office by visiting hitp www schneider electric com In the Select a country list click the country closest to you for customer support Select your country Canada 70 33002479 07 2011 Etherne
131. Msgin 9 total number of Port502 messages received from the network port502MsgOut 10 total number of Port502 messages sent from the network port502MsgOutErr 11 total number of error messages built by the Ports02 messaging entity and sent to the network port502AddStackStat 12 the support of additional port502 stack statistics e 1 disabled e 2 enabled port502AddStackStatTable 13 additional stack statistics for Port502 optional I O Scanning Subtree The I O_Scanning 3 subtree or group contains the objects related to I O scanning device management and associated MODBUS communications on Port502 Service Indicates ioScanStatus 1 global status of the I O scanning service 1 idle e 2 operational e 3 stopped ioScanMaxDevice 2 maximum number of devices supported by the I O scanning entity ioScanPolledDevice 3 number of devices currently polled by the I O scanning entity ioScanTransSend 4 total number of transactions sent by the I O scanning entity ioScanGlbHealth 5 global status of health for the I O scanning service 2 OK Every remote I O device is responding 4 Warning At least one remote I O device is not responding ioScanDeviceTable 6 a table containing information on each remote devices polled by the I O scanning entity 238 33002479 07 2011 SNMP Global Data Subtree The Global_Data 4 subtree or group contains
132. NOE 771 00 Version 2 2 or earlier 128 140 NOE 771 00 Version 3 0 or later 140 NOE 771 01 and 140 NOE 771 11 only 128 HE CPU 651 x0 Max No of Input Words 4000 Max No of Output Words 4000 Health Timeout Value User configured 1 65535 ms in 1 ms increments Last Value Input User configured zero or Hold 33002479 07 2011 79 Ethernet Communication Services Parameter Value IP Address User configured IP address of scanned device Slave IP Local and Remote Register Reference User configured Repetitive Rate User configured 0 65535 in multiples of e 16 ms for 140 NOE 771 x1 e 10 ms for 140 CPU 651 x0 Unit ID User configured Configure ID only if using a bridge Operation through a bridge Modbus bridge Supported Modbus Plus bridge Supported The I O Scanner Concepts topic see page 190 explains how to configure the I O scanner Performance Performance data details are provided at I O Scanner Response Times topic see page 216 80 33002479 07 2011 Ethernet Communication Services Global Data Overview The Global Data service is a real time publisher subscriber mechanism providing the most efficient data exchange for PLC application coordination Devices that support Global Data are arranged in a distribution group for the purpose of application variable exchange and synchronization Each Global Data devi
133. P TFE Private MIB The Transparent Factory SNMP embedded component controls the Schneider private MIB function The Schneider private MIB and associated services perform Network Management on all system components The Transparent Factory private MIB provides the data to manage the main Transparent Factory communication services for all the communication components of the Transparent Factory architecture ETYs NOEs third party toolkit ENTs M1Es The Transparent Factory private MIB does not define the specific management applications and policies The diagram following illustrates the Schneider Electric Groupe_Schneider 3833 private enterprise MIB subtree Groupe_Schneider 3833 Transparent_Factory_Ethemet 1 m Switch 1 Port502_Messaging 2 ___ 0_Scanning 8 LK Global_Data 4 __ Web 5 H Address_Server 6 Equipment_Profiles 7 Premium 1 Quantum 2 Generic_Device 3 MIE 4 H timeManagement 8 L NTP 1 email 9 236 33002479 07 2011 SNMP The Groupe_Schneider 3833 subtree is the root of Groupe Schneider s private MIB in the Structure of Management Information SMI used by SNMP and defined in RFC 1155 which is a specification that defines the structure and identification of management information for TCP IP based networks Transparent Factory Ethernet Subtree The Transparent_F
134. P Configuration Page Click the SNMP link in the Setup home page to display the Configure SNMP page SNMP Configuration System Name 140 NOE 771 01 Module System Description Quantum Ethernet TCP IP Communications Module Managers IP Addresses Manager I 192 168 1 100 ManagerII 0 0 0 0 Agent Location SysLocation Test_Setup_1 Contact SysContact Julien Community Security NonTriv1 NonTriv2 Nontiva r Anthentication Failure Trap Enabled Reset the Form Update SNMP_ Show SNMP Configuration The following table describes the SNMP configuration tasks that you can perform through the Web page Task How To To display the current SNMP configuration Click Show SNMP Configuration To clear the fields Click Reset the Form To change the SNMP configuration Change the information on the page and click Update SNMP 278 33002479 07 2011 Embedded Web Pages SNMP Page Fields The following table describes the SNMP fields that you can modify Field Information To Be Supplied Manager IP Address of first SNMP Manager Manager II IP Address of second SNMP Manager Location SysLocation Location of the module Contact SysContact Name of the responsible systems engineer Set Designation of user level who can set the configuration Get Designation of user level who can view the configuration Trap
135. P Ethernet Register Meaning CONTROL 1 4 clear local statistics CONTROL 2 Indicates the error status CONTROL 3 Reserved CONTROL 4 Reserved CONTROL 5 Routing register Most significant byte network adapter module slot CONTROL 6 Reserved CONTROL9 33002479 07 2011 153 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks Get Remote Statistics Description A get remote statistics operation can be used to read data from remote nodes on the network With each query the remote communications processor supplies a complete table of statistics even if the query does not refer to the entire table It then copies only the words that you queried into identified MW addresses An operation can take several cycles to complete it does not require a master data transaction path To program an MBP_MSTR block to get remote statistics use function code 7 see page 137 Network Implementation A get remote statistics operation can be performed on Modbus Plus and TCP IP Ethernet networks Conirol Block Usage for Modbus Plus Register Meaning CONTROL 1 7 get remote statistics CONTROL 2 Indicates the error status CONTROL 3 Number of addresses to be read from the statistics data field 0 38 Note The size of databuf must be at least the size of this entry CONTROLI4 First address from which the node statistics must be read The number of available sta
136. Paulo Yes GMT 03 00 SA Eastern Standard Time Buenos Aires Georgetown No GMT 02 00 Mid Atlantic Standard Time South_Georgia No GMT 01 00 Azores Standard Time Azores Cape Verde Island Yes GMT Universal Coordinated Time Casablanca Monrovia No GMTO Greenwich Mean Time Dublin Edinburgh Lisbon London Yes GMT 01 00 Romance Standard Time Amsterdam CopenHagen Madrid Paris Vilnius Yes GMT 01 00 Central European Standard Time Belgrade Sarajevo Skopje Sofija Zagreb Yes GMT 01 00 Central Europe Standard Time Bratislava Budapest Ljubljana Prague Warsaw Yes GMT 01 00 W Europe Standard Time Brussels Berlin Bern Rome Stockholm Vienna Yes GMT 02 00 GTB Standard Time Athens Istanbul Minsk Yes GMT 02 00 E Europe Standard Time Bucharest Yes GMT 02 00 Egypt Standard Time Cairo Yes GMT 02 00 South Africa Standard Time Johannesburg Harare Pretoria No GMT 02 00 FLE Standard Time Helsinki Riga Tallinn Yes GMT 02 00 Israel Standard Time Israel Jerusalem Yes GMT 03 00 Arabic Standard Time Baghdad Yes GMT 03 00 Arab Standard Time Kuwait Riyadh No GMT 03 00 Russian Standard Time Moscow St Petersburg Volgograd Yes GMT 03 00 E Africa Standard Time Nairobi No GMT 03 30 Iran Standard Time Tehran Yes GMT 04 00 Arabian Standard Time Abu Dhabi Muscat No GMT 04 00 Caucasus Standard Time Baku Tbilisi Yes GMT 04 00 Afghanistan Standard Time Kabul No GMT
137. Rights reserved Note The system does not allow you to enter text in both the Role Name and Device MAC Address text fields Create either a DHCP configuration Role Name or a BOOTP Device MAC Address configuration For the address server configuration type DHCP or BOOTP enter text in the appropriate field e Role Name variable name for DHCP address server configuration e Device MAC Address MAC address for BOOTP address server configuration Enter an address in the Device IP Address field We have provided an example address Enter an address in the Subnet Mask field We have provided an example address Enter an address in the Gateway field We have provided an example address Press the Add the Entry button 33002479 07 2011 285 Embedded Web Pages When you press the Add the Entry button a new entry that corresponds to your input appears in the table in the web frame Address Server Configuration fT Role Name MAC Address IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Q test_1 192 168 1 1 255 255 255 0 192 168 1 200 Refresh Address Server Database Table Add a New Entry Change an Entry Delete an Entry Copyright 1999 2004 Schneider Automation SAS All Rights reserved When you use the same Add the Entry procedure to add subsequent entries multiple entries appear in the table Address Server Configuration fT Role Name MAC Address IP Adcress Subnet Mask Ga
138. SC duplex multimode fiber optic cable assembly 62 5 125mm Schneider Electric recommends cable number 490NOC00005 to connect to fiber hubs switches NOTE The NOE 771 xx and NWM 100 00 are one channel devices that can communicate over either 10 100 BASE T or 100 BASE FX Ethernet networks at any given time but not over both at the same time 46 33002479 07 2011 Product Description Using the 140 NOE 771 11 Ethernet Module in a Quantum Safety Project Overview Version 4 2 and higher of the 140 NOE 771 11 Ethernet module can be included in one of the following e Quantum safety applications e non safety applications A Quantum safety application is controlled by a Quantum safety PLC consisting exclusively of safety modules that perform safety functions A safety module is denoted by the letter S at the end of its module name When used in a Quantum safety application the 140 NOE 771 11 is a non interfering module it does not negatively affect the execution of the PLC s safety functions For more information about Quantum safety products refer to the Quantum Safety PLC Safety Manual Restricted and Unrestricted Memory Areas The memory addresses of a Quantum safety PLC can be configured as one of the following e safety restricted memory areas e unrestricted memory areas Only safety modules can write data to a safety restricted memory area For more information about restricted versus unrestricted memory areas
139. TA DPM1_STATUS 2 DPM2_STATUS 8 m LIVE_LIST 8 m DIAG LIST 23 MAILBOX_STAT 23 PRM_Master_OUT 23 VEGASON_61_Pro INT T_PRM_IN BYTE BYTE BYTE BYTE ARRAY 0 7 OF WORD ARRAY 0 7 OF WORD ARRAY 0 15 OF BYTE T_PRM_OUT T_VEGASON_61_Prof W300 W100 W100 W100 W101 W101 W102 W110 W118 W500 W126 New_STB_R1 New_STB PRM_Master PRM_Master PRM_Master PRM_Master PR Master PRM_Master PRI PR PR Master Master Master PRM_Master Managed variables follow the usual rules for Unity Pro and ACS or DTM naming The optional Owner column lists the owner attribute of the managed variables This allows you to filter the variables according to their Device Name The Unity Pro managed variables are locked and cannot be modified through the Data Editor You have to use the device configuration tool ACS or the DTM to modify these variables 214 33002479 07 2011 Transferring Data with the I O Scanner Importing Managed Variables from a Device Advantys DTM Using the Update button on the Property box see page 208 imports the device Symbols into the Data Editor as Unity Pro managed variables In the case of a conflict between an device Symbol and an existing variable in the Data Editor e lf the Unity Pro variable is not managed a message box allows you to replace this variable with the managed variable coming from the ACS or DTM c
140. TE Error Codes for SY MAX and TCP IP Ethernet 145 SY MAX Specific Error Codes 1 0 0 0000s 146 Read Data fc ij neeed ttre hea te etapa ta wile on wa deg Gay 148 Write Data ciiay bi p ested oe Saeed dade Aaaa ecb 150 Get Local Statistics cic sepa koe tek claie p ae Pa ae ae ee ae ae es 152 Clear Local Statistics 00 153 Get Remote Statistics 0 0 0 tee 154 Clear Remote Statistics 2 0 eee 156 TCP IP Ethernet Network Statistics 0 0 0 0 0c eee eee eee 157 TCP IP Ethernet Error Codes 0 0 0 0 cece eee ee 160 Reset Optional Module 00 c eee tees 163 R ad GTE swiss tan estate en B ERN e te Bag ES E aeS 164 Write CTE aieeaa ieee Lies eid eee Bete Gr el ie ed 166 SendiEMall esas oe eho et Se authe aa Coe ees ae he oh ache 168 Send Modbus Request 0 0 0 c eects 170 Close Connection Request 0 0 c cece eee 175 Read Write Data Tieren Faas oe ee ben Pe Ae es ee ed 176 Chapter 5 Global Data Publish Subscribe Utility 177 Planning the Global Data Publish Subscribe System 178 Multicast Filtering eras rapeaa ea tye eh ee aa capa ao ee 182 Quantum NOE Global Data Configuration 000000 184 Configuration of Global Data Publish Subscribe by the Web for NOE 771 MA sitters Mla eet eR ee eee ee take phi trey gone aw Lats 186 Chapter 6 I O Scanner 000 e cece eee eee eee 189 VO Scanner Concepts 0 0 ce
141. TROL 10 Indicates MSTR operation dependent information CONTROL 11 Indicates MSTR operation dependent information NOTE CONTROL 10 and CONTROL 11 are used when configuring the MBP_MSTR block for a Read Write Data operation function code 23 33002479 07 2011 139 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks Control Block for SY MAX Ethernet Register Contents CONTROL 1 Indicates an operation that is valid for SY MAX CONTROL 2 Indicates the error status CONTROL 3 Indicates the length i e the number of registers transferred max 100 CONTROL 4 Indicates MSTR operation dependent information CONTROLJ 5 Routing register used to specify a destination node during network transfer Most significant byte source node address ie e the slot for the NOE module Least significant byte destination node address i e a value that represents a direct or bridge address If there is no bridge the value in the least significant byte is set to 0 If there is a bridge this value contains the MBP for the Ethernet mapping index MET If NOM is inserted in slot 7 on the module rack and the Ethernet mapping index MET is 6 the routing register looks as follows value 0x0706 most significant least significant byte byte a la aan p o 0 0 0 90 q 1 1 o 0 0 07 0 1 1 0 Most significant byte Slots 1 16 Least significant byt
142. Time Synchronization Service 246 Using the R_NTPC Block for Time Synchronization 249 NTP Time Synchronization Service Operating Conditions 251 Configuring the NTP Time Service 252 33002479 07 2011 245 Using the NTP Time Service Introducing the NTP Time Synchronization Service General The NTP time service synchronizes computer clocks over the Internet For example the time of one client is synchronized either with another server or to a referenced time source like a radio or satellite receiver Typical time service configurations utilize redundant servers and diverse network paths to achieve high accuracy and reliability Time service accuracy can be within a millisecond on LANs and up to a few tenths of milliseconds on WANs Use the time service for e event recording sequence events e event synchronization trigger simultaneous events e alarm and I O synchronization time stamp alarms Features of the NTP Time Service Some features of the NTP time synchronization service are e periodic time correction obtained from the reference standard time server e automatic switch over to a backup time server if a problem occurs with the normal time server system e controller projects use a function block to read the accurate clock a feature that allows project events or variables to be time stamped e estimated time stamping accuracy of e 5mSec for 140 CPU 651 x0 s and higher e 10 mSec for other CPUs e local time
143. a are exchanged from the Primary to Standby controller OFF Copro auto tests e ON system not redundant Copro unsuccessful Possible booting from power on to end of self hardware problem tests Flashing e OFF Copro auto tests were not successfull 1 Flash Configuration in E j progress Temporary situation 2 Flashes Invalid MAC address 3 Flashes Link not connected 4 Flashes Duplicate IP Address Module is set to its default IP address 5 Flashes Waiting for IP address from address server 6 Flashes Invalid IP address Module is set to its default IP address 7 Flashes Firmware 28 33002479 07 2011 Product Description Using the CPU LCD Display Screens Overview The controller LCD displays messages These messages indicate the controller status There are four levels of menus and submenus Menus are accessed using the keypad see page 26 on the front of the controller For detailed information about the menus and submenus see e PLC Operations Menus and Submenus see page 32 e Using the Communications Menus and Submenus see page 35 e Using the LCD Settings Menus and Submenus see page 37 e Using the System Info Menus and Submenus see page 38 Structure LCD display menus and submenus Mode State Bat L A w port PCM Quantum r Quantum p Quantum p Quantum D PLC Operations gt Communications gt System Info gt LCD Settings gt l
144. a remote device After this time period expires the received data is invalid The health timeout should be longer than the repetitive rate For a Quantum 140 NOE771 01 Ethernet module it also should be longer than the CPU scan time e Range 1 ms to 50s Interval 1 ms 1500ms Repetitive rate ms The rate at which data is scanned in multiples of 16 ms 64 ms RD Master Object Destination address in the master PLC where from each device newly read information is stored MW10 33002479 07 2011 363 Installation and Configuration Parameter Description Example RD Slave Source address index in the The format of this value Ref slave remote device depends on the Slave Syntax e Index 5 e Modbus 400006 e IEC 0 MW5 e IEC 1 MW6 RD length Number of words to read 10 Using these examples Master Object 140 NOE 771 01 reads data from address 192 168 1 100 starting at index 5 It puts the data into the NOE address starting at MW10 using a read size of 10 words Last value This field configures the behavior of Hold last Input inputs in the event of an access error in relation to the remote device for example inoperative network or device power supply etc e Set to 0 fall back to 0 e Hold last maintain last value WR Master Source address of the master PLC MW20 Object whose data is being written into the slave remote device Write op
145. actory_Ethernet 1 subtree defines groups that support the Transparent Factory Ethernet services and devices Service Subtree Definition Switch 1 brand of switches labeled ConneXium switches private MIB Port502_Messaging 2 objects for managing explicit client server communications supporting applications such as HMI SCADA or programming tools 1 O_Scanning 3 objects for managing I O device communications that use the I O Scanner mechanism with the MB TCP protocol Global_Data 4 objects for managing the application coordination service using a publish subscribe protocol Web 5 objects for managing the activity of the embedded Web servers Address_Server 6 objects for managing the activity of the BOOTP and or DHCP servers Equipment_Profiles 7 objects for each type of device in Transparent Factory Ethernet s product portfolio timeManagement 8 objects for managing the UTC time stamp service email 9 objects for managing the mail service Device subtrees or groups will be defined for the following devices Premium 1 Quantum 2 Generic_Device 3 M1E 4 ENT 5 As devices are added to Schneider s catalog Schneider s private MIB will be extended in the following manner If needed a Transparent Factory communication service object will be added for the new device in the corresponding Equipment_Profiles 7 subtree This subtree can hold as man
146. address located variable unlocated variable or literal NO_REG is the number of registers to be read from the addressed slave 1 100 The parameter can be entered as a direct address located variable unlocated variable or literal The REG_READ word parameter addresses the first register in a series of NO_LREG registers listed one after the other which are used as a destination data area The parameter must be entered as a direct address or located variable Error code see Runtime errors The STATUS parameter can be specified as direct address located variable or unlocated variable 33002479 07 2011 121 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks CWRITE_REG Function Description The CWRITE_REG block writes data to a register area continuously transferring data from the PLC via TCP IP Ethernet to an addressed slave EN and ENO can be configured as additional parameters NOTE About this function block e When programming this function you must be familiar with the routing procedures used by your network e For technical reasons this function block does not allow the use of ST and IL programming languages Symbol Block representation DINT INT WORD WordArrs CWRITE_REG SLAVEREG NO_REG REG WRIT AddrFld STATUS gt WORD Parameter Description Description of parameters Parameter Data Type Meaning SLAVEREG DINT offse
147. ain common predefined items recipient list sender name and subject These items can be updated by an authorized administrator Mail System Types The Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP provides two mechanisms for the transmission of email messages e direct connection e relay system Mechanism Condition Result Direct connection Sender and receiver are connected to the Email messages are sent to host same transport service Relay system Sender and receiver are NOT connected Email messages are relayed from one server to to the same transport service another server To relay messages the SMTP server must be supplied with the address of the e destination host e destination mailbox Mail Service Client The Quantum Ethernet module includes an SMTP client When the module receives a specific request from the project it sends an email message to the mail server MSTR Ethernet OK or NOK f Fi SMTP Server 258 33002479 07 2011 Using the Mail Service Operating Modes and Sending Requests Because the project sends the email request a controller cannot send an email message either while in the stopped mode or while downloading a project As soon as the controller is in RUN mode the function block sends a request during the first project scan Diagnostic counters are reset to 0 after either a power up a project download ora reconfiguration of the mail service
148. al Data 33002479 07 2011 283 Embedded Web Pages Configure Address Server Page Overview This topic describes the DHCP and BOOTP address server configuration for the Transparent Factory Ethernet modules NOTE To configure the address server for the 140 NOE 771 x FactoryCast Web server modules see Address Server Configuration Faulty Device Replacement see page 220 which describes the BOOTP process Address Server Page The Address Server Configuration page appears below Ei Wee FactoryCast NOE 771 11 Home Documentation Monitoring Control Diagnostics Wantenance msg Setup Address Server Configuration Role Name MAC Address IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Refresh Address Server Database Table Add a New Entry Change an Entry Delete an Entry Copyright 1999 2004 Schneider Automation SAS All Rights reserved Intemet 284 33002479 07 2011 Embedded Web Pages Adding Entries Create new address server configurations with these steps Step Action 1 Press Add a New Entry A dialog appears in the web frame Address Server Node Configuration Role Name test_1 Device MAC Address Device IP Address 192 168 1 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway 192 168 1 200 Add the Enty Reset the From Show Address Server Configuration Copyright 1998 2004 Schneider Automation SAS All
149. alues when the table is animated e Data editor lite for creating variable data tables to determine their values when the table is animated This editor contains fewer features than the standard Data editor e Graphic editor for creating graphics to determine the values of variables when the graphic is animated e Graphic viewer for viewing graphics to determine the values of variables when the graphic is animated e PLC Program viewer Display UnityPro programs in run mode using a web browser e Password protected custom pages for viewing protected screen pages created by the user e Custom pages without password protection for viewing unprotected screen pages created by the user 33002479 07 2011 269 Embedded Web Pages Diagnostics Home Page Home Page This page lists the various services supported by the default Web site of the module and provides links for accessing the services you require Illustration The Diagnostics home page looks like this i FactoryCast NOE 771 11 Schneider Home Documentation Serie Monitoring C Diagnostics Diagnostics Fl NOE Diagnostics FactoryCast Copyright 2008 Schneider Automation SAS Al Rights reserved neme Links To access the service you require click on a link Configured Local Rack Controller Status see page 274 RIO Status see page 276 Alarm Viewer NOE Diagnostics see page 297 NOE Properties see page 306
150. an error in the CONTROL 2 register of the control block see page 138 You can perform a read operation on a nonexistent slave register The slave detects the status and logs it This can last for several cycles Network Implementation The read operation can be performed on Modbus Plus TCP IP Ethernet and SY MAX Ethernet networks Conirol Block Usage for Modbus Plus Register Meaning CONTROL 1 2 Read data CONTROL 2 Indicates the error status CONTROL 3 Number of registers to be read from the slave CONTROL 4 Determines the MW starting register in the slave from which the data is read e g 1 MW1 49 MW49 CONTROLJ 5 Routing register 1 is used to specify the address routing path address 1 of s 5 of the node during a network transfer CONTROL 9 The last byte in the routing path that is not 0 is the destination node Control Block Usage for TCP IP Ethernet Register Meaning CONTROL 1 2 read data CONTROL 2 Indicates the error status CONTROL 3 Number of addresses to be read from the slave CONTROL 4 Determines the MW starting register in the slave from which the data is read e g 1 MW1 49 MW49 CONTROL 5 Routing register Most significant byte network adapter module slot Least significant byte MBP on Ethernet Transporter MET mapping index 148 33002479 07 2011 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks
151. and press Enter oa AJOJN At the FTP prompt type put and press Enter Note Pay attention that the NOE771xx bin has to be to the local path on your PC default path c At the local file prompt type NOE771xx bin and press Enter At the remote file prompt type NOE771xx bin and press Enter After the transfer is complete you must reboot the NOE to allow the new EXEC to become operational Note The file name is case sensitive and must be entered with the name in uppercase and the extension in lowercase as shown in the figure below For example NOE771xx bin 332 33002479 07 2011 Maintenance Sample FTP Session The following FTP session was used to download an NOE Exec NOTE The NOE Kernel can not be downloaded via FTP Reboot Information after FTP NOTE After downloading by FTP reboot the module Perform a download or a reboot when your system can tolerate these actions 33002479 07 2011 333 Maintenance Downloading a New NOE Kernel Procedure The NOE Executive Exec adds a new feature that allows updating of the low level Kernel within the NOE module s firmware For the proper installation of new kernel firmware use the following procedure Step Action 1 Check the current version of the NOE module s Executive firmware Exec file 2 If the Exec is not the appropriate version the Exec must be updated before updating the Kernel Us
152. ange the directory to wwwroot coni diag 3 Perform an FTP to get the crash log file get crash log Clearing the Crash Log The crash log can be cleared from the embedded web pages or via FTP Procedure for Clearing the Crash Log via FTP To access the crash log via FTP Step Action 1 Log in to the module s FTP Server 2 Change the directory to wwwroot conf diag 3 Perform an FTP to delete the crash log file rm crash log 330 33002479 07 2011 Maintenance Downloading a New NOE Exec Introduction The following tools can be used to download a new NOE Exec e Schneider Electric programming packages see corresponding manuals e FTP Use the OS loader to update the NOE Executive and web pages Refer to the Unity Pro documentation 33002479 07 2011 331 Maintenance Downloading a New NOE Exec via FTP Exec Version Procedure Please check the current NOE Exec file version on the NOE Properties Web page Follow these links Diagnostics NOE Properties The following procedure describes the steps to use to download a new NOE Exec via FTP An example follows the procedure Step Action At the DOS prompt type FTP followed by the IP Address and press Enter At the User prompt type USER and press Enter At the password prompt enter your FTP Password and press Enter At the FTP prompt type cd wwwroot conf exec
153. ap into place 33002479 07 2011 57 Product Description Assigning Ethernet Address Parameters Overview 4 CAUTION UNINTENTIONAL OPERATION If you do not enter the correct address pairs into the BOOTP server you could communicate to the wrong device e Ensure that the MAC address matches the intended IP address in your BOOTP server Having two or more devices with the same IP address can cause unpredictable operation of your network e Ensure that your Ethernet module receives a unique IP address Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage The following information describes how to assign IP address parameters As shipped from the factory the 140 NOE 771 xx module does not contain an IP address If you have not programmed the unit with an Ethernet configuration extension the module does not contain an IP address When the module starts up without an IP address the module will attempt to obtain an IP address from the network s BOOTP server You can assign IP address parameters using the BOOTP Lite software utility NOTE You can configure the IP address using Web pages on the modules 140 NOE 771 01 11 and NWM 100 00 Using a BOOTP Server A BOOTP server is a program that manages the IP addresses assigned to devices on the network Your system administrator can confirm whether a BOOTP server exists on your network and can help you use the server to mainta
154. application and updates the other secondary standby PLC The standby maintains awareness of the application status but does not perform any control functions In the event of a failure in the primary PLC the standby PLC takes over the primary PLC responsi bilities When the PLC that has failed becomes operational again it comes back up in the hot standby system as the new secondary PLC The NOEs coordinate the swapping of IP addresses After closing both the client and the server connections each NOE sends a swap UDP message to its peer NOE The sending NOE then waits a specified timeout 500 ms for the peer swap of UDP messages Either after receiving the messages or after a timeout the NOE changes its IP address NOTE NOEs must communicate with each other in order to swap IP addresses Schneider Electric recommends that you connect the primary and secondary NOEs to the same switch because e Communication failures between the NOEs increases the time to swap e Connecting 2 NOEs to the same switch minimizes the probability of a communication failure 310 33002479 07 2011 Hot Standby NOTE Schneider Electric recommends that you use a switch not a hub to connect the NOEs to each other or to the network Schneider Electric offers switches please contact a local sales office for more information The NOE waits for either a change in the controller s Hot Standby state or the swap of UDP messages Then the NOE perfor
155. aracters DATABUF Parameter Description The first word of the DATABUF parameter contains the following information Byte Number Description Value 1 least significant byte Mail header 1 2 3 2 most significant byte Nb n of extra characters in subject User defined between 0 and 238 The second and subsequent words maximum 119 contain the data ASCII format that will be copied into the email message The first n characters will be added to the configured email subject The remaining characters 2 N 2 n will be part of the message body N represents the number of words transferred The first characters will be added to the message subject The remaining characters 2 N 2 n will be a part of the message body Data in ASCII N 41 words transferred to the SMTP client and part of the message 33002479 07 2011 263 Using the Mail Service Mail Service Error Codes Error Codes The electronic mail notification service supports the following error codes Hex Error Code Description 5100 Internal error 5101 SMTP component not operational 5102 Mail Header not configured 5103 Invalid Mail Header value should be 1 2 or 3 5104 Cannot connect to SMTP server 5105 Error in transmitting content of email body to SMTP server 5106 Closing SMTP connection with the server returned an e
156. are checked to see if they are valid If there is a problem a message box opens explaining why they are not valid OK is only available during the first use of the Property box fora new PRA configuration 210 33002479 07 2011 Transferring Data with the I O Scanner Element Description Launch PRA This button is only available if the Device Type and Device Name has been entered This button does two things e It carries out the action of the OK button e f there is no problem during validation it launches another instance of Unity Pro which is used to do the actual configuration of the PRA Close This button closes the Property box without saving anything Valid Name A valid Device Name for a configuration Does not already exist in the application Is not a empty name Starts with a letter Has a maximum of 8 characters Only ASCII characters not Unicode characters Has no spaces Follows the Windows file naming conventions no slashes question marks etc Follows Unity Pro variable naming conventions Property Box for a PRM Master DTM This Property box allows you to choose the type and protocol for a PRM Master DTM The following illustration is the Property box after selecting the Device Type DTM Protocol and DTM Name Property Device Type DTM Protocol DTM Name DTM Profibus DP VO Master_PRM_DTM Data Exchange Required Input word
157. ariables When using variables with 2 or more words the RD and WR lengths must be adjusted so that a variable is not partly on one I O Scanning line and partly on the next Because the 2 newly created lines result in two independent Modbus exchanges that can be sent unsynchronised to the device The variables can receive the wrong values if the two parts are received at different times It may be necessary to use a RD length lt 125 and a WR length lt 100 for some of the scanned lines in order to get each variable on only one exchange line 4 WARNING UNEXPECTED SYSTEM BEHAVIOR Verify that multiple word variables are completely on the same I O Scanning line to avoid sending parts of a variable data in two unsynchronized I O Scanning Modbus exchanges Failure to follow these instructions can result in death serious injury or equipment damage 202 33002479 07 2011 Transferring Data with the I O Scanner Introduction to Configuring Advantys from Unity Pro At a Glance The Advantys Configuration Software ACS is integrated in Unity Pro This allows you to configure Advantys STB and OTB islands from the Unity Pro Ethernet I O scanning tab Configuring an Advantys Island A WARNING UNEXPECTED SYSTEM BEHAVIOR Always launch ACS from Unity Pro in order to synchronize variables and data between Unity Pro and ACS Failure to follow these instructions can result in death serious injury or equip
158. ata structure can also be used with constants A rising edge triggers the read transaction The REQ parameter can be specified as direct address located variable or unlocated variable 33002479 07 2011 129 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks SLAVEREG NO_REG REG_WRIT DONE ERROR STATUS SLAVEREG is the start of the area in the addressed slave from which the source data is read The source area always resides within the MW word 4x register area SLAVEREG expects the source reference as offset within that area In 4x registers the leading 4 must be omitted For example 59 contents of the variables or value of the literal 40059 The parameter can be specified as direct address located variable unlocated variable or literal Number of registers to be read from the addressed slave 1 100 The parameter can be specified as direct address located variable unlocated variable or literal The REG_WRIT word parameter addresses the first register in a series of NO_REG registers used as source data area The parameter must be entered as a direct address or located variable Transition to ON state for one program scan signifies data have been transferred The DONE parameter can be specified as direct address located variable or unlocated variable Transition to ON state for one program scan signifies detection of a new error The parameter can be specified as direct address located va
159. ate When clicked the ACS modifications are synchronized with your Unity Pro application after these modifications have been validated in ACS It also imports and updates all ACS symbols and variables into the Unity Pro variable manager NOTE All variables modified in ACS are deleted and rewritten in the Unity Pro Data Editor But they are not updated in the program Close This button closes the Property box without saving anything 33002479 07 2011 209 Transferring Data with the I O Scanner Property Box for BMX PRA 0100 This Property box allows you to choose the name for the PRA module to be configured The following illustration is the Property box for the PRA after Device Name validation Property Device Type Device Name PRA v PRAS Data Exchange Required Input words 0 Output words 0 OK Launch PRA Property Box for PRA Elements The elements of the PRA Property box are Element Description Device Type Selection of the PRA device is made from this drop down list After the first validation using the OK or Launch PRA button the Device Type cannot be changed Device Name The Device Name see page 211 is the name of PRA application Data Exchange This is not used when configuring a PRA device Required OK This button is only available after entering the Device Type and Device Name When clicked the Device Type and Device Name
160. ation If security is needed enable Password Authentication by entrering a check mark in the box Enter values for e Login e Any printable character allowed e 64 character maximum e Password e Any printable character allowed e 64 character maximum 3 mail headers Each header must contain 1 sender s ID in the From field 32 character maximum no spaces 2 list of recipients in the To field e Separate each email address with a comma e 128 character maximum 3 fixed part of message in the Subject field e 32 character maximum The Subject field consists of two parts 1 Fixed 32 character maximum 2 Dynamic 206 character maximum 296 33002479 07 2011 Embedded Web Pages Ethernet Module Diagnostic Pages Overview Global Data Page The NOE Diagnostics menu contains a list of links for accessing the different diagnostic pages for the Ethernet module e Global Data I O scanning see page 189 Messaging utility Bandwidth monitoring see page 84 Ethernet module statistics NTP utility e Email utility A link also allows the uploading of the private MIB source file Click a link to access the desired diagnostics page Information on the general diagnostics of Global Data can be found at the top of this page e Status e Number of publications per second e Number of subscriptions per second This page also shows a table of all published and subscribed variables in the sam
161. aulty Device Replacement A role name is a logical name that the user assigns to a device a logical name that has a meaning within the application Example role names might be e ENT_6 The sixth Momentum ENT in your application e OUTPUT_VALVE_2 The second output valve in your application NOTE Role names are case sensitive The logical role name should be written on devices The technician can get the new device from stores enter the corresponding role name into the device and place the device in the system The device automatically gets its configuration and starts running with no further input from the technician This process is designed to get your machine up and running quickly All the technician has to do for any FDR compliant device is to enter the role name into the new device 220 33002479 07 2011 Address Server Configuration Faulty Device Replacement Address Server Limits This table displays the parameters and limits of the address server Parameter Limit Maximum number of address server entries 128 Maximum size of the configuration file per device 4K bytes Total size of Faulty Device Replacement storage 512K bytes Maximum role name size 16 Characters NOTE For the DHCP server to work correctly the following must be observed e Address class and subnet class configured for the devices must match e Address class of the NOE and of the devices must be the same Operating on a Co
162. aultyOperation OperationSuccessful t ControlBlock DataField MBP_MSTR EnableMSTRFunction EN ENO ENABLE ACTIVE CancelActivMSTR Operation ABORT ERROR SUCCESS CONTROL DATABUF OperationActiv CN FaultyOperation are OperationSuccessful _ ControlBlock t DataField Parameter Data Type Description ENABLE BOOL When ON the operation specified in the first element of the CONTROL register is enabled ABORT BOOL When ON the currently active operation see page 137 is aborted 33002479 07 2011 135 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks Output Parameters Parameter Data Type Description ACTIVE BOOL ON when the operation is active ERROR BOOL ON when the operation is aborted without success SUCCESS BOOL ON when the operation concludes successfully CONTROL WORD This field contains the control block The first element CONTROL 1 contains the number of the operation code of the operation to be performed see page 137 The content of the sequence register is determined by the operation The data field must be declared as a located variable The structure of the control block differs according to the network used see page 138 DATABUF WORD For operations providing data e g a write operation the data field is the data source For op
163. available on Modbus Plus ports embedded port on CPU or NOM modules and the embedded Ethernet port on a CPU The MBP_MSTR block can send requests and receive responses up to 253 bytes long For the operation refer to Block Operation see page 134 e When the ENABLE input pin is turned ON operation 15 begins e Ifthe ABORT input pin is turned ON or if the ENABLE input pin is turned OFF the operation ends The ACTIVE output pin is ON during the operation The ERROR output pin turns ON if the operation aborts without success The SUCCESS output pin turns ON if the operation completes with success The CONTROL and DATABUF output pins define the operation refer to the Control Block see page 170 and Data Buffer see page 171 e EN and ENO can be configured as additional parameters The format of the Control block is described in the following table Word Description CONTROL 1 15 Send Modbus Request CONTROL 2 _ Indicates detected error status CONTROL 3 DATABUF length WORDs CONTROL 4 Offset for the beginning of the response in the DATABUF WORDs NOTE To avoid overwriting the request the Response Offset value multiplied by 2 must be greater than the Request Length CONTROL 10 CONTROL 5 Routing register High byte Ethernet communication module slot Low byte MBP on Ethernet transporter MET mapping index also known as Unit ID CONTROLJ 6 Byte 4 of the IP address MSB
164. below we use a CPS 114 x0 power supply a CPU 651 50 33002479 07 2011 353 Installation and Configuration Configuring the Rack with Unity Pro Introduction We begin this procedure by configuring the Modicon Quantum Ethernet module rack using Schneider Electric s Unity Pro configuration program Configuring the Rack Using a PC loaded with Unity Pro software proceed as follows Step Action 1 Click Start 2 Select Programs 3 Then select Schneider Electric Unity Pro gt Unity Pro XL XE Microsoft Excel md Readme Fal Java 2 Runtime Environment gt Registration Tool ft Macromedia Dreamweaver 4 P Fy Types Library Update ig Schneider Electric b ic Security Editor ex Communication Drivers gt Note The name of your Unity Pro package may be different It may be Unity Pro M Unity Pro L Unity Pro XL etc Select New in the File menu to create a New Project dialog box In the New Project dialog box expand the Quantum family to select the installed processor the 140 CPU 65150 in our example New Project Show all versions 40 CPU 311 10 40 CPU 434 12AU 140 CPU 534 14AU P166 CPU 512kb Prograrn PCMCIA Ethernet TCR 140 CPU 651 50 2 30 PU 1Mb Program PCMCIA i 40 CPU 652 60 P266 CPU 3072 Kb Program PCMCIA Ehemet P 40 CPU 671 60 02 30 P266 CPU Hot Standby 1Mb Program PDMCIA 354 33002479 07 2011 Installatio
165. ber of times the link to the server has been detected down Number of times the SMTP server could not be reached Link checked every 30 minutes Crash Log Diagnostics Page The Crash Diagnostics Page displays a crash log file when a crash has occurred and a status message when no crash has occurred Press Clear Crash Log File to clear the crash log file see page 330 33002479 07 2011 303 Embedded Web Pages NTP Diagnostics Page NTP Diagnostic Dialog Time synchronization service parameters are in the table Parameter Description NTP status Service is correctly configured OK NTP server status NTP client is connected to the NTP server and if the server is Primary or Standby NTP requests Total number of client requests sent to the NTP server NTP responses Total number of server responses sent from the NTP server Number of errors Total number of unanswered NTP requests Last error code Last error code received from the NTP client Date Date in d m y format Time Time Time zone Time zone plus or minus Universal Time Coordinated UTC DST Daylight saving time DST parameter is either 1 on enabled 2 off disabled The dialog NTP Diagnostics 05 Apr 2004 16 51 15 ON O GMT 05 00 Eastern Standard Time New York 304 33002479 07 2011 Embedded Web Pages Last Error Field Last Error field displays values which indicate the t
166. cally for example Ethernet_1 then Ethernet_2 and so on At any moment the user may rename any Netlink The user can also attach a comment that describes each configured network The OK button adds the network as subfolder The names of network nodes are also called NetLink These are the names of logical networks Station Configuration 3 Derived Data Types Derived FB Types Variables amp FB lt j Communication Om Progra EENES Animatii Add User Directory Operato Add Hyperlink Docume gt IT gt eta Zoom out Network Comment amp Station List of available Networks Configuration bd Derived Data Types Derived FB Types Ethernet 1 5 Variables amp FB lt 3 Communication we lt __ Ethernet_1 9 Program Animation Tables E Operator Screens Documentation OK Cancel Help Ok Cance Heip 33002479 07 2011 93 Start Communication with Unity Pro Configure Network Configure Network On the network folder by a double clicking action or by the Open item on contextual menu the editor of the corresponding communication screen is opened in order to set the specific network services The figure shows the contextual menu to start network properties 3 Station amp Configuration F Derived Data Types 9 Derived FB Types
167. ce can publish up to one network application variable and subscribe up to 64 network application variables The Quantum NOE module s embedded Global Data Configuration Page provides a configuration screen to determine which and how many application variables are exchanged with this service After configuration the exchanges between all stations belonging to the same distribution group are done automatically The Global Data service uses MW words 4x registers or unlocated variables for Global Data exchanges Key Features of Global Data The main features for Global Data are e One publisher and multiple subscribers e Adevice can publish one network variable of up to 512 MW words 4x registers or unlocated variables e A device can subscribe to several network variables of up to 2048 MW words 4x registers or unlocated variables A device subscribes to the complete network variable One distribution group per network IP address Application defined publication rate Up to 64 Global Data network variables numbered from 1 to 64 can be part of the data distribution group e The NOE module has only one multicast address consequently it can only publish and subscribe inside the group e A device can participate in several distribution groups by using multiple NOE communication modules in the rack Global Data s publish subscribe mechanism allows multiple subscribers to receive a single data transmission This is an advantage o
168. ch object to which SNMP has access must be defined and given a unique name Manager and agent programs must both agree on the names and meanings of the fetch and store operations The set of all objects SNMP can access is known as a Management Information Base MIB Schneider obtained a private MIB Groupe_Schneider 3833 Under the Groupe Schneider private MIB is a Transparent Factory Ethernet TFE private MIB The Transparent Factory SNMP embedded component controls the Schneider private MIB function 76 33002479 07 2011 Ethernet Communication Services Modbus Messaging Overview The following information describes the functionality of the Modbus TCP server The Client The node that initiates a data transaction is called a client All Modicon Quantum Ethernet modules provide the user with the capability to transfer data to and from nodes on a TCP IP network using a communication instruction All PLCs that support networking communication capabilities over Ethernet can use either the MBP_MSTR Ladder Logic instruction to read or write controller information or IEC communication blocks The Server The node that receives an inquiry is the server Using the standard Modbus TCP protocol all Modicon Quantum Ethernet modules provide access to controller data Any device PC HMI package another PLC or any Modbus TCP compliant device can access data from the PLC The Modbus TCP server also allows programming panels to log into
169. change the FTP password Doing this restricts access to the web server functionality to the system administrator Web server pages and their functionality are discussed in deatil in the chapter Embedded Web Pages Introduction to Accessing the Web Server Each Quantum NOE module contains an embedded Web server which allows you to access diagnostics and online configurations for the module and its associated controller PLC The web pages can only be viewed using Internet Explorer 4 0 or higher supporting JRE 1 4 2_04 or higher For information about the additional functionality provided by the FactoryCast system in the NOE modules see the FactoryCast Manual How to Access the Web Server Before you can access the module s home page you must enter the full IP address in the Address or Location box in the browser window For example http hostname hostname is the full IP address or DNS host name After you do this the Schneider Electric Web Utility home page displays Schneider Web Utility Home Page From the Quantum home page you can access pages for e changing the FTP password see page 62 e changing the HTTP password see page 65 e diagnostic and configuration information the embedded Web pages chapter provides additional information 33002479 07 2011 61 Product Description Modifying the FTP Server Password The following steps detail how to link to the correct web page for modifying the FTP password
170. chine Fiber optic connection X X X RJ 45 connection x X X Time Synchronization Service see page 82 lt X Xx Xx Electronic Mail Notification Service see page 83 X NOTE In the detailed description of the key features only modules in the NOE family are named The features are also available for the 140 NWM 100 00 module depending on the listed properties in the above table NOTE In Unity Pro software the 140 NWM 100 00 module is set in the TCP IP Regular Network family although it belongs to the TCP IP FactoryCast network family So the services listed above I O scanning Global Data address server Bandwidth monitoring are not supported by the module However they can be selected in the TCP IP regular network configuration in Unity Pro Even if they are configured those services won t work with the module 42 33002479 07 2011 Product Description Maximum Number of Networks per CPU The following table summarizes the maximum number of networks per CPU where networks means the sum of NOE MODBUS and any other communication modules Modicon Quantum CPU Type Supported Number of networks 140 CPU 311 10 140 CPU 434 12A 140 CPU 534 14A 140 CPU 651 50 140 CPU 651 60 140 CPU 671 60 140 CPU 672 61 D A D D DAD OIN Front Panel Components The front panel of the Ethernet modules contains identification markin
171. controller over Ethernet Modbus requests contain function codes representing several classes of service including data access online programming and program download and upload classes Modbus responses can be ACKs with and without data or NACKs with error information The Modbus Application Protocol can be transmitted over any communication system that supports messaging services However the current Quantum implementation transports Modbus Application Protocol PDUs over TCP IP The Quantum PLC accommodates both Ethernet II and IEEE 802 3 framing although Ethernet II framing is the default The Modicon Quantum Ethernet module supports up to 64 simultaneous Modbus TCP server connections To guarantee consistency of changes to the controller configuration the module allows only one programming panel to be logged in at a time 340 33002479 07 2011 Ethernet TCP IP Modbus Application Protocol The module supports these Modbus TCP commands Read Data Write Data Read Write Data Get Remote Statistics Clear Remote Statistics Modbus 125 Commands used by programming panels to download a new exec to the module For More Information For more information about Modbus communications consult the Modbus Protocol Reference Guide PI MBUS 300 For more information about communication blocks consult Chapter 4 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks see page 115 33002479 07 2011 341 Ethernet TCP IP Modbus
172. d Web Pages Time Zone Description DST Available GMT 05 00 SA Pacific Standard Time Bogota Lima Quito No GMT 05 00 Eastern Standard Time New York Yes GMT 05 00 Eastern Standard Time Indiana East Indianapolis No GMT 04 00 SA Western Standard Time Caracas La Paz No GMT 04 00 Pacific SA Standard Time Santiago Yes GMT 03 30 Newfoundland Standard Time Newfoundland St Johns Yes GMT 03 00 E South America Standard Time Brasilia Sao_Paulo Yes GMT 03 00 SA Eastern Standard Time Buenos Aires Georgetown No GMT 02 00 Mid Atlantic Standard Time South_Georgia No GMT 01 00 Azores Standard Time Azores Cape Verde Island Yes GMT Universal Coordinated Time Casablanca Monrovia No GMTO Greenwich Mean Time Dublin Edinburgh Lisbon London Yes GMT 01 00 Romance Standard Time Amsterdam CopenHagen Madrid Paris Vilnius Yes GMT 01 00 Central European Standard Time Belgrade Sarajevo Skopje Sofija Zagreb Yes GMT 01 00 Central Europe Standard Time Bratislava Budapest Ljubljana Prague Warsaw Yes GMT 01 00 W Europe Standard Time Brussels Berlin Bern Rome Stockholm Vienna Yes GMT 02 00 GTB Standard Time Athens Istanbul Minsk Yes GMT 02 00 E Europe Standard Time Bucharest Yes GMT 02 00 Egypt Standard Time Cairo Yes GMT 02 00 South Africa Standard Time
173. d usually contains information such as variable references variable counts and data offsets The size and content of the data field are dependent on the value of the function code 342 33002479 07 2011 Ethernet TCP IP Modbus Application Protocol Example Here are the values for a sample mbap_pdu for reading a register 00 01 00 00 00 06 01 03 00 00 00 01 The following table shows the structure and content for this example inv_id 00 01 proto_id 00 00 len 00 00 dst_idx 01 func_code 03 data 00 00 00 01 33002479 07 2011 343 Ethernet TCP IP Modbus Application Protocol Modbus Application Protocol Service Classes Introduction There are several classes of service that are part of the Modbus Application Protocol Each of these classes is described below Data Access Read write both discrete and analog data values from PLC register files Online Programming Services make relatively minor alterations to ladder logic programs with a highly controlled introduction of these changes into the executing program Image Download Upload Image download services support the downloading of a ladder logic control program to the PLC Image upload services support the uploading of a ladder logic control program from a PLC to PC host for archival oackup purposes Configuration Configuration services allow the user to define parameter values which affect the PIC s regis
174. ddress of a device A MAC address is assigned to an Ethernet TCP IP module in the factory Modbus Application Protocol A special master instruction that uses ladder logic to read and write controller information Management Information Base Database that holds the configuration of a SNMP enabled device Acommunication system that links Modicon controllers with intelligent terminals and computers over common carrier or dedicated lines N Negative acknowledgment indicating an error 376 33002479 07 2011 Glossary NDDS NetLink network node NTP OIT OID OSI model packet Peer Cop Network Data Delivery Services The logical name of a network Interconnected devices sharing a common data path and protocol for communication An addressable device on a communications network Network Time Protocol A protocol used to synchronize the time of a client or server to the time of another server or referenced source like a satellite receiver O Object Information True Object ID identify OIT Contain databases managing SNMP MIBs Open System Interconnection model A reference standard describing the required performance of devices for data communication Produced by the International Standards Organization P The unit of data sent across a network Software that allows you to configure data blocks to be transferred between controllers on a Modbus Plus network 33002479 07 2011 3
175. does reset the connection The NOE module does a Modbus logout if any connection has logged in During a switchover the NOE module resets all client connections using a TCP IP reset 320 33002479 07 2011 Hot Standby I O Scanning Service A WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION DEVICES GO TO THEIR FALL BACK STATES DURING SWITCHOVER Configure Ethernet output devices to their Hold Last Value fallback state whenever possible Output devices that support only a Set to Zero fallback state may produce a pulse during switchover Failure to follow these instructions can result in death serious injury or equipment damage I O scanning provides the repetitive exchange of data with remote TCP IP nodes I O devices While the PLC is running the primary CPU NOE sends Modbus read write read or write requests to remote I O devices and transfers data to and from the PLC memory In the secondary controller the I O scanning service is stopped When the Hot Standby switchover occurs the primary CPU NOE closes all connections with I O devices by sending a TCP IP reset The I O scanning service in this NOE is standby CPU After the switchover the new primary CPU NOE re establishes the connection with each I O devices It restarts the repetitive exchange of data with these re connections The module provide the I O scanning feature Configure this feature with the Unity Pro software Using either method the
176. e Note Be sure to contact your network administrator and request the IP Subnetwork mask and Gateway addresses prior to performing the next step 4 Enter the appropriate values in the IP address Subnetwork mask and Gateway address text fields 5 Click the validate check box in the upper tool bar to confirm the IP configuration settings Tool Build PLC Debug Window Validate check box ley 33002479 07 2011 359 Installation and Configuration Configuring the I O Scanning Service Introduction The Modicon 140 NOE 771 01 module supports Ethernet communication services such as I O scanning Global data Modbus messaging SNMP etc This example shows you how to configure the I O scanning service This service is used to e transfer data between network devices e allow a CPU to regularly read data from and write data to scanned devices Selecting the I O Scanning Parameters Perform the following steps to setup the I O scanning parameters Step Action 1 Open the Unity Pro program on your PC 2 In the Project browser locate the Communication gt Networks sub directory 3 Click the network name 140 NOE 771 01 in our example to open the module configuration table 4 Under Module Utilities select Yes in the I O Scanning box This will activate the I O Scanning tab In Module Utilities select Yes in the I O Scanning
177. e see page 76 Unity Pro Unity Pro Unity Pro diagnostic NA NA NA Schneider Private MIB see page 76 configure NA NA NA diagnostic NA NA NA Modbus Messaging see page 77 configure Unity Pro Unity Pro Unity Pro diagnostic Web Web Web Unity Pro Unity Pro Unity Pro I O Scanner see page 79 configure Unity Pro Unity Pro Unity Pro diagnostic Web Web Web Unity Pro Unity Pro Unity Pro Global Data Publish Subscribe configure Web Web Unity Pro see page 81 Unity Pro Unity Pro diagnostic Web Web Web Unity Pro Unity Pro Unity Pro Time Synchronization Service see page 82 configure NA Web NA diagnostic NA Web NA Electronic Mail Notification Service configure Web Web Web see page 83 diagnostic Web Web Web Bandwidth Monitoring see page 84 configure Unity Pro Unity Pro Unity Pro diagnostic Web Web Web Unity Pro Unity Pro Unity Pro FTP Server see page 85 configure NA NA NA diagnostic NA NA NA 72 33002479 07 2011 Ethernet Communication Services NOE 771 01 NOE 771 11 CPU 651 x0 Service HTTP Server see page 86 configure NA NA NA diagnostic NA NA NA Faulty Device Replacement Server configure Web Web Unity Pro see page 219 Unity Pro Unity Pro diagnostic NA NA NA Hot Standby configure NA NA NA diagnostic NA NA NA Flash File System see page 88 configure NA NA NA diagnostic NA NA NA FactoryCast Application see page 88 configure NA Web NA diagnostic NA Web NA
178. e distribution group Each variable is identified by its Identifier e Green for the subscribed variables Black for the published variables White for all unconfigured variables Red for variables with communication interruptions GLOBAL DATA DIAGNOSTIC Global Data Status NOK Number of subscriptions per sec 0 Number of publications per sec 0 Global Data Status 16 1 32 7 48 33 64 49 Not configured a Sub Variable H Pub Variable E Fault 33002479 07 2011 297 Embedded Web Pages I O Scanning Page General diagnostics for the I O scanning service are shown at the top of this page e the I O scanning status e the number of transactions per second e the number of connections A value of NOK in the I O Scanning Status field indicates that the local system is not scanning In this case any data that appears in the Scanned Device Status display is meaningless A value of OK in the I O Scanning Status field indicates that the values in the Scanned Device Status display are reporting the state of scanned devices In the Scanned Device Status display the colors that appear in each block indicate the following states for specific remote devices e Green indicates that a device is being scanned e Black indicates that I O scanning of the specific device has been intentionally disabled via the Device Control Block e White indicates an unconfigured device e Red indicates a suspect device VO SCANNING DIAGNOSTICS
179. e updates from the NTP server The default is 5 seconds 3 Storing the Time Service Configuration The last time service configuration is saved internally in the Ethernet module 4 Replacing the Ethernet Module If the Ethernet module has to be replaced the stored configuration is lost and the system returns to the default configuration Customizing Time Zone Parameters If you want a time zone not listed in the time zone table Step Action Comment 1 Write the text rules for the custom time zone 2 Using an FTP client store your rules in the file Root directory to store customrules is set by the FTP FLASHO wwwroot conf NTP customrules server as user ID ntpupdate FLASHO wwwroot conf NTP password ntpupdate 3 When the rules are written choose the drop down The NTP component looks for customrules calls the menu on the NTP Configuration web page and tz compiler and generates a new file called configure or reboot the module by selecting tz_custom This file is binary file and should not be Time Zone Custom edited If the tz compiler detects a syntax error in customrules the error is logged in the file FLASHO wwwroot conf NTP error log 1 NTP component is not launched 2 NTP Status field in diagnostic web page displays NOT OK 4 If you want more information the syntax to write those rules along with a few examples are found in the module in FLASHO wwwroot conf NTP instructions txt
180. e I O Scanning table Contextual Menu for Copy Cut Paste see page 199 NOTE Refer to information about the I O Scanning with Multiple Lines see page 201 198 33002479 07 2011 Transferring Data with the I O Scanner O Scanning Contextual Menu for Copy Cut Paste At a Glance Contextual Menu A right click on a line in the O Scanning table opens the I O Scanning Contextual Menu Use this menu to perform common operations on the lines of the I O Scanning table such as delete a device copy amp paste cut amp paste insert a new line etc The following illustration is the O Scanning contextual menu Delete Device Cut line s Copy line s Paste line s Insert copied line s Insert empty line Pack all lines The following table describes the menu functions Menu Item Description Delete Device Foran ACS or PRA configuration Delete Device permanently deletes the Device Name and all its data and associated ACS symbols For a PRM Master DTM its link to the I O Scanning table is deleted NOTE Deleting a PRM Master DTM link from the I O Scanning table does not delete the corresponding DTM from the connectivity tree in the DTM Browser Cut line s Cut line s copies and deletes the selected I O Scanning lines The lines are copied without the Device Name information For an ACS or PRA configuration it permanently deletes the Device Name and all its data and associated ACS symbols For
181. e MBP on Ethernet Transporter MET mapping index CONTROLJ 6 Destination drop number or set to FF hex CONTROL 7 Terminator set to FF hex 140 33002479 07 2011 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks Modbus Plus SY MAX and Ethernet TCP IP Error Codes Form of the Function Error Code Function error codes for Modbus Plus and SY MAX Ethernet transactions appear as Mmss where e Mis the high code e mis the low code e ss is a subcode Modbus Plus and SY MAX Ethernet Network Errors Hexadecimal error codes for Modbus Plus and SY MAX Ethernet Hex Error Code Description 1001 Abort by user 2001 An operation type that is not supported has been specified in the control block 2002 One or more control block parameters were modified while the MSTR element was active this only applies to operations which require several cycles for completion Control block parameters my only be modified in inactive MSTR components 2003 Invalid value in the length field of the control block 2004 Invalid value in the offset field of the control block 2005 Invalid value in the length and offset fields of the control block 2006 Unauthorized data field on slave 2007 Unauthorized network field on slave 2008 Unauthorized network routing path on slave 2009 Routing path equivalent to their own address 200A Attempt to get more global data words than available
182. e Station Duplicate address No Token Modbus Plus State Serial PLC Communications submenus Fields Available Options Available Description Mode 232 RS mode 485 Protocol ASCII Protocols available RTU Adr 1 247 Unit address for Modbus Switchover Primary CPU 1 119 Standby CPU 129 247 Rate 50 75 110 134 5 150 300 600 1200 1800 2400 3600 4800 7200 9600 19200 bits s Baud rate 36 33002479 07 2011 Product Description Fields Available Options Available Description Par NONE Parity ODD EVEN DB 7 8 Data bits if Protocol is Modbus then RTU 8 or ASCII 7 SB 1 2 Stop bits If the key switch is in the unlocked position fields are modifiable System Info Menu Structure of System Info menus and submenus Quantum System Info gt __ System Info _ Stop Code Stop Code gt System Info Rev Ldr Firmware Info gt os Ht HHH HH System Info Hardware Info gt HW Rev 0000 __ System Info Copro Rev Copro Info gt IE System Info PLC Communications submenus System Info Fields Available Option Description Screen Displays Available Stop Code ttt Machine stop code Description Description of the machine stop code Firmware Info Rev Ldr OS
183. e eee 190 Configuring the Quantum I O Scanner 0 000 eee eee 194 I O Scanning Contextual Menu for Copy Cut Paste 199 I O Scanning with Multiple Lines 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 cece eee eee 201 Introduction to Configuring Advantys from Unity Pro 203 Introduction to Configuring the PRM Master DTM 206 Property Box 245 iain T baht cep So ee a athe eal a ede pate ae eee 208 Saving an Advantys Configuration in an Unity Pro Application 213 Managed VariableS 0 0 ce eee teens 214 I O Scanner Response Times Remote Input to Remote Output 216 Chapter 7 Address Server Configuration Faulty Device R placem nt seraa ke aces alee eed a hee eal ceva 219 Address Server Configuration Faulty Device Replacement 220 Understanding Faulty Device Replacement 5 222 Configuring Faulty Device Replacement 0 0 0c eee ee 224 33002479 07 2011 7 Chapter 8 Chapter 9 Chapter 10 Chapter 11 Chapter 12 Network Management Service SNMP 227 SNMP ainan che ass Gongs ho oe eee eel Seat pews it ede 258 ele Mice ata eS 228 ASN 1 Naming Scheme 0 000 tte eee 231 Configuring an NOE with SNMP 00 000 e ee eee eee 233 Configuring an NOE with TFE Private MIB 2 0000 235 NTP Time Synchronization Service 245 Introducing the NTP Time Synchronization Service
184. e minimum number of words necessary for communication between the Unity Pro module and the Advantys island These values cannot be changed via the Property box NOTE Increasing the RD WR lengths via the I O Scanning tab leaves enough data exchange words for the future expansion of your Advantys island Expanding an island that does not use the last line in the I O Scanning table requires changing the values for all the lines below the line that needs the additional exchange words Use Device Name as prefix If this checkbox is unchecked the user is in charge of giving unique names to the variables and symbols in all Advantys islands This checkbox is only available for ASC V5 5 or higher For versions less than 5 5 the Device Name is automatically added to all variables and symbols in all Advantys islands OK This button is only available after entering the Device Type and Device Name When clicked the Device Type and Device Name are checked to see if they are valid If there is a problem a message box opens explaining the why they were not valid OK is only available during the first use of the Property box for a new island Launch Advantys Configuration Software This button is only available if both e The Device Type and Device Name have been entered e ACS is installed This button does two things e t carries out the action of the OK button e lf there is no problem during validation it launches ACS Upd
185. e the EXECLoader to load the latest version of the EXEC After loading the new Exec and before loading the Kernel make sure to cycle power to the NOE module Load the Kernel using the EXECLoader After the transfer displays as Successful the NOE module needs approximately 1 minute to burn the new Kernel into its Flash memory The NOE module goes go through a reboot sequence Kernel Version A CAUTION UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION Failure to perform the preceding update procedure will render the NOE module inoperable Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage The NOE Kernel can not be downloaded via FTP Please check the current NOE Kernel version on the NOE Properties see page 306 Web page Follow these links Diagnostics NOE Properties 334 33002479 07 2011 Specifications Specifications 140 NOE 771 Specification Table The main specifications for the Quantum 140 NOE 771 xx Ethernet module are described in the following table Communication Ports One auto sensing 10 100 BASE T shielded twisted pair RU 45 connector port and one 100 BASE FX MT RJ connector port Both ports transmit and receive Modbus commands encapsulated in TCP IP protocol Bus Current Required 750 mA Power Dissipation 3 8 W Fuse None Programming Software Type and version Concept Ver 2 2 or higher Unity Pro
186. eaders 33002479 07 2011 271 Embedded Web Pages Accessing the Web Utility Home Page Introduction Each Modicon Quantum 10 100 Megabit Ethernet module contains an embedded Web server that allows you to access diagnostics and online configurations for the module and its associated controller PLC Pages on the embedded Web site display the following information e Configurable menus of the Address Server both BOOTP and DHCP and for SNMP see page 284 Ethernet statistics for the node see page 267 Controller s configuration Controller Status on menu see page 274 Controller s register values Remote I O status and configuration see page 276 Remote I O register values Remote I O distributed values The FactoryCast Real Time modules see page 88 offer these additional pages Configuration and status for Global Data publish subscribe see page 281 Bandwidth monitoring see page 84 I O Scanner status see page 298 MODBUS Messaging status see page 77 NTP configuration and status see page 301 SMTP configuration and status see page 302 The web pages can be viewed using Internet Explorer 4 0 or higher Either browser supports JRE 1 4 2 _04 or higher For information about the additional functionality provided by the FactoryCast system in the Ethernet modules see the FactoryCast Manual 31001229 Accessing the Module s Home Page Do the following Step Action 1 Obtain the full
187. ealthy N A Standalone Any of the following events affect the NOE operating mode e the NOE is powered up an NOE executes a Hot Standby Switchover e e an NOE goes to Offline mode e a new application is downloaded to the NOE IP Address Assignment at Power Up An NOE obtains its IP address assignment at power up as follows If the Hot Standby state is Then the IP address assigned is unassigned IP address configured in Unity Pro Primary CPU IP address configured in Unity Pro Standby CPU IP address configured in Unity Pro 1 unassigned to offline See Offline Mode at Power up Sequence in the next table transition 316 33002479 07 2011 Hot Standby If two NOEs power up simultaneously a resolution algorithm e determines the Primary NOE e assigns the IP address configured in Unity Pro to that Primary NOE e assigns the IP address configured in Unity Pro 1 to the Standby NOE Offline Mode at Power up Sequence Result controller B Controller A powers up before e P address of controller A is the IP address configured in Unity Pro e P address of controller B is the IP address configured in Unity Pro 1 Both controller A and controller B power up at the same time The resolution algorithm assigns the configured IP address to controller A and it assigns the configured IP address 1 to controller B The NOE performs a duplicate IP t
188. ecting the Device Type Property x Device Type Device Name STB OTB DTM PRA Data Exchange Required Input words Output words A AS For details on how top use the Property box refer to e Advantys see page 208 e DTM see page 211 e BMX PRA 0100 see page 210 Property Box for Advantys This Property box allows you to choose the name and type of Advantys island to be configured using the Advantys Configuration Software ACS The following illustration is the Property box for Advantys after Device Type and Device Name entered Property Device Type Device Name STB w msme Data Exchange Required Use Device Name as prefix Input words Output words Launch Advantys OK Configuration Close Software 208 33002479 07 2011 Transferring Data with the I O Scanner Property Box for Advantys Elements The elements of the Advantys Property box are Element Description Device Type Selection of a STB or OTB device is made from this drop down list After the first validation using the OK or Launch Advantys button the Device Type cannot be changed Device Name The Device Name see page 211 is used as a prefix to all variables created for an Advantys island in ACS This allows unique variables for duplicated islands After validation using the OK or Launch Advantys button the Device Name cannot be changed Data Exchange Required These are th
189. ection describes several IEC function blocks that manage data transfer to and from nodes on a TCP IP network What s in this Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page CREAD_REG 119 CWRITE_REG 122 READ_REG 125 WRITE_REG 128 TCP_IP_ADDR 131 118 33002479 07 2011 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks CREAD_REG Function Description The CREAD_REG block reads register data continuously from an addressed node via TCP IP Ethernet EN and ENO can be projected as additional parameters NOTE About this function block e When programming this function you must be familiar with the routing procedures used by your network e For technical reasons this function block does not allow the use of ST and IL programming languages Representation Block representation CREAD REG DINT SLAVEREG INT NO REG REG READ WORD WordArr5 AddrFld STATUS WORD Parameter Description Description of parameters Parameter Data Type Meaning SLAVEREG DINT offset address of the first MW word 4x register in the slave to be read from NO_REG INT number of registers to be read from slave AddrFld WordArr5 data structure describing the TCI IP address REG_READ WORD first MW word 4x register for read values STATUS WORD error code Elementary Description for WordArr5 with TCP IP Ethernet Elementary description fo
190. el Family Module Address __ p Module Utilities TCP IP 10 100 Extended Connection Rack Module YES VO Scanning YES Global Data Vv r Module IP Address IVES SNMP IP Address be Subnetwork Mask Gateway Address _ YES Address Server 0 0 o oo OoOO Parameter description Parameter Description Model Family Modicon Quantum with Unity Ethernet module settings Module Address Not used Module Utilities For module service configuration options see above Module IP Address Overview of the IP address parameter set 33002479 07 2011 109 Start Communication with Unity Pro After selecting the model family TCP IP 10 100 Extended Connection the following mask appears The image also displays the activated module services ETHERNET_1 Module Utilities Model Family Module Address _ TCP IP 10 100 Extended Connection e r Module IP Address IP Address Subnetwork Mask Gateway Address OO OG T ero OES OM 0 Vv YES YES YES v v v YES VO Scanning Global Data SNMP Address Server IP Configuration Messaging VO Scanning Global Data SNMP Address Server Bandwidth Configured IP address Subnetwork mask Gateway address From a server IP Addres
191. ement Protocol SNMP which is configured on your NOE or 140 CPU 651 x0 Network management software allows a network manager to e monitor and control network components e isolate problems and identify their causes e query the status of devices such as a host computer routers switches and bridges e obtain statistics about the networks to which devices are connected Manager Agent Paradigm Network management software follows the conventional client server model To avoid confusion with other network communication protocols that use the client server terminology network management software uses the following terms e Manager the client application that runs on the manager s computer e Agent the application that runs on a network device The manager uses conventional transport protocols for example TCP or UDP to establish communication with the agent Managers and agents then exchange requests and responses according to the network management protocol Simple Network Management Protocol The MIB Private MIB Your NOE module is configured with the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP which is the standard protocol used to manage a local area network LAN SNMP defines exactly how a manager communicates with an agent The SNMP defines the format of the requests that a manager sends to an agent and the format of the replies that the agent returns to the manager Each SNMP object has to be defined and given a unique na
192. endian format where the least significant byte is stored in the smallest memory address 33002479 07 2011 171 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks Modbus Request Modbus Response The Modbus Request PDU format is Byte offset Field Data type Description 1 Function code BYTE Modbus function code 2 Request data BYTE area This field is function code dependent and contains information such as variable references variable counts data offsets sub function codes and so on The Modbus Response PDU format is Byte offset Field Data type Description 1 Function code BYTE Modbus function code 2 Response data BYTE area This field is function code dependent and contains information such as variable references variable counts data offsets sub function codes and so on Modbus Exception Response The Modbus Exception Response PDU format is Byte offset Field Data type Description 1 Function code BYTE Modbus function code 80 hex 2 Exception code BYTE This field is defined in the MODBUS Application Protocol Specification Modbus Specification The standard Modbus function codes are defined in the MODBUS Application Protocol Specification V1 1b which can be downloaded from www modbus ida org Example of a Send Modbus Request To read 4 contiguous Input registers Modbus Function code 4 starting at register 100 64 hex
193. er Responds If the server responds with address parameters the NOE 771 xx module will use those parameters as long as power remains applied to the module If the server does not respond the module will retry its request for two minutes BOOTP Server Does Not Respond If no BOOTP response is received the NOE 771 xx module will use the default IP Address During this time the Run indicator displays a pattern of five flashes for a BOOTP attempt and six flashes for using the default IP NOE 771 xx Duplicate IP Address Test In all cases when the NOE 771 xx module receives an IP address it will test for duplicate addresses by sending broadcast ARP requests three times at 5 second intervals If a Duplicate IP Address is found on the network the NOE 771 xx will stay off line to avoid a network disruption It will display a pattern of four flashes to indicate a Duplicate IP Address detection Automatic ARP If there are no replies to its requests the NOE 771 xx automatically sends three ARP requests at 2 second intervals to announce its presence on the network 60 33002479 07 2011 Product Description Establishing the FTP Password Establishing the FTP Password The FTP password is established using the Embedded Web Server This topic contains information on how to access the web server for purposes of changing the FTP and HTTP passwords The first thing the system administrator should do upon accessing the web server is
194. erational again and rejoins the Hot Standby system it takes the IP address of the Standby PLC 314 33002479 07 2011 Hot Standby The new Primary NOE must have the same IP address as the former Primary NOE The IP address in the Secondary NOE is IP address 1 The NOEs integrated into the Quantum Hot Standby configuration coordinate this swapping of IP addresses with the management of Ethernet services used NOE IP Address Swap Time The following table details the 140 NOE 771 1module address swap time Typical Swap Time Maximum Swap Time 6 ms 500 ms 33002479 07 2011 315 Hot Standby NOE Operating Modes in Quantum Hot Standby System The NOE Modes The 140 NOE 771 module e Primary NOE Mode modes are The Hot Standby mode is Primary CPU and all client server services are active e Standby NOE Mode The Hot Standby mode is Standby CPU and all server services are active except DHCP e Standalone Mode The NOE is in a non redundant system or the CPU is not present or not healthy e Offline Mode The CPU is stopped The Modicon Quantum Hot Standby and the NOE operating modes are synchronized by these conditions CPU Module Status Hot Standby State NOE Operating Mode Present and Healthy Primary CPU Primary Present and Healthy Standby CPU Standby Present and Healthy Offline Offline Present and Healthy Unassigned Standalone Not present or unh
195. erations Press lt ENTER gt to Init PLC gt confirm Init gt PLC Operations Hot Standby Hot Standby gt State State Hot Standby Mode Mode Hot Standby Order A or B Hot Standby Press lt ENTER gt to Transfer gt confirm Transfer gt Hot Standby Hot Standby Diag gt diag halt Hot Standby diag rio fails Hot Standby diag hsby fails Hot Standby diag stop Hot Standby diag off keypad Hot Standby diag off sw60 Hot Standby diag off appli Hot Standby diag off vers Hot Standby diag off rio Hot Standby diag Take over Hot Standby diag Run Hot Standby diag Plug amp Run Hot Standby diag Power up 32 33002479 07 2011 Product Description Submenu for PLC Operations Start Stop and Init Start Stop Init Fields Available Description Screens Display Start PLC Press lt ENTER gt to confirm Start Pressing lt ENTER gt starts the controller Stop PLC Press lt ENTER gt to confirm Stop Pressing lt ENTER gt stops the controller Init PLC Press lt ENTER gt to confirm Init Pressing lt ENTER3 initializes the controller On safety processors this command is only available in the maintenance mode Submenu for PLC Operations Hot Standby CPU Screen Field Option Description Hot Standby State PRIMARY CPU Controller serves as Primary unit State read only STANDBY CPU Controller
196. erations are always performed at the word level WR Slave The address of the first word written into The format of this value Ref the slave remote device depends on the Slave Syntax e Index 100 e Modbus 400101 e IEC 0 MW100 e IEC 1 MW101 WR length Number of words to be written 1 Using these examples Master Object 140 NOE 771 01 writes data from address MW20 to slave address 192 168 1 100 starting at index 100 It puts the data into the NOE address starting at MW5 using a write size of 1 word Description Additional information Master refers to the client PLC that makes the request Slave refers to the server from which data is read or to which data is written NOTE Refer to information about the I O Scanning table Contextual Menu for Copy Cut Paste see page 199 NOTE Refer to information about the I O Scanning with Multiple Lines see page 201 364 33002479 07 2011 Installation and Configuration Building and Downloading the Configuration Program Building the Program Next you need to build the whole program before downloading it to the PLC To do this select Build Rebuild All Project in the toolbar at the bottom of the screen shown below If it is successful a Process succeeded message will appear at the program s completion Analyzing Generating Linking Process succeeded 0 Error s 0 Warning s Rebuild All Project Import export
197. erations receiving data e g the read operation the data field is the data destination With Ethernet CTE read and write operations the data field holds the contents of the Ethernet configuration extension table DATABUF must be defined as an array of at least 10 elements in this case The data field must be declared as a located variable Runtime Error In the event of an error occurring during an MBP_MSTR operation a hexadecimal error code is displayed in the CONTROL 2 register of the control block for one cycle Function error codes are network specific Modbus Plus and SY MAX Ethernet error codes see page 141 SY MAX specific error codes see page 146 TCP IP Ethernet error codes see page 160 CTE Error Codes for SY MAX and TCP IP Ethernet see page 145 Send e mail error codes see page 264 NOTE For a list of all block error codes and values refer to the tables of error codes for the communication library 136 33002479 07 2011 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks Operational Function Codes Valid MBP_MSTR Function Codes Using the MBP_MSTR block one of 13 available network communication operations can be triggered via the network Each operation has a function code assigned to it The availability of specific operations depends on both the type of network and the type of module you are using Function Operation Modb
198. ers Distribution period Health Time Out Health Bits location Start address Type Pub Sub None Please do not change Symbol description and Length To change the Global Data variables of the group box on the Global Data Configuration page follow the instructions below Step Action 1 Adjust the Distribution Period cycle Enter a value from 1 through 50 Note Distribution Period is the minimum number of controller scan times before an update occurs Before entering a value in the Group Address field identify the station s distribution group The Group Address entry will be an IP address from 224 0 0 0 through 239 255 255 255 the Class D Multicast IP address used for a distribution group All members of this distribution group are configured to use the same group address and therefore all members can communicate with each other using Global Data t Set the timeout in the Health Time Out field This value is measured in milliseconds and can be set to a value that ranges from 50 through 15000 ms in 50 ms increments Note Health Time Out is the maximum time between received subscriptions before a subscription is declared unhealthy inoperable In the 4x starting address set the Data Zone field If you are connected to an Ethernet switch that supports multicast filtering click the Multicast filtering check box Enter MW word 4x register location for the Health Bits This is the l
199. es any empty lines between the top of the I O Scanning table and the last non empty of the table 200 33002479 07 2011 Transferring Data with the I O Scanner O Scanning with Multiple Lines At a Glance Modbus exchanges are limited to a maximum of 125 input words and 100 output words If an application needs to exchange more than these limits for a device more than one I O Scanning line can be used multiple lines for one device When the length is higher than the authorized limit for one Modbus exchange the length is divided into 2 or more Modbus exchanges New lines are created for each Modbus exchanges with the PLC The following I O Scanning table is used for the multiple device lines example Scanned peripherals Health Repetitive RD 7 RD Ref RD Last value WR Ref anti IP Addi Di N Unit ID Time out rate Master Mentor Descripti MESE i a ms ms Object ae Ce ope Object dos lena 500 60 IMNO 3s WO lt 1268 13 MEJ index x Hold last x Mvo 0 50 2 o 26st 255 Index yj 1500 0 Hold last xj amw o no BJF zj 0 RS yjamwaos o 100 3 xi ai 25 26 x Mw2154 100 10 ls fin r z YO 250 50 x sews no 0 5 Ja wares MyOTet BEJ Index xj 1500 60 Mwao 2000 200 Hold last amwes 200 wo JF xi MIW400 2000 2 x smw2ies 2100 5 fi X sman 2o 125 y amwzs 205 35 F 7 ba xi MVS 207 63 _x staw2264 2200 0 e zi j NOTE This example shows an Advantys island but DTM and PRA devices work the
200. escribed in this manual also appear online To access this information online Step Action 1 Go to the Schneider Electric home page www schneider electric com 2 In the Search box type the model number of a product or the name of a product range e Do not include blank spaces in the model number product range e To get information on a grouping similar modules use asterisks If you entered a model number go to the Product datasheets search results and click on the model number that interests you If you entered the name of a product range go to the Product Ranges search results and click on the product range that interests you 33002479 07 2011 Step Action model number that interests you 4 If more than one model number appears in the Products search results click on the sheet 5 Depending on the size of your screen you may need to scroll down to see the data 6 To save or print a data sheet as a pdf file click Download XXX product datasheet The characteristics presented in this manual should be the same as those that appear online In line with our policy of constant improvement we may revise content over time to improve clarity and accuracy In the event that you see a difference between the manual and online information use the online information as your reference Related Documents User Comments NOTE Some of these documents may be
201. est by issuing an ARP request to the IP address configured in Unity Pro If a response is received within 3 seconds the IP address remains at the default IP and the NOE blinks a diagnostic code If no IP configuration exists the NOE remains in the Standalone mode and the IP address must be obtained from either a BOOTP server or the MAC address Ethernet Services at Power Up The following table shows how the status of an NOE service is affected by the Quantum Hot Standby state Hot Standby State Status of NOE Services Client Services Client Server Server Services Services 1 0 Scanner Global Modbus FTP SNMP HTTP Data Messaging Unassigned Run Run Run Run Run Run Primary CPU Run Run Run Run Run Run Standby CPU Stop Stop Run Run Run Run Offline Stop Stop Run Run Run Run Hot Standby Switchover The following table describes how the NOEs coordinate a Hot Standby Switchover Step Action 1 In a Hot Standby configuration NOE A is running in the Primary PLC and NOE B is in the Standby PLC 2 NOE A detects that its PLC has changed from Primary CPU to the Offline mode 33002479 07 2011 317 Hot Standby Going to Offline Step Action NOE A changes from Primary NOE to Offline with the same Ethernet services running and starts its watchdog timer with a 500 ms time out setting It waits for a UDP request to swap IP addresses fr
202. ew NTP time service configuration Previous configuration is no longer valid Cancel Cancels new NTP time service configuration Previous configuration is valid Disable NTP IP of Primary and Standby set 0 NTP server not polled Time in controller not updated 33002479 07 2011 287 Embedded Web Pages Configurable Time Service Parameters Configure or change the following parameters on the NTP Configuration page 1 IP address of primary NTP server e Enter a valid IP address 2 IP address of secondary NTP server e Enter a valid IP address 3 Polling Period in seconds Enter a value e min 1sec e max 120sec e default 5 sec 4 Time Zone e Select from drop down menu Universal Time Coordinated GMT default e Custom time zone 5 Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving change e Parameter is selected by default check mark appears if daylight saving time is chosen Changing Time Service Parameters To make any changes to the time synchronization service Step Action 1 Enter changes in the appropriate field on the NTP Configuration page for one or all of the configurable parameters 2 Click Save Important Information about the Time Service NOTE About the time service 1 Enable Disable Daylight Savings Time parameter If the Enable Disable check box is selected the module automatically corrects the local time to account for daylight savings time Therefore
203. f switches you can implement over that distance is unlimited 33002479 07 2011 53 Product Description Security Overview The following information describes firewalls A firewall is a gateway that controls access to your network To restrict access to your Ethernet controller and I O network you may want to consider a firewall Types of Firewalls There are network level and application level firewalls e Network level firewalls These firewalls are frequently installed between the Internet and a single point of entry to an internal protected network e Application level firewalls An application level firewall acts on behalf of an application It intercepts all traffic destined for that application and decides whether to forward that traffic to the application Application level firewalls reside on individual host computers Port Numbers Used by NOE The following table contains the port numbers used by NOE Protocol Port Number Modbus TCP TCP 502 HTTP TCP 80 SNMP UDP 61 FTP TCP 21 You may need to provide the information in this table to your system administrator so that the firewall configuration will allow access to your PLC from outside of your facility 54 33002479 07 2011 Product Description Mounting the Module in the Quantum PLC Backplane Before you Begin Locate the backplane in which you will mount the module Ensure that an open slot is available NOTE The module ca
204. fic Standard Time Magadan Solomon Is New Caledonia Yes GMT 12 00 New Zealand Standard Time Auckland Wellington Yes GMT 12 00 Fiji Standard Time Fiji Kamchatka Marshall Is No 256 33002479 07 2011 Electronic Mail Notification Service 1 0 Introduction This chapter describes the electronic mail notification service which uses SMTP to allow the controller s project to send e mail messages What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Introducing the Electronic Mail Notification Service 258 Mail Service 260 Using the MBP_MSTR Block for Mail Service Communication 262 Mail Service Error Codes 264 Electronic Mail Notification Service Subtree 265 33002479 07 2011 257 Using the Mail Service Introducing the Electronic Mail Notification Service General The electronic mail notification service allows controller based projects to report alarms or events The automation controller monitors the system and can automatically create an electronic mail message alert with data alarms and or events Mail recipients can be either local or remote e Based on predefined events or conditions messages are created using the MSTR function block e The email message is constructed from predefined headers plus variables and text a maximum of 238 bytes This message is sent directly from the automation system to the local email server e Mail headers cont
205. figuration 0 0 0 c cece eee ee 295 Ethernet Module Diagnostic Pages 0 2 02 c ee eee eee 297 NTP Diagnostics Page sioner snee iie ea e i tee 304 NOE Properties Page 0 cece aaea 306 Contacting Schneider Electric Page 0 0 0 cece eee ee 307 Hot Standby 66s2ss2e scestevtcewhees vetaesus 309 Quantum Hot Standby for Unity Pro 6 2 0 eee 310 Hot Standby Topology 0 0 0 cece cette eee 312 NOE Module Configuration and Hot Standby 0 313 NOE IP Address Assignment 00 0 0 cece eee eee 314 NOE Operating Modes in Quantum Hot Standby System 316 NOE IP Address Swap Times 00 000 c eee eee 319 Network Effects of Modicon Quantum Hot Standby with Unity Solution 320 33002479 07 2011 Appendices Appendix A Appendix B Appendix C Appendix D Glossary Index Maintenance 0000 c cece ee eee eee Responding to Errors 0 eet tte Reading and Clearing the Crash Log 20 eee eeeeaee Downloading a New NOE Exec 0 0c cece eee eee Downloading a New NOE Exec viaFTP 20 000e0 eee Downloading a New NOE Kernel 0 000 e eee eee eee SPeCciNICaliOnS w2is2teec ss see same Vou eeat ee Specifications 6 ee c csa4 ewe ee ON eee eR ee PS Quantum Ethernet TCP IP Modbus Application Protocol Modbus Application Protocol Overview 20000ee eee Modbus Application Protocol PDU
206. fore a subscription is declared unhealthy faulty The value is measured in milliseconds and can be set from 50 to 15000 ms in 50 ms increments Data Zone The starting address for the data This are the registers where the data information are stored 33002479 07 2011 181 Global Data Publish Subscribe Multicast Filtering Overview Your NOE may offer the multicast filtering functionality The global data service synchronizes several stations located in a distribution group A distribution group is a set of stations identified by using the same IP multicast address for all stations in the group By using the same IP address for multiple devices multicast exchanges can be used to distribute global data Several independent distribution groups can coexist on the same sub network Each distribution group possesses its own unique IP multicast address Early versions of switches treat multicast packets as a broadcast thereby broadcasting to all nodes and suppressing all benefits of both switching and multicasting Newer versions of switches provide automatic multicast filtering and consequently only forward multicast traffic to ports that are connected to registered end stations Multicast Filtering Protocols Reducing Traffic The following multicast filtering protocols are supported by Ethernet modules for its global data service e GARP Multicast Registration Protocol GMRP GMRP provides a mechanism t
207. g 1 ipDefaultTTL 2 ipinReceives 3 This object name is represented in an SNMP message by assigning each part an integer So the above message would appear as 1 3 6 1 2 2 4 3 33002479 07 2011 231 SNMP Each integer has the following meaning 1 ISO International Organization for Standardization 3 identified organization one of branches under the ISO root 6 U S Department of Defense DoD one of the children under branch1 3 1 the Internet subtree under 1 3 6 2 the mgm branch one of seven of the Internet subtree It is managed by the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority and includes the standard MIBs 2 mib 2 1 group of managed objects 4 ip the mib 2 1 IP group one of 11 e 3 ipinReceives the MIB object 232 33002479 07 2011 SNMP Configuring an NOE with SNMP Object Identifier OID In the ASN 1 Naming Scheme example see page 231 the MIB object identified by the notation 1 3 6 1 2 2 4 3 is referred to as the Object Identifier or OID All OIDs can be seen as part of a tree structure that begins at the root ISO and branches out with each subtree identified by an integer SNMP Protocol Data Units GetRequest PDU SetRequest PDU SNMP uses protocol data units PDUs to carry the requests and responses between the manager and the agents for the information contained in an OID As the following figure shows the SNMP message is the innermost part of a typical networ
208. g a 140 NOE 771 1 Module Since the Primary and Standby PLCs in Quantum Hot Standby system must have an identical configurations the configured NOE IP addresses are the same The current local Hot Standby mode determines the IP address This table shows how the NOE IP addresses are assigned Hot Standby State IP Address Primary CPU IP address configured in Unity Pro Standby CPU IP address configured in Unity Pro 1 Transition from Primary to Offline IP address configured in Unity Pro if peer controller does not go to Primary Transition from Standby to Offline IP address configured in Unity Pro 1 IP Address Restrictions Do not use either the broadcast IP address or broadcast IP address 2 to configure a NOE module Do not configure the Primary CPU address as nnn nnn nnn 254 This causes the Standby CPU IP address to be nnn nnn nnn 255 The Standby CPU would then return the diagnostic code Bad IP configuration IP Address Transparency A WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION For a Quantum Hot Standby configuration e Do not use the IP address configured in Unity Pro 1 e Do not use consecutive IP addresses of the IP address configured in Unity Pro Failure to follow these instructions can result in death serious injury or equipment damage When a Switchover occurs the new Primary PLC takes the IP address of the old Primary PLC When the PLC that has stopped becomes op
209. generates a new file called tz_custom This file is binary file and should not be 4 If you want more information the syntax to write those rules along with a few examples are found in the module in FLASHO wwwroot conf NTP instructions txt Time Zone Parameters Select a time zone from the drop down menu Time Zone Description DST Available Custom Yes GMT 12 00 Dateline Standard Time Eniwetok Kwajalein No GMT 11 00 Samoa Standard Time Midway Is Samoa No GMT 10 00 Hawaiian Standard Time Hawaii Honolulu No GMT 09 00 Alaskan Standard Time Anchorage Yes GMT 08 00 Pacific Standard Time Los Angeles Tijuana Yes GMT 07 00 Mexican Standard Time Chihuahua La Paz Mazatlan Yes GMT 07 00 Mountain Standard Time Arizona Phoenix No GMT 07 00 Mountain Standard Time Denver Yes GMT 06 00 Central Standard Time Chicago Yes GMT 06 00 Mexico Standard Time Tegucigalpa No GMT 06 00 Canada Central Standard Time Saskatchewan Regina No GMT 06 00 Central America Standard Time Mexico_city Yes 33002479 07 2011 289 Embedded Web Pages Time Zone Description DST Available GMT 05 00 SA Pacific Standard Time Bogota Lima Quito No GMT 05 00 Eastern Standard Time New York Yes GMT 05 00
210. gs color codes and LED displays A writable area for an IP address a global address label and two Ethernet cable connectors is located behind the removable front panel door The following table provides a description of the front panel components that are shown in following figure Component Description LED Indicator Panel Indicates the operating status of the module and the fiber optic see page 44 or Ethernet communications network to which it is connected IP Address Area Provides a writable area to record the module s assigned IP address Global Address Label Indicates the module s global Ethernet MAC address assigned at the factory 100 BASE FX Connector Provides an MT RJ socket for connection to a 100 megabit fiber optic Ethernet cable 10 100 BASE T Connector Provides an RJ 45 socket for connection to a shielded twisted pair Ethernet cable 33002479 07 2011 43 Product Description Indicators for Ethernet Modules Illustration The following figure shows the NOE 771 00 LED indicators as a placeholder for all other Ethernet modules Active Ready Fault Run Coll Link Tx Act RxA Act 10MB 100MB Fduplex Kernel Appl Description The following table shows the LED descriptions LED Color Description Active Green Indicates the backplane is configured Ready Green Indicates module is healthy Fault
211. h Lisbon London Yes GMT 01 00 Romance Standard Time Amsterdam CopenHagen Madrid Paris Vilnius Yes GMT 01 00 Central European Standard Time Belgrade Sarajevo Skopje Sofija Zagreb Yes GMT 01 00 Central Europe Standard Time Bratislava Budapest Ljubljana Prague Warsaw Yes GMT 01 00 W Europe Standard Time Brussels Berlin Bern Rome Stockholm Vienna Yes GMT 02 00 GTB Standard Time Athens Istanbul Minsk Yes GMT 02 00 E Europe Standard Time Bucharest Yes GMT 02 00 Egypt Standard Time Cairo Yes GMT 02 00 South Africa Standard Time Johannesburg Harare Pretoria No GMT 02 00 FLE Standard Time Helsinki Riga Tallinn Yes GMT 02 00 Israel Standard Time Israel Jerusalem Yes GMT 03 00 Arabic Standard Time Baghdad Yes GMT 03 00 Arab Standard Time Kuwait Riyadh No GMT 03 00 Russian Standard Time Moscow St Petersburg Volgograd Yes GMT 03 00 E Africa Standard Time Nairobi No GMT 03 30 Iran Standard Time Tehran Yes GMT 04 00 Arabian Standard Time Abu Dhabi Muscat No GMT 04 00 Caucasus Standard Time Baku Tbilisi Yes GMT 04 00 Afghanistan Standard Time Kabul No GMT 05 00 Ekaterinburg Standard Time Ekaterinburg Yes GMT 05 00 West Asia Standard Time Islamabad Karachi Tashkent No GMT 05 30 India Standard Time Bombay Calcutta Madras New Delhi No GMT 06 00 Central Asia Standard Time Almaty Dhaka Yes 33002479 07 2011 291 Embedde
212. h as the specific device process or location This pertinent information is added to the body of the mail message Then the complete message is sent to an electronic mail server for distribution to recipients These recipients could be engineers managers or process owners Security Authentication An optional login system ID and password can be used to authenticate the connection to the SMTP mail server The SMTP supported authentication method is LOGIN 260 33002479 07 2011 Using the Mail Service System Diagnostics The SMTP Diagnostic Web page displays the status of the service Diagnostic information is also available for remote management using the SNMP network management standard 33002479 07 2011 261 Using the Mail Service Using the MBP_MSTR Block for Mail Service Communication Block Representation Each operation is designated by a code To send an email message use the MBP_MSTR block with function code 13 see page 168 MBP_MSTR Instance MBP_MSTR EnableMSTRFunction 4 ENABLE ACTIVE Operation Activ Cancel ActivMSTROperation J ABORT ERROR FaultyOperation SUCCESS OperationSuccessful CONTROL FirstRegisterOfControlBlock DATABUF FirstRegisterOfDataF ield Parameter Description The following table describes the MBP_MSTR parameters Parameter Data Type Description ENABLE None ON enables selected MBP_MSTR operation ABORT None ON terminates active MBP_MSTR operati
213. hat they can send messages to the two managers whose IP addresses are configured in the SNMP configuration either the PL7 or the Web page use the community name given to this configuration enable or disable each of the Transparent Factory Ethernet Private MIB groups Switch 1 Ports02_Messaging 2 I O_Scanning 3 Global_Data 4 Web 5 Address_Server 6 Equipment_Profiles 7 NTP 8 and SMTP 9 Private traps are described in the MIB ASN 1 description which is contained in a mib text file DST Change Trap notifies the manager that the NTP server time has changed either from a standard time to daylight saving time or b daylight saving time to standard time NTP Status Change Trap sent when the NTP component status changes ntpStatus 1 Leap Second Trap sent when leap seconds are inserted SMTP Status Change Trap sent when SMTPStatus changes SMTP Link to Server Status Change sent when tSMTPLnkSrvStatus changes Trap is sent when service tries to send an email Every 30 minutes a periodic test checks the connection to the SMTP server 33002479 07 2011 243 SNMP 244 33002479 07 2011 NTP Time Synchronization Service 9 Introduction This chapter describes the NTP time synchronization service which provides an accurate local clock using NTP What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Introducing the NTP
214. hat allows bridges and end stations to dynamically manage the membership of multicast groups NOTE GMRP is defined in the IEEE 802 1D 1998 Standard which is available as a free download at http IEEE802 org e Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP IGMP is a communications protocol used to manage the membership of internet protocol multicast groups IGMP is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish multicast group memberships Multicast filtering helps to reduce the traffic on a network because broadcasts are sent only to interested or subscribed devices For distributed applications and one to many communications multicast affords advantages over unicast because it e utilizes the network bandwidth more efficiently e sends a single transmission instead of multiple transmissions e reduces collisions e optimizes the performance of Ethernet module processing 182 33002479 07 2011 Global Data Publish Subscribe Using Multicast Filtering These ConneXium switches support multicast filtering Other switches from alternate vendors also support multicast filtering Switch Description 499NES17100 Managed Switch with 7 ports 10 100 BASE TX 499NOS17100 Managed Switch with 5 ports 10 100 BASE TX and 2 ports 100 BASE FX 33002479 07 2011 183 Global Data Publish Subscribe Quantum NOE Global Data Configuration Introduction Global data configuration is carried o
215. he Modbus Plus Network Options Module NOM When using the Modbus Plus Port on the CPU this byte must be set to 0 regardless of the CPU slot Least significant byte destination node address i e a value that represents a direct or a bridge address If there is no bridge this value contains the destination node address If there is a bridge this value contains the address of the bridge If the NOM is inserted in slot 7 on the module rack the most significant byte of routing register 1 looks as follows value 0x0706 most significant least significant byte byte Ha a aoa ofojo o o jifr i1 ofo ofo o ili o Most significant byte Slots 1 16 Least significant byte Destination address binary value between 1 and 64 normal or 65 to 255 extended CONTROLJ 6 Routing register 2 the destination node address further bridge or Modbus Plus modules If addressing in the previous routing register has finished the value is set to 0 CONTROL 7 Routing register 3 similar to routing register 2 CONTROL 8 Routing register 4 similar to routing register 2 see Routing Register 2 CONTROL 9 Routing register 5 similar to routing register 2 see Routing Register 2 138 33002479 07 2011 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks Control Block for TCP IP Ethernet Register Contents CONTROL 1 Indicates an
216. he PC click the Unity Pro PLC Set Address tab to bring up the Set Address menu PLC Simulator Bani Address Address TestC amm v l 127 0 0 1 v l Media Media MODBUSO v TGPIP v Communication Parameters Communication Parameters Ce F 4 Select MODBUS01 in the PLC Media field Enter the Modbus address in the PLC Address field the default address is 1 Note You can also use the keypad on the 140 CPU 651 50 module to enter or change the Modbus address Click OK Proceed to Downloading and Running the Configuration Program below 366 33002479 07 2011 Installation and Configuration Downloading and Running the Configuration Program Once the PC and the PLC are physically connected above steps the I O scanning program can be downloaded to the PLC Step Action 1 On the PC select PLC Connect on the Unity Pro screen 2 Click the PLC Transfer Project to PLC tab to bring up the Transfer Project to PLC dialog box Transfer Project to PLC PC Project Overwriten PLC Project Name Station Name Station Version 00 0 Version 0 0 10 Last Build 1 6 2007 11 17 23AM Last Build 12 17 2006 4 30 06PM PLC Run after Transfer Transfer Came Click the Transfer button to download the program to the PLC When the confirm screen appears click OK PLC Project w Name Station Version 0 0 10 Last Build 12 1 7 2006 4 30 06 PM Confirm Stop on this Projec OK Cance
217. he leading 4 must be omitted For example 59 contents of the variables or value of the literal 40059 The parameter can be specified as direct address located variable unlocated variable or literal NO_REG is the number of registers to be written to slave processor 1 100 The parameter can be specified as direct address located variable unlocated variable or literal Error code see Runtime errors The STATUS parameter can be specified as direct address located variable or unlocated variable The REG_WRIT word parameter addresses the first register in a series of NO_LREG Successive registers used as source data area The parameter must be entered as a direct address or located variable 124 33002479 07 2011 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks READ_REG Function Description Upon request the READ_REG block reads a register area once rising edge of the REQ input It reads data from an addressed slave via TCP IP Ethernet EN and ENO can be projected as additional parameters NOTE About this function block e When programming this function you must be familiar with the routing procedures used by your network e For technical reasons this function block does not allow the use of ST and IL programming languages Symbol Block representation READ REG BOOL REQ NDR BOOL DINT jSLAVEREG ERROR BOOL INT NO _REG REG READ WORD Wo
218. hecks this link The illustration shows corresponding fields in Communication configuration and the Data Editor i Structural view Station Configuration Derived Data Types Derived FB Types 4 Variables lt 3 Communication Networks BM Ethernet_plant i WP Ethernet PLC Program Animation Tables Operator Screens 4 Documentation E Global data configuration Health time out 300 4 gt ms Distribution period 2 4 gt scan Group address 239 255 255 255 Group name Group_1 ON ES Messaging IO Scanning Address Server SNMP Global data Bandwidth Global data configuration Health time out 250 Si ms Grou3 address 239 255 255 255 Distribution period 5 gl scan Group name Group_2 ls amp 3 _ Sa A M Variables DDT Types Function Blocks DFB Typ2s Filter Name eo MoT M poot Name Type Address Value Global E EnptlD a G E GDMW Array 1 10 MIWG93 OJPUD wal X temperature _ irt M22 0 PUB Group_1 Valvel2 Valve MIW381 0 SUB T X Counter Irt AM 00 Q SUB Group_2 10 Px Irt S4MIW200 100 NO E Ethernet W Data Editor E Ethernet 100 33002479 07 2011 Start Communication with Unity Pro 3 3 Selec
219. id If there is a problem a message box opens explaining the why they were not valid The OK button is only available during the first use of the Property box for anew PRM Master DTM Launch No Tool This button is never available for PRM Master DTMs Update Use the Update button after validating or changing the configuration of the linked PRM Master DTM Refer to Update I O Scanning for a PRM Master DTM see page 207 Close The Close button closes the Property box without saving anything 212 33002479 07 2011 Transferring Data with the I O Scanner Saving an Advantys Configuration in an Unity Pro Application At a Glance ACS saves an island configuration in an isl file To add the island to an application it is necessary for Unity Pro to know the location of the island configuration information Saving the Configuration The recommended way to save your island configuration information is to save your Unity Pro application as a stu or sta file The isl file is automatically included in these files Uploading or Importing There are 2 situations where the information contained in the isl file is not available 1 Uploading the application running in the PLC 2 Importing an xef file In these 2 cases if ACS is launched from the Property box see page 208 it automatically tries to open the latest Device Name isl file the Unity Pro General Path gt Project Path directory
220. identifier made up of four groups of numbers from 0 through 255 each number separated by a period for example 123 456 78 9 e Subnet Mask The subnet mask must be entered in IP address format e Gateway The gateway must be entered in IP address format The gateway must be on the same subnet as the device 33002479 07 2011 223 Address Server Configuration Faulty Device Replacement Configuring Faulty Device Replacement Configuring the Address Server Choosing Options To configure the Address Server you use Web pages generated by the embedded Web server The first page that appears is the Address Server Configuration page The first column contains buttons used for selecting devices The Address Server Configuration page displays configuration information for each device in the system and has seven columns in the table Displayed on this page is information about Role Name MAC Address IP Address Subnet Mask e Gateway A additional unnamed column indicates any difference between the current and stored configuration If a difference exists an exclamation point is displayed This is the Address Server Configuration page All devices are compatible Address Server Configuration SEs MAC Address IP Address SubnetMask Gateway myNIP 192 168 3 11 255 255 255 0 192 168 3 11 C ENT_1st_floor 192 168 5 14 255 255 0 0 192 168 2 1 Refresh Address Server Database Table Add a New Entry Change an Entry
221. in the adapter s IP address See Using BOOTP Lite to Assign Address Parameters page 67 58 33002479 07 2011 Product Description How an Unconfigured Module Obtains an IP Address On startup an unconfigured NOE 771 xx module as shipped will attempt to obtain an IP address by issuing BOOTP requests When a response from a BOOTP server is obtained the IP address in the response is used If no BOOTP response is received within two minutes the module uses the default IP address derived from its MAC address NOTE The MAC address is assigned at the factory and is recorded on a label on the front panel above the cable connector This is a unique 48 bit global assigned address It is set in PROM The Ethernet address is recorded on the label in hexadecimal in the form 00 00 54 xx xx xx Connecting to the Default IP Address To connect to the default IP address with your PC set up an active route from your PC To do this with Windows 95 98 ME NT 2000 or Windows XP use the following procedure You can use the routes for connecting Ethernet components with other address ranges Step Action 1 Be sure the NOE module is running 2 Obtain the default IP address of the NOE derived from its MAC address for example 84 0 0 2 Open an MS DOS window Add an active route for the local NOE by typing C gt ROUTE ADD lt target gt MASK lt mask gt lt gateway gt e g C gt ROUTE ADD 84 0 0 0 MASK 255
222. ine Hot Standby State IP Address Assigned Is Primary CPU to Offline Configured IP address if other controller does not go to Primary CPU mode Standby CPU to Offline Configured IP address 1 NOTE For more information refer to NOE IP Address Assignment see page 314 318 33002479 07 2011 Hot Standby NOE IP Address Swap Times Description The following table details the 140 NOE 771 1module address swap times such as the time to close connections time to swap IP addresses or time to establish connections Service Typical Swap Time Maximum Swap Time Swap IP addresses 6ms 500 ms I O Scanning 1 initial cycle of I O scanning 500 ms 1 initial cycle of I O scanning Global data For swap times please see the Quantum NOE 771xx Ethernet Modules User Guide 840 USE 116 500 ms 1 CPU scan Client messaging 1 CPU scan 500 ms 1 CPU scan Server messaging 1 CPU scan the time for the client to reestablish the connection 500 ms the time for the client to reestablish the connection FTP TFTP server The time for the client to reestablish the connection 500 ms the time for the client to reestablish the connection SNMP 1 CPU scan 500 ms 1 CPU scan HTTP server The time for the client to reestablish the connection 500 ms the time for the client to reestablish the connection
223. ion What s in this Part This part contains the following chapters Chapter Chapter Name Page 1 Product Description 19 2 Ethernet Communication Services 71 33002479 07 2011 17 Ethernet Products 33002479 07 2011 Product Description Overview This chapter includes product overviews for e the 140 NOE 771 xx modules e the 140 NWM 100 00 module e the built in Ethernet port of the 140 CPU 651 x0 modules When inserted in the backplane these modules allow your Quantum PLC to communicate over Ethernet networks What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following sections Section Topic Page 1 1 Module Description 140 CPU 651 x0 20 1 2 Module Description 140 NOE 771 xx and 140 NWM 100 00 39 1 3 Installing the Module 49 1 4 Customer Support 68 33002479 07 2011 19 Product Description 1 1 Module Description 140 CPU 651 x0 Overview This is a discussion of the the Modicon Quantum High End CPU HE CPU 140 CPU 651 x0 What s in this Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page 140 CPU 651 x0 Product Overview 21 Physical Presentation and Mounting of Standard High End Modules 22 CPU Controls and Displays 24 Indicators 27 Using the CPU LCD Display Screens 29 20 33002479 07 2011 Product Description 140 CPU 651 x0 Product Overview General Descr
224. ion code Starting address High DATABUF 2 6400 Starting address Low Number of registers High DATABUF 3 0400 Number of registers Low NULL DATABUF 4 0000 Null DATABUF 5 0000 Null 33002479 07 2011 173 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks Field Value Description hex Response DATABUF 6 0408 Function code Byte count DATABUF 7 0001 Register 100 value High Register 100 value Low DATABUF 8 0002 Register 101 value High Register 101 value Low DATABUF 9 0003 Register 102 value High Register 102 value Low DATABUF 10 0004 Register 103 value High Register 103 value Low DATABUF 11 0000 Null 174 33002479 07 2011 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks Close Connection Request At a Glance Use MBP_MSTR operation 16 to close a Modbus TCP IP connection on the network NOTE This operation is not available on Modbus Plus ports embedded port on CPU or NOM modules Block Operation The MBP_MSTR block can send requests and receive responses up to 253 bytes long For block operation refer to the block description see page 134 e When the ENABLE input pin is turned ON operation 15 begins e Ifthe ABORT input pin is turned ON or if the ENABLE input pin is turned OFF the operation ends E output pin is ON during the operation The 1 The ACTIVI ERRO The SUCCI The CONT
225. ion information and error messages Confirmation Message If you successfully added modified or removed and entry the following alert message appears Microsoft Internet Explorer x N Successfully added a new entry Error Messages Error messages appearing as icons in the seventh column display on the Address Server Configuration page see page 284 or in a dialog box Error Icon If an entry is not loaded in the DHCP server or loaded with a different configuration an icon of an exclamation point displays in the seventh column The icon informs you of the difference between the current and stored information F e Not loaded in the server A red icon displays i e Duplicate configuration A blue icon displays Place the pointer over the icon and a pop up window appears and displays a message e Not Loaded in the server Not loaded in the server e Present configuration Current config reemyElO ha ip 139 158 13 222 am 255 255 255 0 gw 139 158 8 1 222 33002479 07 2011 Address Server Configuration Faulty Device Replacement Error Dialog Box If you entered an existing role name or MAC address you will receive an alert message asking you to correct the entry Microsoft Internet Explorer x This role name is already used Please change il Modifying the Database If you need to add or modify an entry in the database use the Address Server Configuration page see page 284 Th
226. iption The Quantum 140 CPU 651 x0 module see page 22 is among the newest in a series of Quantum processor modules It combines standard PLC functions with the diagnostic possibilities of a Web server The 140 CPU 651 x0 communicates using an RJ 45 connection The 140 CPU 651 x0 module is in a double width standard Quantum housing which requires 2 sequential slots in a Quantum rack Its server functions are diagnostic only so use software to configure services The table shows the key Ethernet services that are implemented Service 140 CPU 651 x0 HTTP Server see page 86 X FTP Server see page 85 X Flash File System see page 88 X BOOTP Client see page 67 Address Server see page 74 SNMP V2 Agent Network Management Service see page 76 Modbus Messaging see page 77 I O Scanner see page 79 Hot Standby Global Data Publish Subscribe see page 81 Bandwidth Monitoring see page 84 Faulty Device Replacement Server see page 219 Enhanced Web Diagnosis see page 86 Schneider Private MIB see page 76 FactoryCast Application see page 88 User programmed Web pages RJ 45 Connection see Modbus port in the Quantum Platform manual Fiber Optic Connection Time Synchronization Service see page 82 Electronic Mail Notification Service see page 83 33002479 07 2011 21 Product Description
227. ires Georgetown No GMT 02 00 Mid Atlantic Standard Time South_Georgia No GMT 01 00 Azores Standard Time Azores Cape Verde Island Yes GMT Universal Coordinated Time Casablanca Monrovia No GMTO Greenwich Mean Time Dublin Edinburgh Lisbon London Yes GMT 01 00 Romance Standard Time Amsterdam CopenHagen Madrid Paris Vilnius Yes GMT 01 00 Central European Standard Time Belgrade Sarajevo Skopje Sofija Zagreb Yes GMT 01 00 Central Europe Standard Time Bratislava Budapest Ljubljana Prague Warsaw Yes GMT 01 00 W Europe Standard Time Brussels Berlin Bern Rome Stockholm Vienna Yes GMT 02 00 GTB Standard Time Athens Istanbul Minsk Yes GMT 02 00 E Europe Standard Time Bucharest Yes 254 33002479 07 2011 Using the NTP Time Service Time Zone Description DST Available GMT 02 00 Egypt Standard Time Cairo Yes GMT 02 00 South Africa Standard Time Johannesburg Harare Pretoria No GMT 02 00 FLE Standard Time Helsinki Riga Tallinn Yes GMT 02 00 Israel Standard Time Israel Jerusalem Yes GMT 03 00 Arabic Standard Time Baghdad Yes GMT 03 00 Arab Standard Time Kuwait Riyadh No GMT 03 00 Russian Standard Time Moscow St Petersburg Volgograd Yes GMT 03 00 E Africa Standard Time Nairobi No GMT 03 30 Iran Standard Time Tehran Yes GMT 04 00 Arabian
228. is not valid 5048 The hardware length is not valid 5049 The route specified cannot be found 504A Collision when invoking Select these conditions have already been selected by another job 504B The job ID is not valid 5050 No Network Resource 5051 Length Error 5052 Addressing Error 5053 Application Error 5054 Client cannot process request 5055 No Network Resource 5056 Non Operational TCP connection 5057 Incoherent configuration 6003 FIN or RST not expected F001 In reset mode F002 Component not fully initialized 162 33002479 07 2011 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks Reset Optional Module Description A reset optional module operation causes a Quantum NOE Ethernet communications module or the Ethernet port on a 140CPU65150 60 CPU module to enter a cycle that resets its working environment To program an MBP_MSTR block to perform a reset option module operation use function code 10 see page 137 Network Implementation A reset optional module operation can be performed on TCP IP Ethernet see page 157 and SY MAX Ethernet networks Control Block Usage for TCP IP Ethernet Register Meaning CONTROL 1 10 reset optional module CONTROL 2 Indicates the error status CONTROL 3 No significance CONTROL 4 No significance CONTROL 5 Routing register see page 139 CONTROL 6 No significance CONTROLI9 Control Block Usage for SY MAX
229. k on Yes in the Confirm device name and type Message modifiable Do you want to confirm the Box and go to Step 11 device name and device type e The Device Type and Device Name 2 If you want to configure the Advantys island later click on the are verified and saved OK button e The Property box closes Click on Yes in the Confirm device name and type Message Box To open the ACS later e Carry out Step 7 e Click on the Launch Advantys Configuration Software button 11 After ACS opens configure your Advantys island NOTE While the ACS is open Ethernet screen is locked and cannot be edited but the other Unity Pro services can be edited NOTE The User Defined Label must be filled in the Io image If not the Advantys varialble will no be added in the Unity Data Editor 12 When your Advantys island has been built and validated close A Unity Pro Message Box opens Do you ACS want to update your symbols now 13 You have 2 choices 1 Click on Yes in the update Message Box and go to Step 14 If you clicked on No 2 Click on No in the update Message Box e You are returned to I O Scanning You are returned to the I O Scanning screen without without carrying out the results in Step carrying out the Yes results 14 Later when you want to update the Advantys symbols into e The Device Name is displayed in the Unity Pro I O Scanning in red This indicates e Carry out Step 7 that the island configuration ha
230. k transmission frame Local Local i Network UDP SNMP Network Trailer Header Header Header Message A GetRequest SetRequest Ve Cc t ersion ommunity or Trap PDU The PDUs within the SNMP initiate the communication between the manager and the agents The SNMP installed on your NOE module uses the following three PDUs e GetRequest e SetRequest e Trap The GetRequest shortened to Get PDU is used by the SNMP manager to retrieve the value of one or more objects OIDs from an agent The SetRequest shortened to Set PDU is used by the SNMP manager to assign a value to one or more objects OIDs residing in an agent 33002479 07 2011 233 SNMP Trap PDU The Trap PDU is used by the agent to alert the manager that a predefined event has occurred Version amp Community Identifiers The version identifies the version number of the SNMP software being used by the manager and the agent Your NOE supports Version 1 of the SNMP The community is an identifier that you assign to your SNMP network If community names for the manager and the agent do not agree the agent will send an authentication failure trap message to the manager If the community names and version number agree the SNMP PDU will be processed What Can Be Configured Your NOE module can be configured to send an authentication trap to two SNMP managers if it receives a community name in a Get Set request that does not match the configured name
231. l 5 Click Run on the Unity Pro upper toolbar to start the program 33002479 07 2011 367 Installation and Configuration Diagnosing the Ethernet Module Using the Web Server Introduction Quantum Ethernet modules have an embedded web server that provides web pages to diagnose the Ethernet module services such as statistics I O scanning Messages global data etc You can access an Ethernet module s web pages by entering the IP address of the module in the web browser No password is required to display the home page From the NOE home page you can access the Monitoring Diagnostics and Setup pages You can also use the module s LED display to diagnose problems For information regarding the module s LED display refer to the Quantum NOE 771xx Ethernet Modules User Manual Accessing the Ethernet Module s Web Page To access the NOE 771 01 module s web page proceed as follows Step Action 1 At the PC start a Web browser such as Internet Explorer 2 Enter the NOE 771 01 s currently assigned IP address in the Address field of the browser to bring up the NOE s home page TA MDE 77105 Web Serwer Mbereatt innersat Explores fa Cit ee Froes Toot tes QG n a g pl freee O A G P e E aar J g Gouge Cr alee Be RSs Se OF aroe Poed See Wi aaah ek Ej D m eria eens ghim Gee Kw ii DSS a Click the Diagnostics tab E
232. la T4 T1 T3 T2 2 The formula s variables are T1 Time at which the NTP request is transmitted from the module T2 Time at which the NTP Server receives the request provided by the module in response T3 Time at which the NTP Server transmits the response provided to the module in the response T4 Time at which the NTP Response is received by the module Time accuracy Local Time error is lt 10 ms compared to the reference NTP server Note 1 2 Typical under 5 ms Worst case lt 10 ms Settling Time The maximum accuracy is obtained after 2 updates from the NTP server Polling Period Dependency The accuracy is dependent upon the polling period Less than 10 mSec of error is guaranteed for polling periods of 120 seconds or less To obtain the best possible accuracy and if your network bandwidth will allow reduce the polling period to a small value For example choosing a polling time of 5 seconds provides better accuracy than a time of 30 seconds 33002479 07 2011 247 Using the NTP Time Service Term Description of Service Time zone Default format Universal Time Coordinated UTC Optional Configure the service to use a local time zone For example GMT 1 for Barcelona or Paris Daylight savings Automatic module adjusts time in spring and fall time Leap Second Automatic module inserts or deletes a second Note 1 To compensate for the deceleration
233. le s CPU allocation for each of the following services e Global Data see page 177 e O scanning see page 189 e Modbus messaging see page 77 The Bandwidth Monitoring service retrieves workload data and returns one of two pieces of information whether the module has free resources or whether the module is working at capacity Knowing the resource allocation helps you e assess resource allocation e determine the number of NOEs needed in a system NOTE Users who want to use Bandwidth Monitoring do not need to develop a new set of access functions The actual NOE CPU load is computed each second Bandwidth Monitoring Load Rates The Bandwidth Monitoring service checks once a second and computes four 4 values in private data These values are returned as the percentage of the NOE s CPU that is allocated to e Global Data see page 177 e O scanner see page 189 e Modbus messaging see page 77 e other services and idle CPU time spent in other services is shown as Other or Free Bandwidth Monitoring uses the same functions as used by SNMP The three service rates Global Data I O Scanner and Messaging are computed using the following formula Current load 100 Maximum Load The table shows the dynamically computed Maximum Load Rate for the NOE module Diagnostic Service Workload Data Returned Maximum Load Global Data Number of published variables per second 800 O Scanner Number of
234. ll transferred between the CPU and the scanner on each scan As a consequence of the last point above if you modify a MWi attached to an input this MWi is overwritten by the values coming from the I O scanner in the next scan with either 0 or the last input value It is possible but meaningless to access MW attached to the outputs because they will not be transmitted to the device Repetitive Rate Step The Repetitive Rate Step number 3 is set in multiples of 5 ms the minimum through 200 ms the maximum The Repetitive Rate column is where you enter a rate of time for how often you want the I O scanner to send a query to the device after the rate has timed out NOTE The repetitive rate of the I O scanner table is a multiple of the rate displayed in the Repetitive Rate Step The real repetitive rate being executed by the I O scanner service is shown in the Repetitive Rate column Note An entry in the Repetitive Rate column is rounded up to the next multiple that was entered in the Repetitive Rate Step if the entry is not a multiple of the Repetitive Rate Step For example if the entry in the Repetitive Rate Step is 5 and you enter a 7 in the Repetitive Rate column the 7 is rounded up to 10 if you change the Repetitive Rate Step to 6 and enter a 7 in the Repetitive Rate column the 7 is rounded up to 12 I O Scanner Table Parameters The I O Scanner parameters are described in the table below Parameter Description
235. lock or of other read operations for example MBP_MSTR CREAD_REG All function blocks use 1 data transaction path and require multiple cycles to complete a job NOTE A TCP IP communication between a Quantum PLC NOE 771xx and a Momentum PLC all TCP IP CPUs and all TCP IP I O modules is possible only when 1 read or write job is carried out in every cycle If several jobs are sent per PLC cycle the communication stops without generating an error message in the status register of the function block The entire routing information is contained in data structure WordArr5 of input AddrFld The type of function block connected to this input and thus the contents of the data structure depends on the network used Please use e TCP IP Ethernet the function block TCP_IP_ADDR NOTE For experts The WordArr5 data structure can be used with constants as well A rising edge triggers the read transaction The REQ parameter can be specified as direct address located variable unlocated variable or Literal 126 33002479 07 2011 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks SLAVEREG NO_REG NDR ERROR REG_READ STATUS SLAVEREG is the start of the area in the addressed slave from which the source data is read The source area always resides within the MW word 4x register area SLAVEREG expects the source reference as offset within that area In 4x registers the leading 4 must be omitted For example 59 contents of
236. lue in an increment of 16 11 116 132 etc NOTE The Health Block is available only for the NOE 771 00 01 and 11 Itis not available for the CPU 651 x0 NOTE For Safety Monitor applications the Health Block is mapped on M MW from the UMA zone instead of l IW Device Control Block The Device Control Block number 2 lets you disable any scanned device by setting a bit associated with that device to 1 The I O scanner closes the connection and sets the Health Bit to 0 unhealthy state To enable the Device Control Block select the checkbox in the I O Scanner configuration dialog item 2 in the illustration above NOTE To enable the Device Control Block you must have e Unity Pro at V2 0 or higher e an 140 NOE 771 01 or NOE 771 11at version 3 5 or higher e a 140 CPU 651x0 at version 2 0 or higher If you attempt to enable the Device Control Block with an earlier version of the firmware the I O scanning service is disabled If the checkbox is not selected the I O scanner service is enabled and you cannot disable the I O scanning of individual devices 33002479 07 2011 361 Installation and Configuration Disabling I O scanning with the Device Control Block is equivalent to ending communication between the scanner and the device Therefore e The fallback positions are applied to the inputs by the scanner e Communication with the device is stopped e Allthe entries in the IN and OUT tables are sti
237. me Both the manager and agent programs must agree on the names and the meanings of the fetch and store operations The set of all objects SNMP can access is known as a Management Information Base MIB Schneider obtained a private MIB Groupe_Schneider 3833 Under the Groupe Schneider private MIB is a Transparent Factory Ethernet TFE private MIB The Transparent Factory SNMP embedded component controls the Schneider private MIB function 228 33002479 07 2011 SNMP Choosing an SNMP Manager If you already have a working SNMP manager you may continue to use it Any of the many SNMP version 1 compliant managers on the market will work If you do not currently use an SNMP manager in your organization and are evaluating SNMP managers for purchase then we recommend that you consider HiVision with the ConnexView Add On developed for use with Schneider Automation PLCs Please contact your Schneider Electric sales office for availability and pricing of HiVision and ConnexView Using a SNMP Manager The process for obtaining a SNMP Manager Step Action 1 Get Schneider mib file from the NOE Web page You are going to find the mib file as a packed file under wwwroot SchneiderTFE zip on your NOE module Compile mib file in the compiler that comes with the NOE Load compiled mib file to the SNMP manager When you are done you will see the Schneider private MIB manager in your manager
238. ment damage A WARNING UNEXPECTED SYSTEM BEHAVIOR Stop the PLC before transferring an ACS configuration and or I O Scanning modifications Failure to follow these instructions can result in death serious injury or equipment damage The following procedure configures an Advantys STB or OTB island Step Action Results 1 Open the Ethernet network configuration screen 2 Inthe Module Utilities zone select YES for IO Scanning 3 Select the I O Scanning tab I O Scanning screen opens 4 Enter ona free line the IP address for the connection you want to use to communicate with the Advantys island 5 Enter RD length and WR length on the same line The lengths must be long enough for the expected Advantys configuration Validate the I O Scanning screen Click on the button that is next to Device Name cell on the The Property box see page 208 opens same line 8 Select STB or OTB in the Device Type drop down menu 33002479 07 2011 203 Transferring Data with the I O Scanner Step Action Results 9 Enter a Device Name following the naming rules see page 211 10 You have 2 choices Results for both 1 and 2 are 1 If you want to go to ACS now to configure an island click on A Unity Pro Message Box opens The the Launch Advantys Configuration Software button device name and device type won t be Clic
239. mes Overview The following information provides guidelines on proper cabling schemes for your Ethernet configuration Twisted Pair Length In a standard Ethernet cabling scheme network nodes such as the Quantum Ethernet module connect via a cable to a port on a central hub or switch The maximum cable length between nodes depends on whether they are connected through hubs or switches as the following table describes Device Type Max Cable Length from Max Number of Hubs Switches Max Distance Between Network Node to Hub Switch Between Any Two Nodes Nodes hub 10 BASE T 100 m 3 500 m switch 10 100 BASE T 100 m unlimited unlimited 100 BASE FX 2 km Cabling with Conventional Hubs The figures and tables that follow show the maximum number of hubs and the maximum cable length between nodes allowed if using hubs 10BASE T Distances with Hubs The 10 BASE T cabling allows for 3 hubs with a link maximum distance of 100 m 325 ft and a total network diameter of 500 m 1625 ft e 500 m 1625 ft maximum cable length between nodes Backplane Backplane Backplane Backplane Backplane 52 33002479 07 2011 Product Description 10 100BASE T Cable Distances with Switches The 10 100BASE T cabling has a link maximum distance of 100 m The is no limit on the number of switches 100BASE FX The maximum cable segment length for 100BASE FX multimode cable 1300 nm is 2 km The number o
240. mes see page 52 as well as instructions for connecting the module to an Ethernet network Connecting the Cable see page 57 56 33002479 07 2011 Product Description Connecting the Cable Overview The following information pertains to cabling NOTE The 140 NOE 771 xx is capable of communicating over either a 10 100BASE T or a 100BASE FX Ethernet network at any given time but not both at the same time Accessories Schneider Electric sells the following switches Hub or Switch Description 499NEH10410 hub with 4 ports 10 BASE T 499NOH10510 hub with 3 ports 10 BASE T and 2 ports 10 BASE FL 499NTR10010 transceiver 10 BASE T 10 BASE FL 499NEH14100 hub with 4 ports 100 BASE TX 499NTR10100 transceiver 100 BASE TX 499NES18100 switch with 8 ports 10 100 BASE TX 499NES17100 managed switch with 7 ports 10 100 BASE TX 499NOS17100 managed switch with 5 ports 10 100 BASE TX and 2 ports 100 BASE FX The following Schneider Electric cables support multicast filtering see page 182 Cable Description 490NTWO000 02 05 12 40 80 U StraightThru cable 490NTCO00 05 15 40 80 U Crossover cable Fiber Optic Remove the protective cap from the module s MT RJ connector port and the protective cap from the tip of the black connector on the MT RJ fiber optic cable as shown in the following figure The plug only fits to the socket in one way It should sn
241. module is activated 33002479 07 2011 103 Start Communication with Unity Pro IP Configuration General Description The IP configuration tab enables you to configure IP address settings for the Quantum Ethernet module IP address settings become active after e the hardware is connected e the configuration is downloaded to the PLC in the Quantum Ethernet module The following figure shows the IP configuration for the Quantum Ethernet model family Model Family ETHERNET_1 Model IP A IP Address CEOTTO Model Address TCP IP 10 100 Regular Connec _ Back Module ddress Subnetwork Mask Gateway Address 0 O TOFO e MERETE o E e ERRi IP Configuration Model Utilities NO VO Scanning NO v Global Data YES SNMP NO _ Address Server WEB NTP TP Bandwidth Messaging vo Scanning Global Data SNMP Address Server From a IP address Subnetwork mask Gateway address server IP Address Configuration Configured 13 12 10 14 25 25 0 0 13 12 10 1 Ethernet configuration Ethernet Il Description of the selection properties Selection Description Configured Activate the IP address subnet mask and gateway address The data is activated after the configuration is downloaded to the PLC Client Server
242. ms 1 of 2 Hot Standby actions Ifthe NOE Then Detects that the new Hot Standby state is either primary or standby The NOE changes the IP address Receives a swap UDP message The NOE transmits a Swap UDP message and swaps the IP address All client server services I O scanner global data messaging FTP SNMP and HTTP continue to run after the switch from the old to the new primary NOE NOTE Failure of an NOE module is not a condition for the primary system to leave the primary state Hot Standby and NOE Module Functionality The following table identifies the Ethernet services that are available and unavailable in a hot standby solution Service NOE 771 Family O Scanning Available Global Data Available Modbus Messaging Available FTP TFTP Available SNMP Available HTTP Server Available DHCP Unavailable NOTE Only the 140 NOE 771 01 or 140 NOE 771 11 TCP IP Ethernet modules support a Modicon Quantum Hot Standby with Unity V2 0 system 311 Hot Standby Hot Standby Topology Hot Standby Interconnection The following diagram shows a Hot Standby system and the relationship between the 2 redundant systems Two 140 CPU 671 60 or Two 140 CPU 672 61 controllers are connected via a link created with fiber optic cable The RIOs are connected both to each other through the fiber optic cable and to the RIO drops moz CuO NO
243. munication operations see page 137 using the MBP_MSTR function block EN and ENO can be configured as additional parameters NOTE You must be familiar with the routing procedures of your network when programming an MBP_MSTR function block Modbus Plus routing path structures are described in detail in the Modbus Plus Network Planning and Installation Guide If TCP IP or SY MAX Ethernet routing is implemented standard Ethernet IP router products must be used A full description of the TCP IP routing is provided in the Quantum with Unity Pro TCP IP Configuration User Guide CREAD_REG CWRITE REG READ REG WRITE REG and MBP MSTR function blocks use 1 data transaction path and require multiple cycles to complete an operation Number of transaction path available is dependent on the communication port used e Modbus Plus embedded port or NOM modules support up to 4 blocks at the same time e Modbus Plus embedded port or NOM modules support up to 4 blocks at the same time e Modbus Plus embedded port or NOM modules support up to 4 blocks at the same time More communication function blocks may be programmed on the same communication port However communication block exceeding the maximun number on that port will not be serviced until one of the transaction paths is freed up When the transaction path resources become free the next block on the same port will become active and begin using freed pa
244. mware versions e 140 NOE V4 3 or higher 5 200 ms e CPU V2 6 or higher 5 200 ms RD Master Destination address in the master PLC where mw10 Object from each device newly read information is stored RD Slave Source address index in the slave remote device The format of this value Ref depends on the Slave Syntax e Index 5 e Modbus 400006 e IEC 0 MW5 e IEC 1 MW6 RD length Number of words to read 10 Last value This field configures the behavior of inputs in the Hold last Input event of an access error in relation to the remote device for example inoperative network or device power supply etc e Set to 0 fall back to 0 e Hold last maintain last value WR Master Source address of the master PLC whose datais mw20 Object being written into the slave remote device Write operations are always performed at the word level 33002479 07 2011 197 Transferring Data with the I O Scanner Parameter Description Example WR Slave The address of the first word written into the The format of this value Ref slave remote device depends on the Slave Syntax e Index 1 e Modbus 400002 e IEC 0 MW1 e IEC 1 MW2 WR length Number of words to be written 10 Description Additional information Master refers to the client PLC that makes the request Slave refers to the server from which data is read or to which data is written NOTE Refer to information about th
245. n bytes this field is function code dependent and usually contains information such as variable references variable counts and data offsets The size and content of the data field are dependent on the value of the function code 346 33002479 07 2011 Ethernet TCP IP Modbus Application Protocol TCP IP Specific Issues Overview The following information describes some TCP IP specific issues Broadcast Multicast TCP Port Number Although broadcast and or multicast are supported by both IP network address and IEEE 802 3 MAC address the Modbus Application Protocol does not support either broadcast or multicast at the application layer Schneider Electric s Quantum PLCs use broadcast addressing because they use ARP as the means of locating the destination node The client interface to the Modbus Application Protocol service on the PLC the MBP_MSTR block requires the user to provide the destination IP address Also the embedded stack does use a pre configured default gateway IP address in the case where ARP does not succeed Schneider Electric has obtained a well known system port from an Internet Authority Schneider Electric s well known system port number is 502 The Internet Authority assigned the system port number 502 to asa appl proto with Dennis Dub as the company point of contact This port number allows Schneider Electric to transport various application protocols over with TCP or UDP The particular pr
246. n and Configuration Step Action 6 In the project browser double click Station Configuration PLC bus to access the configuration of the local rack shown below Ta Structural view ssn AL Station Seemann Configuration 4 0 PLC bus ararsan Derived Data Types D Derived FB Types E Sy Yariables amp FB instances Double click on slot 4 see step 7 below 7 Double click slot 4 to bring up the New Device menu to show the hardware catalog Topological Address Part Number Description 8 Local Quantum Drop Local Quantum Drop amp Analog Communication 40 GRP 93x00 RIO HEAD S908 40 EAI 92100 AS I 1 CHANNEL8 40 NOE 311 00 QUANTUM SY MAX ETHERNET MODULE TWISTED PAIR S 40 NOE 351 00 QUANTUM SY MAX ETHERNET MODULE FIBER OPTIC 40 NOE 771 00 ETHERNET TCPAP BASIC WEB SERVER MODULES 40 NOE 771 01 ETHERNET TCP NEB SERVER MODULE 40 NOE 771 10 ETHERNET TCP IP CONFIGURABLE WEB SERVER MODULE 140 NOE 771 11 ETHERNET TCP IP CONFIGURABLE WEB SERVER MODULE8 Double click here see step 8 below 33002479 07 2011 355 Installation and Configuration Step Action 8 Double click the module that goes in slot 4 140 NOE 771 01 in our example shown above Note Alternately you can click the module and drag it to the selected slot on the rack Repeat step 8 for each module included in your configuration
247. n be installed only in a local backplane NOTE Ensure when installing the module that it does not exceed the Quantum backplane power requirements as specified in the Quantum with Unity Pro Hardware Reference Manual Backplane Slot Replacement You may place the module in any slot on the backplane You do not need to place it next to other modules Tools Required You will need one medium size Phillips head screw driver Mounting the Module in the Backplane Perform the following steps to mount the module Step Action 1 Holding the module at an angle mount it on the two hooks located near the top of the backplane The following figure shows the correct way to hold the module Hook fo I Pa Backplane Connector Backplane Swing the module down so its connector engages the backplane connector Using a Phillips head screw driver tighten the screw at the bottom of the module between 2 and 4 in lbs or between 22 and 45 Newton meters of torque 33002479 07 2011 55 Product Description Grounding the Module The module is grounded upon installation in the Quantum PLC backplane For instructions on grounding the backplane see the Quantum with Unity Pro Hardware Reference Manual NOTE If you connect the module to the Ethernet hub or switch using a shielded cable the cable is also grounded Elsewhere in this guide is a discussion of cabling schemes and recommendations Cabling Sche
248. n blocking 5024 The socket is non blocking and the connection cannot be closed down 5025 The socket is non blocking and a previous connection attempt has not been concluded 5026 Socket operation on a non socket 5027 The destination address is not valid 5028 Message too long 5029 Wrong type of protocol for the socket 502A Protocol not available 502B Protocol not supported 502C Socket type not supported 502D Operation not supported at socket 502E Protocol family not supported F502 Address family not supported 5030 Address is already in use 33002479 07 2011 161 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks Hex Error Meaning Code 5031 Address not available 5032 Network is out of order 5033 Network cannot be reached 5034 Network shut down the connection during reset 5035 The connection was terminated by the peer 5036 The connection was reset by the peer 5037 An internal buffer is required but cannot be assigned 5038 The socket is already connected 5039 The socket is not connected 503A Cannot transmit after the socket has been shut off 503B Too many references cannot splice 503C Connection timed out 503D The connection attempt was denied 5040 Host is out of order 5041 The destination host could not be reached from this node 5042 Directory not empty 5046 NI_INIT returned 1 5047 The MTU
249. n overview of the status and health of the Remote I O network communications Access this page by selecting the CRP Drop down menu item Remote I O Status or using the hyperlink RIO Status Sample Page Here is an example of a Remote I O Status page QUANTUM REMOTE l O COMMUNICATION STATUS Global Status Not OK Global Health Not OK Cable A Cable B Not OK Not OK Dynamic Data Some of the data provided on this page is dynamic Dynamic data is constantly refreshed at a rate determined by the performance of the embedded server network and client CPU 276 Embedded Web Pages Quantum PLC Data Monitor Page Introduction to the PLC Data Monitor Page The following figure shows the Web page that allows you to display Quantum PLC data Quantum PLC Data Monitor lt new gt gt Insert Rows Cut Rows Paste R 1 Copyright 1999 Schneider Automation Inc All Rights Reserved You can add delete and copy Quantum PLC data as described in the following list e Insert additional rows of data by clicking on the Insert Rows button e Delete specific rows of data by clicking on the Cut Rows button e Copy in rows of data by clicking on the Paste Rows button 33002479 07 2011 277 Embedded Web Pages SNMP Configuration Overview This topic describes SNMP configuration for the Quantum Ethernet module through the SNMP Configuration page SNM
250. n the Ethernet configuration extension table are displayed in the DATABUF output field when a write CTE operation is implemented The registers are used to transfer the following CTE data CTE indicator implementation DATABUF Parameter Register Contents Frame type DATABUF 0 1 802 3 2 Ethernet IP address DATABUF 1 First byte of the IP address DATABUF 2 Second byte of the IP address DATABUF 3 Third byte of the IP address DATABUF 4 Fourth byte of the IP address Lower netmask DATABUF 5 Most significant word DATABUF 6 Least significant word Gateway DATABUF 7 First byte of the gateway DATABUF 8 Second byte of the gateway DATABUF 9 Third byte of the gateway DATABUF 10 Fourth byte of the gateway 33002479 07 2011 167 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks Send Email Description The electronic mail notification service allows controller based projects to report alarms or events The controller monitors the system and dynamically creates an electronic mail message which alerts local or remote users A user defined event or condition triggers the MSTR block to create a message Each message uses one of three user defined headers Each message sent from the controller can contain text and variable information with a maximum of 238 bytes The project selects the appropriate header Each header contains e sender name e list of recipients
251. ndby Diag The order of diagnostic screen varies with the operation Halt User task in halt mode RIO fails Detected error reported by RIO head HSBY fails Detected error reported by optical link Stop Stop command sent Off keypad Offline command entered on keypad Off SW60 Offline command set in command register Off appli Offline due to application mismatch Off vers Offline due to PLC or Copro OS mismatch Off RIO Offline due to Remote 1 O error Take over Standby CPU switched to Primary CPU mode Run Run command sent Plug amp Run Sun link operational and Standby CPU is started Power up No message PLC has just started 34 33002479 07 2011 Product Description Communications Menu Communications menu and submenus Quantum PLC Communications gt Communications TCP IP Ethernet _ IP Address TCP IP Ethernet gt IP Address gt HES HHH HHH HEH _ TCP IP Ethernet _ Subnet Mask Subnet Mask gt Het HHH HHH HEH _ TCP IP Ethernet IP Gateway IP Gateway gt HEH HHH HEH HHH _ TCP IP Ethernet MAC Address MAC Address gt HEHE HHH HH BE Communications MB Address Modbus Plus gt Modbus Plus State _ Communications Mode Protocol Adr Serial Port Serial Port gt Rate Par DB SB gt RS Mode RS 232 Serial Port Protocol Modbus
252. ng STOP Offline No Conf Processor has no application program Halt Detected state error in maintenance mode for safety modules BatL Indicates battery health e Steady battery is low e No message battery is OK Port USB Indicates that the port has activity Modbus MB Indicates Modbus Plus activity Plus mb No activity Dup Duplicate MB address ERR Detected Modbus communications error INI Initial Network Search Modbus 232 Serial port activity for RS 232 485 Serial port activity for RS 485 PCM 1 Displayed status indicates battery health of the PCMCIA card in slot 1 e Steady battery is OK e Flashing battery is low only for green PCMCIAs version lt 04 2 Displayed status indicates battery health of the PCMCIA card in slot 2 e Steady battery is OK e Flashing battery is low only for green PCMCIAs PV lt 04 With blue PCMCIAs version gt 04 when main battery is low there is no flash 33002479 07 2011 31 Product Description PLC Operations Menu The structure of the PLC Operations menu and submenus are Unity HE CPU PLC Operations gt PLC Operations Press lt ENTER gt to Start PLC gt confirm Start gt PLC Operations Press lt ENTER gt to Stop PLC gt confirm Stop gt PLC Op
253. nication Blocks Elementary Description for WordArr5 Elementary description for WordArr5 Element Data Type Meaning WordArr5 1 WORD high value byte Slot of the NOE module low value byte MBP on Ethernet Transporter MET mapping index WordArr5 2 WORD byte 4 MSB of the 32 bit destination IP address WordArr5 3 WORD byte 3 of the 32 bit destination IP address WordArr5 4 WORD byte 2 of the 32 bit destination IP address WordArr5 5 WORD byte 1 LSB of the 32 bit destination IP address Map_Idx The MBP on Ethernet Transporter MET mapping index is given at the Map_Idx input That is if MET is 6 the value appears as follows 0 0 O 0 0 1 1 0 Slot_ID If an NOE in the rack of a Quantum controller is addressed as destination node the value at the Slot_ID input represents the physical NOE slot That is if the NOE is plugged in at Slot 7 of the rack the value appears as follows Lefofofofof s NOTE When using an integrated Ethernet CPU module such as the 140 CPU 651 x0 the slot ID must be 254 FE hex regardless of the CPU slot AddrFld If an NOE in the rack of a Quantum controller is addressed as a destination node the value in the High value byte represents the physical slot of the NOE and the Low value byte represents the MBP on Ethernet Transporter MET mapping index That is if the NOE is inserted in slot 7 of the rack and the
254. ntents e g MAC address 00 00 54 00 12 34 is 00 00 00 displayed as follows 01 54 00 02 12 34 03 Board status refer to the following table 04 and 05 Number of receiver interrupts 06 and 07 Number of transfer interrupts 08 and 09 Transfer timeout error count 10 and 11 Collision detection error count 12 and 13 Omitted packets 14 and 15 Memory error count 16 and 17 Number of restarts performed by the driver 18 and 19 Receive framing error count 20 and 21 Overflow error count receiver 22 and 23 Receive CRC error counter 24 and 25 Receive buffer error counter 26 and 27 Transfer buffer error counter 28 and 29 Transfer bin underflow counter 30 and 31 Late collision counter 32 and 33 Lost carrier counter 34 and 35 Number of retries 36 and 37 IP address Word Contents e g the IP address 198 202 137 113 or 36 89 71 C6 CA 89 71 is represented as follows 37 C6 CA 33002479 07 2011 157 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks Board Status Word Bit Definition NOTE It is best to view the board status word in binary format The following table describes the bit definitions of the board status word e 140 NOE 771 x1 versions 2 0 3 0 3 1 3 3 and 3 6 or higher e 140 NOE 771 x0 versions 3 0 3 3 and 3 4 or higher Bit Definition 15 0 Link LED off 1 Link LED on 14 0 Appl LED off 1 Appl LED on 13 0 twisted pair 1 fiber 12 0 10 Mbit 1 100 Mbit
255. nter a user name and password the default is USER for both Note Check with your system administrator to see if the user name and password have been changed 368 33002479 07 2011 Installation and Configuration Step Action 5 Click OK to bring up the NOE diagnostic web page Dewek trigaue Lasi Rab wsp aar FIO Dista ENSE taah a ete bompa NI Mii iea mutornames Bae aa eyes reset 6 Click the I O Scanning link on the left hand side of the screen to access the I O scanning diagnostics web page Q iat Pm tem O 4 So A SD coer cl COB me ee Sainte Sane Woe e De uana me OEN B si VO dee ae pa Merde ornare hoes per gai S5 Muar picornekra 1 Cotpard law R 33002479 07 2011 369 Installation and Configuration 370 33002479 07 2011 Glossary ACK address API ARP ASN 1 A Acknowledgement On a network the identification of a station In a frame a grouping of bits that identifies the frame s source or destination Application Program Interface The specification of functions and data used by one program module to access another the programming interface that corresponds to the boundary between protocol layers Address Resolution Protocol A network layer protocol used to determine the physical address that corresponds to the IP address for a host on the network ARP is a sub protocol that operates unde
256. ocation for storing health bits NOTE Health bits run in different directions e O scanner health bits run left to right e Global Data health bits run right to left 282 33002479 07 2011 Embedded Web Pages Changing Global Data Variables To change the Global Data variables that appear in the Variable Table area follow the instructions below Step Action 1 Highlight the identification number in the Data ID column 2 In the Type column select the publish subscribe variable type from the drop down list Three options are available publish subscribe or none displayed as e NONE e SUB e PUB In the Symbol column you may enter text to describe the variable In the Address column you see the application address for this variable Note This is a read only field In the Length column for each row type a value which represents the number of 4x registers The ending 4x register field is automatically updated If you are using the second method Copy Configuration update Length the first time only When you are finished click the Update Global Data Configuration button Verifying System Operation To verify that the system is operational do the following Step Action 1 Verify that all controllers are running 2 Look at the health of all variables using the Global Data Diagnostics page Follow these links Diagnostics NOE Diagnostics Glob
257. ock value starts at 0 until fully updated from the module Model Starting Date Modicon Quantum with Unity January 1st 1980 00 00 00 00 Stop or Run PLC e Stop and Run have no effect on the accuracy of the clock e Stop and Run have no effect on the update of the clock e A transition from one mode to the other has no effect on the accuracy of the system Ethernet network time Download Application The status clock value associated with the time service register in the CPU is reinitialized after an application is downloaded or after an NTP server swap There will be two polling periods before the time is accurate NTP Configuration Elsewhere in this section is information about the NTP configuration 33002479 07 2011 251 Using the NTP Time Service Configuring the NTP Time Service Configuring the NTP Time Service Configure or change the following parameters on the NTP Configuration page Model Family CPAIP 10 100 Regular connection Module Address l Module Utilities Rack Module Channel No lOScannin z g S aT No z Global Data Module IP Address Yes SNMP IP Addos i Subnewornk kiest macan Address No Address Server I es NTP IP Configuration Messaging JESNMA NTP Bandwidth NTP Server Configuration IP address of Primary NTP Server E 0 o o IP address of Secondary NTP Server o o 0 0 Polling period 5 seconds Time Zone GMT Greenwich Mean
258. odicon Quantum Ethernet modules are required e 140 CPS 114 x0 power supply e 140 CPU 651 50 CPU e 140 NOE 77101 communication module Also a PC running Windows 2000 or XP with Schneider s Unity Pro configuration software installed on it is required Finally either a USB or a Modbus cable is required to connect the PC to the network PLC Intended Audience This user guide is intended for anyone who is involved in installing and configuring Modicon Quantum Ethernet modules in a network arrangement that can perform a variety of communication services Anyone reading this guide should e be familiar with Ethernet networks and the TCP IP protocol e understand the operation of PLCs 352 33002479 07 2011 Installation and Configuration Installation Introduction The Modicon Quantum Ethernet modules used for the example in this guide may vary from the ones available at your site You can substitute the appropriate power supply CPU and Ethernet communication module s and other Quantum modules to make up a rack similar to the one described below Assembling the Rack Assemble the modules into the rack as follows Step Action 1 Insert the power supply into the leftmost slot 1 on the rack 2 Add the CPU to the next two slots 2 amp 3 on the right of the power supply 3 Place the remaining Quantum communication modules beginning with slot 4 to complete your installation In our example see
259. of addresses sent to the slave CONTROL 4 Determines the MW starting register in the slave to which the data is written e g 1 MW1 49 MW49 CONTROL 5 Routing register Most significant byte network adapter module slot Least significant byte destination drop number CONTROLJ 6 Terminator FF hex CONTROL 9 33002479 07 2011 151 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks Get Local Statistics Description AGet Local Statistics operation reads the data from the local node in one cycle and does not require a master transaction path To program an MBP_MSTR block to Get Local Statistics use function code 3 see page 137 Network Implementation AGet Local Statistics operation can be performed on Modbus Plus and TCP IP Ethernet networks see page 157 Conirol Block Usage for Modbus Plus Register Meaning CONTROL 1 3 get local statistics CONTROL 2 Indicates the error status CONTROL 3 Number of addresses to be read from local statistics 0 37 Note The size of databuf must be at least the size of this entry CONTROL 4 First address from which the statistics table must be read Reg1 0 CONTROL 5 Routing register 1 is used to specify the address routing path address 1 of 5 of the node during a network transfer The last byte in the routing path that is not 0 is the destination mode Control Block Usage for TCP IP Ethernet Register
260. of the earth s rotation a leap second is inserted in the UTC time every 18 months by an INTERNATIONAL EARTH ROTATION SERVICE IERS 2 Leap seconds will be inserted automatically as needed If needed leap seconds are inserted at the end of the last minute in June or December as commanded by the NTP server 248 33002479 07 2011 Using the NTP Time Service Using the R_NTPC Block for Time Synchronization R_NTPC Representation The block reads the Ethernet network system time and transfers it into specified parameters The additional parameter EN should be configured R_NTPC EN ENO OUT1 Display_NTPC OUT2 Calc_NTPC STATUS Status R_NTPC block has a 16 bit status word R_NTPC Parameter Description Description of parameters Parameter Data Type Description Display_NTPC DT INT NTP clock value displayed in OUT1 year month day hours minutes and seconds using the DT format e milliseconds as an INT Calc_NTPC UDINT INT NTP clock value displayed in OUT2 seconds as an UDINT e fractions of a second as an INT 33002479 07 2011 249 Using the NTP Time Service Parameter Data Type Description Status INT Low Byte High Byte Description 0 0 un initialized state 1 0 illegal 0 1 The CPU is out of synchronization with the NTP server but the clock has been updated at least once by an external server
261. oid any possible problem related to the NOE s DHCP server on the corporate network ensure that the DHCP server is not running in the NOE by not having address entries in the configuration If there are no configured devices in the address server configuration page see page 219 then the NOE will not start the DHCP server Faulty Device Replacement Faulty device replacement and the address server are discussed in detail at Address Server Configuration Faulty Device Replacement see page 219 33002479 07 2011 75 Ethernet Communication Services SNMP and Schneider Private MIB Overview Overview Introduction Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is configured on your NOE or 140 CPU 651 x0 Network management software allows a network manager to e monitor and control network components e isolate problems and find their causes e query devices such as a host computer s routers switches and bridges to determine their status e obtain statistics about the networks to which they are attached Simple Network Management Protocol MIB Private MIB Your NOE module or 140 CPU 651 x0 controller supports the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP which is the standard protocol used to manage a local area network LAN SNMP defines exactly how a manager communicates with an agent The SNMP defines the format of e requests that a manager sends to an agent e replies that the agent returns to the manager Ea
262. om NOE B NOE B detects that its PLC has changed state from Standby PLC to Primary CPU NOE B stops all its Ethernet services sends a UDP request to NOE A for the synchronization of the IP address swap starts its watchdog timer with a 500 ms time out setting and waits for an UDP response from NOE A When NOE A receives the UDP request from NOE B or after the NOE A watchdog timer times out it stops all its Ethernet services e f it has received a UDP request NOE B sends a UDP response to NOE A e f its watchdog timer has timed out NOE B does not send a UDP response NOE A then swaps its IP address and starts the Secondary services NOE B swaps IP addresses and starts Ethernet services as Primary NOE After NOE A senses that its local CPU changes from Offline to Standby it takes the Secondary IP address 9 NOE B now becomes the Primary NOE 10 NOE B opens all client connections listens for all server connections and reestablishes those connections 11 NOE A listens for all server connections and reestablishes those connections NOTE During the Hot Standby switchover there is a loss of communication during 500 ms between the PLC and the HMI and or Unity Pro When either the CPU stops or the Hot Standby CPU goes to Offline mode two events occur 1 NOE goes to the Offline mode 2 NOE uses the IP address of the present configuration The IP address assignment when going offl
263. on ACTIVE None ON while the instruction is active ERROR None ON if the MBP_MSTR operation is terminated prior to completion SUCCESS None ON operation successful CONTROL INT UINT Control block is the first of several network dependant contiguous holding words and the first of nine contiguous words entered in the top node The remaining eight words are Displayed Identifies one of the MBP_MSTR 13 First implied displays error status see Mail Service Error Codes see page 264 Second implied displays length number of words transferred Third implied not used Fourth implied high byte slot address of the NOE module or OxFE for the 140 CPU 651 x0 low byte 0 not used Fifth implied not used Sixth implied not used Seventh implied not used Eighth implied not used 262 33002479 07 2011 Using the Mail Service Parameter Data Type Description DATABUF INT UINT The DATABUF parameter is the address of the buffer including the data inserted into the body of the email message The data should be in ASCII format starting at the second word Note 1 Least significant byte of the first word contains a valid configured mail header should be of value 1 2 or 3 2 Most significant byte of the first word contains the length of the dynamic part of the message s subject field The length must be between 0 and 238 ch
264. on host names F An embedded Web server that the user customizes permitting user access to controller diagnostics and Ethernet configuration A logical grouping of contiguous bits that convey one kind of information such as the start or end of a message an address data or an error check A gateway that controls access to a network or an application A group of bits that form a discrete block of information Frames contain network control information or data The size and composition of a frame is determined by the network technology being used Two common framing types are Ethernet Il and IEEE 802 3 File Transfer Protocol The protocol over TCP used to read or write a file into a remote station the FTP server side 33002479 07 2011 373 Glossary gateway A device that connects networks with dissimilar network architectures and that operates at the Application Layer This term may refer to a router Global Data Publish Subscribe Service of inter PLC synchronization shared databases half duplex HDX A method of data transmission capable of communication in two directions but only one direction at a time host A node on a network hostname A domain name given to a specific computer on a network and used to address that computer HTTP A domain name given to a specific computer on a network and used to address that computer hub A device that connects a series of flexible and centralized modules
265. ontrolled device e lf the Unity Pro variable is already managed the update is cancelled For an already managed variable there are 2 options either 1 Use the device configuration tool ACS or the DTM to rename the variable 2 Delete the old managed variable using the tool that manages the variable then use the tool to perform an Update After performing one of these options use the Update button again on the device being updated to complete the import without a conflict Permanent Deletion of a Managed Variable Managed variables cannot be deleted directly from the Data Editor Removing a managed variable from a configuration must be done from the tool ACS or the DTM that manages the device either delete the device using the DTM or delete the Symbol using the ACS NOTE During an Update all managed variables are deleted and recreated during synchronization between Unity Pro and the device Partial Import of a Managed Variable Starting with Unity Pro V5 0 the managed variables become unmanaged during a partial import from an XSY file This allows deletion of the variables if the linked device is not also imported After importing variables from an XSY file an Update is needed to resynchronize the managed variables linked to a device During this Update a conflict box appears to allow validation of the replacement managed variables 33002479 07 2011 215 Transferring Data with the I O Scanner I O Scanner Response
266. operation can be performed on Modbus Plus TCP IP Ethernet and SY MAX Ethernet networks Conirol Block Usage for Modbus Plus Register Meaning CONTROL 1 1 write data CONTROL 2 Indicates the error status CONTROL 3 Number of addresses sent to the slave CONTROL 4 Determines the MW starting register in the slave to which the data is written e g 1 MW1 49 MW49 CONTROLJ 5 Routing register 1 is used to specify the address routing path address 1 of s 5 of the node during a network transfer CONTROLI 9 The last byte in the routing path that is not 0 is the destination node Control Block Usage for TCP IP Ethernet Register Meaning CONTROL 1 1 write data CONTROL 2 Indicates the error status CONTROL 3 Number of addresses sent to the slave CONTROLI4 Determines the CONTROLI start address of the slave to which the data is written CONTROLJ5 Routing register Most significant byte network adapter module slot Least significant byte MBP on Ethernet transporter MET mapping index 150 33002479 07 2011 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks Register Meaning CONTROL 6 Each address contains 1 byte of the 32 bit IP address CONTROLI9 Control Block Usage for SY MAX Ethernet Register Meaning CONTROL 1 1 Write data CONTROL 2 Indicates the error status CONTROL 3 Number
267. operation that is valid for TCP IP CONTROL 2 Indicates the error status CONTROL 3 Indicates the length i e the number of data units transferred max 100 CONTROL 4 Indicates MSTR operation dependent information CONTROL 5 Routing register used to specify a destination node during network transfer Most significant byte source node address i e the NOE slot for the NOE module When using an integrated Ethernet on the CPU this byte must be set to 254 FE hex regardless of the CPU slot Least significant byte destination node address i e a value that represents a direct or bridge address If there is no bridge the value in the least significant byte is set to 0 If there is a bridge this value contains the MBP for the Ethernet mapping index MET If the NOE is inserted in slot 7 on the module rack and the Ethernet mapping index MET is 6 the routing register looks as follows value 0x0706 most significant least significant byte byte ofojo ofoji i ifofo o fojo iysijo Most significant byte Slots 1 16 Least significant byte MBP on Ethernet Transporter MET mapping index CONTROL 6 Byte 4 MSB of the 32 bit destination IP address CONTROLI7 Byte 3 of the 32 bit destination IP address CONTROL 8 Byte 2 of the 32 bit destination IP address CONTROL 9 Byte 1 LSB of the 32 bit destination IP address CON
268. or example MW addresses 176 33002479 07 2011 Global Data Publish Subscribe Utility 5 Introduction The material in this section presents the Global Data Publish Subscribe utility available on the following modules e 140 NOE 771 01 e 140 NOE 771 11 e HE CPU 651 x0 For more information on the publish subscribe model go to this URL http www isa org journals intech feature printable 1 1171 596 00 htm1 What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Planning the Global Data Publish Subscribe System 178 Multicast Filtering 182 Quantum NOE Global Data Configuration 184 Configuration of Global Data Publish Subscribe by the Web for NOE 771 x1 186 33002479 07 2011 177 Global Data Publish Subscribe Planning the Global Data Publish Subscribe System Overview Global Data service is a real time publisher subscriber mechanism that provides the most efficient data exchange for PLC application coordination Devices that support Global Data are arranged in a distribution group for the purpose of application variable exchange and synchronization Each Global Data device can publish up to one network application variable and subscribe to up to 64 network application variables The Quantum NOE s embedded Global Data Configuration Web page provides a configuration screen see page 184 to determine which and how many application
269. or the Modicon Quantum I O Scanner Device Control Block With the Device Control Block disable an individual entry device in the I O Scanner table by checking the box and setting the associated bit in Device Control Block to 1 Repetitive Rate Step In the Repetitive Rate Step field enter a rate of time for how often you want the I O scanner to send a query to the device after the rate has timed out I O Scan List The I O scan list is a configuration table that identifies the targets to which repetitive communications are authorized While the controller is running the Ethernet module transfers data to and from the controller s registers as indicated by the I O scan list I O Scanner Parameters The I O Scanner parameters are described in the following table Parameter Value Max No of Devices 64 140 NOE 771 00 Version 2 2 or earlier 128 140 NOE 771 00 Version 3 0 or later 140 NOE 771 01 and 140 NOE 771 11 only 128 140 CPU 651 x0 Max No of Input Words 4000 Max No of Output Words 4000 190 33002479 07 2011 Transferring Data with the I O Scanner Parameter Value Health Timeout Value User configured 1 65535 ms in 1 ms increments Last Value Input User configured Zero or Hold IP Address User configured IP address of scanned device Slave IP Local and Remote Register User configured Reference Repetitive Rate The rate at which data will be scanned
270. ot choose an entry a message appears When the Change an Entry button is selected the Address Server Node Configuration page appears The information displayed is for the device selected Address Server Node Configuration Role Name ENT7 o Device Mac address Device IP address 139 160 234 172 Subnet Mask 255 255 254 0 Gateway 139 160 1341 1 Add the Entry Reset the Form Show Address Server Configuration Deleting an Entry Before using this button you must select an entry in the database by choosing one of the radio buttons in the first column If you do not choose an entry a message appears The entry selected will be removed from the database Before completely deleting an entry a warning message appears Click Yes if you want to delete the entry No if you don t If you click Yes a dialog box appears Microsoft Internet Explorer Eg This will delete the entry 2 Are you sure cance R 33002479 07 2011 225 Address Server Configuration Faulty Device Replacement Click OK Another dialog box appears notifying you that the deletion was successful Microsoft Internet Explorer Ea A N Successfully deleted entry Highlighting Anomalies If there are anomalies with the entered configuration parameter information the system indicates anomalies using a highlighting mechanism All the configurations appear in purple and italic and the device with configuration
271. otected register found by the SY MAX remote device F710 Receiver overflow found by the SY MAX remote device 7110 Invalid length found by the SY MAX remote device 7111 Remote device not active no connection occurs when retry attempts and time out have been used up found by the SY MAX remote device 7113 Invalid parameter in a read operation found by the SY MAX remote device 711D Invalid route found by the SY MAX remote device 7149 Invalid parameter in a write operation found by the SY MAX remote device 714B Invalid drop number found by the SY MAX remote device 7101 Invalid opcode found by the SY MAX server 7203 Invalid address found by the SY MAX server 7209 Attempt to write to a write protected register found by the SY MAX server F720 Receiver overflow found by the SY MAX server 7210 Invalid length found by the SY MAX server 7211 Remote device not active no connection occurs when retry attempts and time out have been used up found by the SY MAX server 7213 Invalid parameter in a read operation found by the SY MAX server 721D Invalid route found by the SY MAX server 7249 Invalid parameter in a write operation found by the SY MAX server 724B Invalid drop number found by the SY MAX server 146 33002479 07 2011 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks Hex Error Description
272. otocol Overview Introduction The following information describes the Modbus Application Protocol MBAP The Modbus Application Protocol MBAP is a layer 7 protocol providing peer to peer communication between programmable logic controllers PLCs and other host based nodes on a LAN Collectively these nodes implement all or part of a control application used for industrial automation applications in the automotive tire and rubber food and beverage and utilities industries to name a few Client Server Communications Limitations Modbus protocol transactions are typical request response message pairs between a client node and a server node These nodes function as follows Client The node that initiates a data transaction is called a client The Modicon Quantum Ethernet module provides the user with the capability to transfer data to and from nodes on a TCP IP network using a communication instruction All PLCs that support networking communication capabilities over Ethernet can use either the MBP_MSTR Ladder Logic instruction to read or write controller information or IEC communication blocks Server The node that receives an inquiry is the server Using the standard Modbus TCP protocol the Modicon Quantum Ethernet module provides access to controller data Any device PC HMI package another PLC or any Modbus TCP compliant device can access data from the PLC The Modbus TCP server also allows programming panels to log into the
273. otocol is indicated by the value of the proto_id parameter in the mbap_pdu Currently the only assignment is 0 meaning Modbus Application Protocol 33002479 07 2011 347 Ethernet TCP IP Modbus Application Protocol Closing a TCP Connection Overview A TCP connection can be closed by one of the following e a remote station which closes a connection by sending a TCP IP connection closure message e the local PLC When the Maximum Number of Connections are Open If the PLC receives a request to open a new connection when the maximum number of connections has been reached the PLC e closes an open but inactive connection then e opens a new connection To identify which connection to close the PLC examines groups of connections for inactive open connections in the following sequence 1 non referenced connections to devices that are not configured as part of the Unity application 2 client connections 3 server connections If the PLC discovers one or more inactive connections in the first group it closes the oldest inactive connection in that group then opens a new connection If no inactive connection is discovered in the first group the PLC examines the second group of connections and if it discovers one or more inactive connections in the second group the PLC closes the oldest inactive connection in that group and opens a new connection If no inactive connection is discovered in the first and second groups
274. p name for allocating the variables of the existing network description When creating the different Ethernet networks a logical connection is arranged here between the network and the variable declaration ID Variable ID 33002479 07 2011 185 Global Data Publish Subscribe Configuration of Global Data Publish Subscribe by the Web for NOE 771 x1 Modeling the System Configuration There are two methods of configuring a system e Configuring each device separately Configure each device through the Global Data Configuration Web page see page 281 Repeat for each device in the system Entry errors may occur because the same information must be reentered on each and every device possibly as many as 64 times e Copying the configuration preferred Configure all variable IDs symbols descriptions and lengths on one NOE upload to your PC download the same configuration to all devices and finish with a small customization to each node NOTE The Copy Configuration method reduces entry errors allows for verifying the configuration and permits you to determine if the system is satisfactory for your needs before implementing the configuration system wide You enter the variable ID symbol description and length only once thus maintaining consistency When your planning is complete follow the Configuring Your NOE steps below We present these steps both as a picture and as instructions 186 33002479 07 2
275. password and clicking the OK button the Modify Passwords page displays 64 33002479 07 2011 Product Description Modify Passwords Page A single web page is used to modify both the HTTP and Data Monitor Write passwords Modify Passwords HTTP User Name and Password New User Name New Password Confirm Password Change HTTP Access Data Monitor Write Password Write Password New Password Confirm Password Change Write Password Copyright 1998 2004 Schneider Automation SAS All rights reserved Changing Security Access Parameters A system administrator should change the default username USER and password USER to restrict future access to the system After you decide whether you are changing the HTTP or Write Password security parameters follow the appropriate procedure below HTTP Username and Password Step Action 1 Type a new username in the New User Name field 2 Type a new password in the New Password field 3 Confirm the new password in the Confirm Password field 4 Click the Change HTTP Access button Data Monitor Write Password Step Action 1 Type the old password in the Write Password field 2 Type a new password in the New Password field 3 Confirm the new password in the Confirm Password field 4 Click the Change Write Password button 33002479 07 2011 65 Product Description
276. perational webPassword 2 switch to enable or disable the use of Web passwords e 1 disabled e 2 enabled webSuccessfullAccess 3 total number of successful accesses to the Web site webFailedAttempts 4 total number of unsuccessful accesses to the Web site 33002479 07 2011 239 SNMP Address Server Subtree The Address _ Server 6 subtree or group contains the objects related to the Address Server service The Address Server can be either a BOOTP server or a DHCP server Service Indicates addressServerStatus 1 global status of the address server service e 1 idle 2 operational Equipment Profile Subtree The Equipment_Profiles 7 subtree contains a set of common objects Service Indicates profileProductName 1 the commercial name of the communication product in a string form for example 140 NOE 771 11 profileVersion 2 the software version of the communication product in a string form for example Vx y or V1 1 profileCommunicationServices 3 the communication services supported by the profile Ports02Messaging I O scanning Messaging Global Data Web and Address Server profileGlobalStatus 4 the global status of the communication module e 1 NOK e 2 OK profileConfigMode 5 the IP configuration mode of the communication module e 1 Local The IP configuration is created locally e 2 dhcpSe
277. r TCP IP Abstract Syntax Notation Grammar used to define a protocol OSI scope 33002479 07 2011 371 Glossary BOOTP bps bridge BSP client BOOTstrap Protocol A protocol used at power up in order to get an IP address that is provided by a BOOTP server and is based on the module s MAC address Bits per second A device that connects two or more physical networks that use the same protocol Bridges read frames and decide whether to transmit or block them based on their destination address Board Support Package A software package that maps a specific real time operating system RTOSO onto a specific hardware C A computer process requesting service from other computer processes Cyclic Data Exchange default gateway DHCP Provides data transfer between two or more NOE 771 xx controllers on a TCP IP network D The IP address of the network or host to which all packets addressed to an unknown network or host are sent The default gateway is typically a router or other device Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol An improved version of BOOTP 372 33002479 07 2011 Glossary DHCP Client DHCP Server DNS FactoryCast field firewall frame framing types FTP Host on the network obtaining its configuration from a DHCP Server Server providing configuration parameters to a DHCP Client Domain Name System A protocol within TCP IP used to find IP addresses based
278. r WordArr5 with TCP IP Ethernet Element Data Type Meaning WordArr5 1 WORD Low value byte MBP on Ethernet Transporter MET mapping index High value byte Slot of the NOE module WordArr5 2 WORD Byte 4 MSB of the 32 bit destination IP address 33002479 07 2011 119 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks Element Data Type Meaning WordArr5 3 WORD Byte 3 of the 32 bit destination IP address WordArr5 4 WORD Byte 2 of the 32 bit destination IP address WordArr5 5 WORD Byte 1 LSB of the 32 bit destination IP address Function Mode of the CREAD_REG Block Although a large number of CREAD_REG function blocks can be programmed only sixteen read operations may be active at the same time In such a case it is insignificant whether they are the result of this function block or others for example MBP_MSTR READ_REG All function blocks use one data transaction path and require multiple cycles to complete a job NOTE A TCP IP communication between a Quantum PLC NOE 771 anda Momentum PLC all TCP IP CPUs and all TCP IP I O modules is only possible when only one read or write job is carried out in every cycle If several jobs are sent per PLC cycle the communication stops without generating an error message in the status register of the function block NOTE A TCP IP communication between a Quantum PLC NOE 211 00 anda Momentum PLC all TCP IP CPUs and all TCP IP I
279. r similar access customers can expect improved methods for monitoring and controlling factory processes at reduced costs Transparent Ready A Schneider Electric product line based on universal Ethernet TCP IP and Web technologies These industrial automation products Trademark Telemecanique and electrical distribution products TrademarkMerlin Gerin can be integrated into real time data sharing systems with no need for interfaces The product line includes Sensor and preactuator type field products simple or intelligent controllers and PLCs HMI applications and dedicated gateways and servers U UDP User Datagram Protocol A protocol that transmits data over IP Uni Te T l mecanique unified application protocol used in S7 Premium and Micro PLC ranges URL Uniform Resource Locator The network address of a file UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair A type of cabling consisting of insulated cable strands that are twisted together in pairs 380 33002479 07 2011 Glossary W Web Worldwide interconnection of stations based on Internet protocols The most famous one is HTTP Web server WWW World Wide Web A hypertext based distributed information system in which clients and servers are freely available 33002479 07 2011 381 Glossary 382 33002479 07 2011 Index 0 9 10 100BASE T cable distances 53 100BASE FX cable distances 53 10BASE T cable options 52 hubs 52 140CPU65150 20 14
280. r the MSTR operation 144 33002479 07 2011 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks CTE Error Codes for SY MAX and TCP IP Ethernet CTE Error Codes for SY MAX and TCP IP Ethernet The following error codes are displayed in the CONTROL 1 register of the control block if there is a problem with the Ethernet configuration extension table CTE in your program configuration CTE error codes for SY MAX and TCP IP Ethernet Hex Error Description Code 7001 There is no Ethernet configuration extension 7002 The CTE is not available for access 7003 The offset is not valid 7004 Offset length are not valid 7005 Bad data field in the CTE 33002479 07 2011 145 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks SY MAX Specific Error Codes SY MAX Specific Error Codes When utilizing SY MAX Ethernet three additional types of errors may appear in the CONTROL 1 register of the control block The error codes have the following meaning e 71xx Error Errors found by the SY MAX remote device e 72xx Error Errors found by the server e 73xx Error Errors found by the Quantum translator SY MAX Specific Hexadecimal Error Codes SY MAX specific hexadecimal error codes Hex Error Code Description 7101 Invalid opcode found by the SY MAX remote device 7103 Invalid address found by the SY MAX remote device 7109 Attempt to write to a write pr
281. r the bit range that applies to your module s software version 0 NOE 2x1 1 ENT 2 M1E 3 NOE 771 00 4 ETY 5 CIP 6 reserved 7 140 CPU 651 x0 8 reserved 9 reserved 10 NOE 771 10 11 NOE 771 01 12 NOE 771 11 13 15 reserved 33002479 07 2011 159 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks TCP IP Ethernet Error Codes TCP IP Ethernet Error Codes An error in an MSTR routine via TCP IP Ethernet may produce one of the following errors in the MSTR control block The error code appears as Mmss where e Mis the high code e mis the low code e ss is a subcode Hexadecimal Error Codes TCP IP Ethernet Hexadecimal error codes TCP IP Ethernet Hex Error Meaning Code 1001 Abort by user 2001 An operation type that is not supported has been specified in the control block 2002 One or more control block parameters were modified while the MSTR element was active this only applies to operations which require several cycles for completion Control block parameters my only be modified in inactive MSTR components 2003 Invalid value in the length field of the control block 2004 Invalid value in the offset field of the control block 2005 Invalid value in the length and offset fields of the control block 2006 Unauthorized data field on slave 2008 Unauthorized network routing path on slave 200E The control block is not assigned or parts of the control
282. rdArr5 AddrFld STATUS WORD Parameter Description Description of block parameters Parameter Data Type Meaning REQ BOOL start read operation once SLAVEREG DINT offset address of the first MW word 4x register in the slave to be read from NO_REG INT number of registers to be read from slave AddrFld WordArr5 data structure describing the TCP IP address NDR BOOL set to 1 for one cycle after reading new data ERROR BOOL set to 1 for one scan in case of error STATUS WORD error code REG_READ_ WORD first MW word 4x register for read values 33002479 07 2011 125 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks Elementary Description for WordArr5 with TCP IP Ethernet Elementary description for WordArr5 with TCP IP Ethernet Element Data Type Meaning WordArr5 1 WORD low value byte MBP on Ethernet Transporter MET mapping index high value byte Slot of the NOE module WordArr5 2 WORD byte 4 MSB of the 32 bit destination IP address WordArr5 3 WORD byte 3 of the 32 bit destination IP address WordArr5 4 WORD byte 2 of the 32 bit destination IP address WordArr5 5 WORD byte 1 LSB of the 32 bit destination IP address Function Mode of READ_REG Blocks REQ Although a large number of READ_REG function blocks can be programmed only 16 read operations may be active at the same time In such a case it is insignificant whether they are the result of this function b
283. re September 1985 RFC783 The Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP rev 2 K R Solons MIT June 1981 33002479 07 2011 349 Ethernet TCP IP Modbus Application Protocol 350 33002479 07 2011 Installation and Configuration of a Modicon Quantum Platform D Overview This quick start guide describes how to install and configure a Modicon Quantum Ethernet module It also sets up the I O scanning service to allow data transfer to occur between the PLC and a remote slave device Instructions for connecting to the module s embedded web server pages are also provided at the end of the guide What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Overview 352 Installation 353 Configuring the Rack with Unity Pro 354 Configuring the Ethernet Network with Unity Pro 357 Configuring the I O Scanning Service 360 Building and Downloading the Configuration Program 365 Diagnosing the Ethernet Module Using the Web Server 368 33002479 07 2011 351 Installation and Configuration Overview Introduction This quick start guide explains how to install and configure Modicon Quantum Ethernet modules and set up a I O scanning communication service The following types of modules are applicable to this guide 140 NOE 771 01 140 NOE 771 11 140 CPU 651 50 140 CPU 651 60 Hardware Software Requirements For the example discussed in this guide the following M
284. re shows the message that is generated if you click on the Submit FTP Password Change button Ethernet Configuration Successfully changed User Name and Password Please click Reboot Device button to use the new password Reboot Device Copyright 1999 2004 Schneider Automation SAS All rights reserved Clicking the Reboot Device button will reset the username and password for the NOE board NOTE The reboot requires about 40 seconds With large applications reboot may require up to one 1 minute During the reboot all services provided by the NOE module are not available 33002479 07 2011 63 Product Description Establishing HTTP and Write Passwords for NOE Overview The following information describes how to set the passwords for HTTP and Data Monitor Write for the NOE Connect to the Web Page Before you can change the HTTP or Data Monitor Write passwords you must connect to the correct web page Step Action 1 Enter the URL for example http hostname secure embedded http_passwd_config htm At that URL geen erase a user name and password in the dialog box Connect to 192 168 100 123 BA to 192 168 100 123 7 Security User name z Password I Remember my password Cancel Note The default User Name is USER and the default Password is USER Both should be changed by the system administrator during module installation Upon supplying the user name
285. read and deciphered by the PLC OS portion of the firmware and not by the OS loader portion The Quantum processors have a set of system menus that enable the operator to e perform PLC operations i e start PLC stop PLC e display module parameters i e communications parameters e switch to the maintenance mode in Safety processors The key positions are shown in the table below Key PLC Operation Position unlocked e System menu operations can be invoked and module parameters can be modified by the operator with the LCD and keypad u e Memory protection is OFF e You can switch to Maintenance mode in Safety processors locked e No system menu operations can be invoked and module parameters are read only amp Memory protection is ON e Safe mode forced in Safety processors Switching the key switch position from locked to unlocked or vice versa turns on the LCD s backlight NOTE For more explanations about Maintenance and Safe mode of Safety processors Pressing the reset button 12 forces a cold start of the PLC 24 33002479 07 2011 Product Description LCD Display The liquid crystal display LCD 3 has 2 lines with 16 characters each with changeable backlight state and contrast The backlight handling is entirely automated to save the life of the LCDs The backlight turns on when one of the following occurs e akey is pressed e the key
286. ree fields must be filled in e Device IP address e Subnet Mask e Gateway Choose either the Role Name or Device MAC address field When one field is selected the other is made unavailable Adding Entries If you are adding a device the page appears with values You need to enter either a Role Name or a MAC Address If you are adding an entry submit your selection using the Add the Entry button Modifying Entries If you are modifying an entry the Device IP address Subnet Mask and Gateway fields display with the current configuration If you are modifying an entry submit your selection using the Reset the Form button Each field of the Address Server Node Configuration page has restrictions which are detailed below e Role Name Each role name must be unique Only letters numerals and underscores are allowed No more than 16 characters are allowed and no spaces are allowed e Device MAC Address This address must be in hexadecimal format and six 6 bytes long 6x2 characters The MAC address can be entered with or without a delimiting character between each pair of lower or upper case hexadecimal characters The delimiting characters improve readability There are three choices for a delimiting character e Space spacebar e Colon e Hyphen e Device IP Address The IP address must use the standard numeric Internet Protocol address that uniquely identifies each computer on the network The IP address is a 32 bit
287. refreshed at a rate determined by the performance of the Embedded Server network and client CPU 274 33002479 07 2011 Embedded Web Pages CPU Configuration Screen Data Field Descriptions Description Fields The following table describes the description fields on the CPU Configuration Screen see page 274 Field Description System Memory Kb Amount of system memory used Extended Memory Kb Amount of extended memory used Total Memory Bytes Total memory used in bytes I O Map Words Number of I O words mapped Segments Number of segments DCP Drop ID Drop number for distributed control Memory Protect Position of the memory protect switch Constant Sweep Current status of constant sweep Optimize Current status of optimization Word Fields The following table describes the Word fields on the CPU Configuration Screen see page 274 Field Description M valid address of M Al valid address of l AIW valid address of IW MW valid address of MW Battery Coil address of battery bit Timer Register address of timer word Time of Day Clock address of timer of day clock Stopped Codes reason for controlled stopping ASCII Fields The ASCII column on the CPU Configuration Screen see page 274 contains information about the ASCII fields 33002479 07 2011 275 Embedded Web Pages Remote I O Status Overview The Remote I O Status page gives a
288. ress serving as an identification of sender or recipient The software code that implements the protocol being used In the case of the NOE modules it is TCP IP Shielded Twisted Pair A type of cabling consisting of several strands of wire surrounded by foil shielding twisted together A physical or logical network within an IP network that shares a network address with other portions of the network A bit mask used to identify or determine which bits in an IP address correspond to the network address and which bits correspond to the subnet portions of the address The subnet mask is the network address plus the bits reserved for identifying the subnetwork A network device that connects two or more separate network segments and allows traffic to be passed between them A switch determines whether a frame should be blocked or transmitted based on its destination address T Transmission Control Protocol 33002479 07 2011 379 Glossary TCP IP A protocol suite consisting of the Transmission Control Protocol and the Internet Protocol the suite of communications protocols on which the Internet is based Transparent Factory Transparent Factory is a Schneider Electric initiative to bring Internet technologies to the factory floor to information enable Schneider Products to provide easy transparent access to plant operational data over open networks with open tools Interfacing with products from other manufacturers fo
289. riable or unlocated variable Error code see Runtime errors The parameter can be specified as direct address located variable or unlocated variable 130 33002479 07 2011 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks TCP_IP_ADDR Function Description The TCP_IP_ADDR block enables the input of TCP IP addresses for the READ_REG see page 125 CREAD_REG see page 119 WRITE_REG see page 128 and CWRITE_REG see page 122 blocks The address is transferred in the form of a data structure EN and ENO can be projected as additional parameters NOTE When programming the TCP_IP_ADDR function you must be familiar with your network s routing procedures Symbol Block representation TCP_IP_ ADDR BYTE Map Idx BYTE Slot_ID AddrFld WordArr5 BYTE Ip B4 BYTE Ip B3 BYTE Ip B2 BYTE Ip B1 Parameter Description Description of parameters Parameter Data Type Meaning Map_lIdx BYTE Map Index MBP on Ethernet Transporter MET mapping index Slot_ID BYTE slot ID slot of the NOE module Ip_B4 BYTE byte 4 MSB of the 32 bit destination IP address Ip_B3 BYTE byte 3 of the 32 bit destination IP address Ip_B2 BYTE byte 2 of the 32 bit destination IP address Ip_B1 BYTE byte 1 LSB of the 32 bit destination IP address AddrFld WordArr5 data structure used to transfer the TCP IP address 33002479 07 2011 131 Transferring Data Using Commu
290. ries or changes to the symbol description do NOT affect or change a variable or the system The symbol used in the Quantum product line has no relation to the Concept Unity product line symbol s 33002479 07 2011 179 Global Data Publish Subscribe Table of Global Data Limits Parameter Limit Maximum number of publish variables per device ak Maximum size for the publish variable 512 registers 512 Words 16 bits 1024 bytes device Maximum number of subscription variables per 64 63 if this device is publishing device Maximum size for the subscribe variables per 2048 registers 2048 Words 16 bits 4096 bytes NOTE We recommend that you consider the following when planning e Allow for a 10 to 20 increase in growth of any variable e Add variables at the end of the configuration where they do not affect the existing application address Therefore you avoid changing the existing addresses in your configuration which can be a time consuming process Table of Global Data Planning Spreadsheet Parameter Description Parameter Checking Reserved Variable Id Represents the Data ID on the NOE s Global Data Configuration Web page Symbol Symbolic name for Global Data exchange Length Words Registers Length of Global Data information Number of MW words 4x registers or unlocated variables Device Number Number of devices up
291. rk Implementation A clear remote statistics operation can be performed on Modbus Plus and TCP IP Ethernet networks see page 157 Conirol Block Usage for Modbus Plus Register Meaning CONTROL 1 8 clear remote statistics CONTROL 2 Indicates the error status CONTROL 3 Reserved CONTROLJ4 Reserved CONTROLJ 5 Routing register 1 is used to specify the address routing path address 1 of one 5 of the destination node during a network transfer CONTROL 9 The last byte in the routing path that is not 0 is the destination mode Control Block Usage for TCP IP Ethernet Register Meaning CONTROL 1 8 clear remote statistics CONTROL 2 Indicates the error status CONTROL 3 Reserved CONTROLJ4 Reserved CONTROLJ 5 Routing Register Most significant byte network adapter module slot CONTROLJ6 Each address contains one byte of the 32 bit IP address where the MSB a is in CONTROL 6 and the LSB is in CONTROL 9 CONTROLI9 156 33002479 07 2011 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks TCP IP Ethernet Network Statistics TCP IP Ethernet Network Statistics A TCP IP Ethernet module replies to local and remote statistics commands from the BP_MSTR block with the the contents of the databuf array see the information in the table below Word Meaning 00 to 02 MAC address Word Co
292. rporate Network Keep these points in mind when operating on a corporate network e Before placing the NOE on a corporate network Schneider Electric recommends that you discuss the installation with your MIS department It is likely that your company s corporate network has at least one DHCP server running already If the NOE s DHCP server is running on the same network it may disturb the network e To avoid any possible problem related to the NOE s DHCP server on the corporate network you have to ensure that the DHCP server is not running in the NOE by not having address entries in the configuration If there are no configured devices in the address server Configuration page then the NOE will not start the DHCP server Available FDR Agents Three FDR agents are available e Momentum ENT e Micro ETZ e ATV58 The role name prm configuration files are stored in the NOE in non volatile memory Therefore after a power failure all configurations will be available BOOTP and DHCP Compatible Devices Use either the MAC address or the role name see page 285 to assign IP addresses Therefore you may use the DHCP server with devices that support BOOTP only such as Momentum ENT v1 33002479 07 2011 221 Address Server Configuration Faulty Device Replacement Understanding Faulty Device Replacement Understanding Confirmation and Error Messages In addition to highlighting errors the system provides confirmat
293. rror 5107 SMTP HELO request failed 5108 SMTP MAIL request failed SMTP server may require authentication 5109 SMTP RCPT request failed 510A No recipient has been accepted by the SMTP server 510B SMTP DATA request failed 510C Send email request contains an invalid length 510D Authentication failed 510E A Reset component request has been received while the connection was open 264 33002479 07 2011 Using the Mail Service Electronic Mail Notification Service Subtree Summary The electronic mail delivery service subtree contains the following objects Service Description emaillndex 1 index value in the email service table smtpStatus 2 global status of the SMTP service e idle 1 no configuration operational 2 operational and running stopped 3 stopped smtpSrvAdadr 3 IP address of the remote SMTP server smtpMailSentCnt 4 total number of emails sent to the network and successfully acknowledged by server smtpErrCnt 5 total number of emails not sent to the network e sent but not successfully acknowledged by server The smtpLastErr 6 object details the errors smtpLastErr 6 last error code see details at Configuring an NOE with TFE Private MIB smtpLastMailElapsedTime 7 number of seconds elapsed since last successful email sent smtpLnkSrvStatus 8 status of link between communication module and remote SMTP server
294. rt address and the Publish Subscribe setting NOTE The Global Data Configuration page is populated with data from the glbdata ini configuration file Uploading a glbdat ini File to a PC Step Action si At the DOS prompt type FTP followed by the IP address and press Enter At the User prompt type FTP Username and press Enter At the password prompt enter your FTP Password and press Enter At the FTP prompt type cd wwwroot conf glbdata and press Enter At the FTP prompt type get and press Enter At the local file prompt type glbdata ini and press Enter NIOJ AJ OJIN At the remote file prompt type glbdata ini and press Enter Downloading a glbdat ini File to another NOE Step Action At the DOS prompt type FTP followed by the IP address and press Enter At the User prompt type the FTP username and press Enter At the password prompt enter your FTP Password and press Enter At the FTP prompt type cd wwwroot conf glbdata and press Enter At the FTP prompt type put and press Enter At the local file prompt type glbdata ini and press Enter NIOJ AJ OJIN At the remote file prompt type glbdata ini and press Enter Verifying System Operation Step Action 1 Verify all controllers are running 2 Look at the health of all variables using the Global Data Diagnostic page Follow these links Diagnostics
295. rvAddr 3 the IP address of SMTP server in dot notation format smtpMailSentCnt 4 the total number of emails sent to the network and successfully acknowledged by the server smtpErrCnt 5 the total number of email messages that could not be sent to the network or that have been sent but not acknowledged by the server smtpLastErr 6 the error code of the last error that occurred while trying to send an email message to the network smtpLastMailElapsedTime 7 the number of elapsed seconds since last successful email was sent to the server smtpLnkSrvStatus 8 the status of link with SMTP server 1 1 NOK not Ok link is down module failed to contact SMTP server 2 2 OK smtpSrvChkFailCnt 9 the number of times the link to SMTP server is detected as down Private Traps and MIB Files See the Electronic Mail Notification Service subtree table see page 265 NOTE A diagram of the Schneider Electric private enterprise MIB subtree appears in Simple Network Management Service SNMP see page 227 Traps are used to signal status changes to the manager Using traps helps to avoid adding traffic The status changes signaled by the trap are for the communication ports I O scanning health values Global Data health NTP service SMTP service 242 33002479 07 2011 SNMP NTP Traps SMTP Traps The following list describes the characteristics of private traps which means t
296. rved The IP configuration is created by a remote DHCP server profileRoleName 6 rthe ole name for the IP address management if it exists empty string if there is none profileBandwidthMgt 7 the status of Bandwidth Management e 1 disabled e 2 enabled profileBandwidthDistTable 8 the CPU time distribution between Global Data Port502 Messaging I O scanning profileLedDisplayTable 9 a table giving the name and the state of each module s LEDs profileSlot 10 the position of the communication module inside the rack if there is one If there is no rack the profileSlot value will be zero profileCPUType 11 the host for which that communication module is a part when a CPU type exists if there is no host the string is empty profileTrapTableEntriesMax 12 the maximum numbers of entries in the Trap Table equal to the number of possible remote managers profileTrapTable 13 a table allowing you to enable or disable the private traps for each of the communication services 240 33002479 07 2011 SNMP Service Indicates profileSpecificld 14 a unique Profile Specific Identification inside the equipmentProfile object of the Schneider Transparent Factory MIB for example the PLC Premium family is 100 profilelpAddress 15 the IP address of the SNMP agent profilelpNetMask 16 the subnet mask associated with the IP address of the SNMP
297. s Use Permanent Felt tip Pen MO NOE 771 00 Ethernet 10 100 Active Ready Fault Run Coll Link 2 _1 _ Tx Act Rx Act 10MB 100MB Fduplex Kernel Appl Seer eR w d mai g 1 model number module description color code 2 LED display 3 IP Address writable area 4 Global address label 5 100 BASE FX MT RJ cable connector 6 10 100 BASE T RJ 45 cable connector 7 removable door 33002479 07 2011 41 Product Description Key Ethernet Services The key Ethernet services of the 140 NOE 771 00 01 10 11 and 140 NWM 100 00 models are listed below 1 o l o l Service 00 NWM HTTP Server see page 86 FTP Server see page 85 Flash File System see page 88 lt Xx x Xx BOOTP Client see page 67 Address Server see page 74 XxX X Xx X Xx Xx lt XxX XxX KX Xx Xx xX X Xx XxX Xx Xx SNMP V2 Agent Network Management Service see page 76 x lt Modbus Messaging see page 77 1 0 Scanner see page 79 X Hot Standby Global Data Publish Subscribe see page 81 Bandwidth Monitoring see page 84 Faulty Device Replacement Server see page 219 Enhanced Web Diagnosis see page 86 XX KL X XxX KL OK Xx Schneider Private MIB see page 76 FactoryCast Application see page 88 X X X X X X Xx X Xx OK Xx User programmed Web pages X XIX X X Xx JAVA Virtual Ma
298. s Output words 0 0 33002479 07 2011 211 Transferring Data with the I O Scanner Property Box PRM Master DTM Elements The elements of the DTM Property box are Element Description Device Type Selection of DTM device type is made from this drop down list DTM Protocol Select the protocol to be used from this drop down list This list contains the DTM protocols of all the DTMs in the DTM Browser that can be linked with I O Scanning Device Name Select a PRM Master DTM from this drop down list This list uses the DTM Browser Alias names This list contains all the PRM Master DTMs in the DTM Browser that support the selected DTM Protocol To validate the choices click on the OK button Data Exchange Required These are the minimum number of words necessary for communication between Unity Pro and the PRM Master DTMs These values cannot be changed via the Property box NOTE Increasing the RD WR lengths via the I O Scanning tab leaves enough data exchange words for the future expansion of your DTM topology tree Expanding a tree that does not use the last line in the O Scanning table requires changing the values for all the lines below the line that needs the additional exchange words OK The OK button is only available after selecting the Device Type DTM Protocol and DTM Name When clicked the DTM Protocol and DTM Name are checked to see if they are val
299. s Configurattion t_ 139 124 10 14 255 255 0 0 139 124 10 1 Ethernet configuration Ethernet Il 802 3 NOTE The availability of the displayed register depends on the selected model family and can vary After selecting the Yes option in module services the tab corresponding to the module is activated 110 33002479 07 2011 Start Communication with Unity Pro Configuring the IP Address of the Ethernet Controller General Description The IP configuration tab enables you to configure the IP address settings The settings are activated after the connection to the hardware and the configuration is downloaded to the Modicon Quantum with Unity Ethernet controller 140 CPU 651 x0 The diagram shows the IP configuration for the Modicon Quantum with Unity Ethernet controller 140 CPU 651 x0 ETHERNET_1 r Model Family Module Addres Module Utilities TCP IP 10 100 Extended Connection v Rack Modul E ES I aona YES Global Data bf Module IP Address YES _ y SNMP Y IP Address Subnetwork Mask Gateway Address YES T2000 Tad sO ew 0 0 0 0 Address Server IP Configuration Messaging O Scanning Global Data SNMP Address Server Bandwidth IP Address Configuration Configured IP address 139 124 10 14 Subnetwork mask 255 255
300. s how to transfer data to and from nodes on a TCP IP network using communication blocks You transfer the data using either a special MBP_MSTR instruction or an IEC Logic function Operational statistics and error codes for reading and writing the controller information are included What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following sections Section Topic Page 4 1 Communications Issues 116 4 2 IEC Data Transfer Functions 118 4 3 MBP_MSTR 133 33002479 07 2011 115 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks 4 1 Communications Issues Overloaded Network Overview If a NOE771xx is used to run in a 100Mb s Ethernet and a persistent overloaded network occurs the NOE771 may go into Kernel mode This could the cause the primary CPU to STOP Example An example of a persistent overloaded network would be when two ports of an Ethernet switch are linked to each other this would be seen by all Ethernet nodes connected to the sub network and result in a massive overloaded network something that should not occur on properly configured network NOTE Broadcasts and especially ARPs are part of standard Ethernet traffic and will have no adverse effects on a NOE Even small storms that take up to 5 of the basic network traffic over short periods from several seconds to 2 3 minutes would not overload the NOE Itis only the massive and enduring overloaded network such as those created
301. s not e Inthe Property box click on the Update button and go to been synchronized with Unity Pro Step 14 204 33002479 07 2011 Transferring Data with the I O Scanner Step Action Results 14 Your Advantys island configuration is being synchronized with The results are Unity Pro e The Advantys island modifications are After the synchronization is finished you are returned to I O synchronized with the Unity Pro Scanning Verify that the Device Name is now displayed in application black e The Advantys island symbols are imported into the Unity Pro Data Editor e The Advantys Device Name is displayed in the I O Scanning in black This indicates that the island configuration is synchronized 15 Build your Unity Pro application 16 STOP the PLC 17 Transfer e Unity Pro application to the PLC e STB or OTB configuration to the Advantys island using ACS 18 RUN your application in the PLC Copy an Existing Island This following procedure copies an existing Advantys island file isl into a new Advantys island configuration Step Action From Unity Pro open a new Advantys island in ACS In ACS select File menu Copy Island Contents In the Open island window select the island file isl to copy Click on Yes in the Do you want to proceed message box a AJ wo mM The message Island file has been saved in the Log Window
302. ss WordArr5 4 WORD byte 2 of the 32 bit destination IP address WordArr5 5 WORD byte 1 LSB of the 32 bit destination IP address Function Mode of the WRITE_REG Module REQ Although a large number of WRITE_REG function blocks can be programmed only sixteen write operations may be active at the same time In such a case it is insignificant whether they are the result of this function block or of other write operations for example MBP_MSTR CWRITE_REG All function blocks use one data transaction path and require multiple cycles to complete a job If several WRITE_REG function blocks are used within an application they must at least differ in the values of their NO_REG or REG_WRITE parameters NOTE A TCP IP communication between a Quantum PLC NOE 771xx anda Momentum PLC all TCP IP CPUs and all TCP IP I O modules is possible only when one read or write job is carried out in every cycle If several jobs are sent per PLC cycle the communication stops without generating an error message in the status register of the function block The status signals DONE and ERROR report the function block state to the user program The entire routing information is contained in data structure WordArr5 of input AddrFld The type of function block connected to this input and thus the contents of the data structure depend on the network used Please use e TCP IP Ethernet the function block TCP_IP_ADDR NOTE For experts The WordArr5 d
303. stration above NOTE To enable the Device Control Block you must have e Unity Pro at V2 0 or higher e An 140 NOE 771 01 or NOE 771 11at version 3 5 or higher e A140 CPU 651x0 at version 2 0 or higher If you attempt to enable the Device Control Block with an earlier version of the firmware the I O scanning service is disabled If the checkbox is not selected the I O scanner service is enabled and you cannot disable the I O scanning of individual devices Disabling I O scanning with the Device Control Block is equivalent to ending communication between the scanner and the device Therefore e the fallback positions are applied to the inputs by the scanner e communication with the device is stopped e all the entries in the IN and OUT tables are still transferred between the CPU and the scanner on each scan As a consequence of the last point above if you modify a MWi attached to an input this MWi is overwritten by the values coming from the I O scanner in the next scan with either 0 or the last input value It is possible but meaningless to access MW attached to the outputs because they will not be transmitted to the device Repetitive Rate Step The Repetitive Rate Step number 3 is set in multiples of 5 ms the minimum through 200 ms the maximum The Repetitive Rate column is where you enter a rate of time for how often you want the I O scanner to send a query to the device after the rate has timed out NOTE
304. switch state is changed e an error message is displayed on the LCD The backlight stays on for error messages as long as the error message is displayed otherwise the backlight automatically turns off after five minutes Adjusting the Contrast The contrast is adjustable from the keypad when the default screen is displayed Step Action 1 Press the MOD key To adjust the contrast darker press To adjust the contrast lighter press MOD To confirm the setting press ENTER 33002479 07 2011 25 Product Description Keypad The keypad 5 has five keys that are mapped to hardware addresses Each of the two arrow keys includes an LED O l em Dm 1 5keys 2 2LEDs Using the Keys Keypad functions Key Function ESC To cancel an entry suspend or stop an action in progress To display the preceding screens successively move up the menu tree ENTER To confirm a selection or an entry To set a field on the display into the modify mode MOD LED on Key active e to scroll through menu options D e to scroll through modify mode field options LED flashing Key active The modify mode field can be scrolled LED off Key inactive No menu options and no field options LED on Key active e to move around in a screen field to field e to go to the sub menu LED flashing Key active Used to
305. t Petersburg Volgograd Yes GMT 03 00 E Africa Standard Time Nairobi No GMT 03 30 Iran Standard Time Tehran Yes GMT 04 00 Arabian Standard Time Abu Dhabi Muscat No GMT 04 00 Caucasus Standard Time Baku Tbilisi Yes GMT 04 00 Afghanistan Standard Time Kabul No GMT 05 00 Ekaterinburg Standard Time Ekaterinburg Yes GMT 05 00 West Asia Standard Time Islamabad Karachi Tashkent No GMT 05 30 India Standard Time Bombay Calcutta Madras New Delhi No GMT 06 00 Central Asia Standard Time Almaty Dhaka Yes 290 33002479 07 2011 Embedded Web Pages Time Zone Description DST Available GMT 05 00 SA Pacific Standard Time Bogota Lima Quito No GMT 05 00 Eastern Standard Time New York Yes GMT 05 00 Eastern Standard Time Indiana East Indianapolis No GMT 04 00 SA Western Standard Time Caracas La Paz No GMT 04 00 Pacific SA Standard Time Santiago Yes GMT 03 30 Newfoundland Standard Time Newfoundland St Johns Yes GMT 03 00 E South America Standard Time Brasilia Sao_Paulo Yes GMT 03 00 SA Eastern Standard Time Buenos Aires Georgetown No GMT 02 00 Mid Atlantic Standard Time South_Georgia No GMT 01 00 Azores Standard Time Azores Cape Verde Island Yes GMT Universal Coordinated Time Casablanca Monrovia No GMTO Greenwich Mean Time Dublin Edinburg
306. t Communication Services Introduction This chapter describes the Ethernet communications services available on 140 NOE 771 x1 and 140 CPU 651 x0 What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Modicon Quantum with Unity Ethernet Services 72 Address Server 74 SNMP and Schneider Private MIB Overview 76 Modbus Messaging 77 1 0 Scanner 79 Global Data 81 Time Synchronization 82 Electronic Mail Notification 83 Bandwidth Monitoring 84 FTP Server 85 Embedded Web Pages HTTP Server Web Configuration and Diagnostics 86 Additional Ethernet Services 88 33002479 07 2011 71 Ethernet Communication Services Modicon Quantum with Unity Ethernet Services Table of Ethernet Services The Ethernet services of the 140 NOE 771 01 140 NOE 771 11 and CPU 651 x0 add functionality to the system Some services can be configured others require no configuration Some services provide diagnostic information Access to the services is through either a Web page or the Unity Pro application NOE 771 01 NOE 771 11 CPU 651 x0 Service Address Server see page 74 configure Web Web Web Unity Pro Unity Pro diagnostic NA NA NA BOOTP Client see page 67 configure Unity Pro Unity Pro Unity Pro diagnostic NA NA NA SNMP V2 Agent Network Management configure Web Web Web Servic
307. t address of the first MW word 4x register in the slave to be written to NO_REG INT number of registers to be written to slave REG_WRIT WORD first MW word 4x register of the source data area AddrFld WordArr5 data structure for transferring the TCI IP address STATUS WORD MBP_MSTR error code 122 33002479 07 2011 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks Elementary Description for WordArr5 with TCP IP Ethernet Elementary description for WordArr5 with TCP IP Ethernet Element Data Type Meaning WordArr5 1 WORD low value byte MBP on Ethernet Transporter MET mapping index high value byte slots of the NOE module WordArr5 2 WORD byte 4 MSB of the 32 bit destination IP address WordArr5 3 WORD byte 3 of the 32 bit destination IP address WordArr5 4 WORD byte 2 of the 32 bit destination IP address WordArr5 5 WORD byte 1 LSB of the 32 bit destination IP address CWRITE_REG Block Function Mode Although a large number of CWRITE_REG function blocks can be programmed only sixteen write operations may be active at the same time It makes no difference whether these operations are performed using this function block or others for example MBP_MSTR WRITE_REG All function blocks use one data transaction path and require multiple cycles to complete a job If several CWRITE_REG function blocks are used within an application they must at least differ in the values of
308. ter files I O map communication port configuration and scan attributes to name a few Device Execution State Control The class of service allows the user to start stop the PLC scan execution These services require the user to be in an application login context which is obtained through other Modbus services 344 33002479 07 2011 Ethernet TCP IP Modbus Application Protocol Modbus Application Protocol PDU Analysis Overview Analysis The following information provides an analysis of the Modbus Application Protocol The Modbus Application Protocol PDU is transmitted over a TCP IP Ethernet stack Both Ethernet Il and IEEE 802 3 framing will be accommodated Ethernet II framing is the default from the wire in for IEEE 802 3 framing ATA is IEEE 802 3 framing if length lt 1500 802 3 pdu dst_addr 6 src_addr 6 length 2 data 802 2_pdu xan IEEE 802 3 PDU has a maxFrameSize of 1518 octets an IEEE 802 3 PDU has a minFrameSize of 64 octets802 2 pdu dsap 1 ssap 1 frm_cntrl 1 snap_hdr 5 data ip_pdu the snap_hdr is associated with a well known 802 2 sap snap_hdr org code 3 ethertype 2 the snap hdr sub network access protocol allows the older style Ethernet protocols to run on the newer IEEE 802 2 interface The thertype parameter indicates the service ex ip or arp IP has a value 0x800 Baad from the
309. teway test_1 192 168 1 1 255 255 255 0 192 168 1 200 D test_2 192 168 102 102 255 255 240 0 192 168 100 200 Refresh Address Server Database Table Add a New Entry Change an Entry Delete an Entry Copyright 1999 2004 Schneider Automation SAS All Rights reserved In the above figure a user has highlighted the radio button for test_1 That item can now be edited with the last row of buttons Button Function Change an Entry Change the table data for the entry Delete an Entry Delete the entry from the table data for the entry Note The selected radio button has no effect on the Add a New Entry function Note You can press the Refresh Address Server Database Table button to refresh the table data at any time 286 33002479 07 2011 Embedded Web Pages Configuring the Time Synchronization Service Configuring the Time Service You must use the module s embedded Web page to configure the time service For the Quantum 140 NOE 771 11 module you may configure the NTP time service see page 252 on the NTP Configuration page NTP Configuration 192 168 5 100 0 0 0 0 GMT 05 00 Eastern Standard Time New York Disable NTP Home Configure NOE NOE Properties NOE Diagnostics Support Copyright 2001 Schneider Automation Inc All rights reserved Time Service Command Buttons Execute the following commands Button Description Save Stores n
310. th NOTE In FBD and LD sections this function block can be used on the program level and with derived function blocks DFBs When using DFBs the parameters CONTROL and DATABUF must be directly connected to the I O pins of the DFB NOTE A TCP IP communication between a Quantum PLC and a Momentum PLC is possible only when only one read or write job is carried out in every cycle If several jobs are sent per PLC cycle the communication stops without generating an error message in the status register of the function block Example e you can send MBP_MSTR Enable HSBY_NOEPLCMSTR_ON AND SW61 1 AND NOT SW61 0 or e you can create a boolean variable primary_state SW61 1 AND NOT SW61 0 and insert it for executing the section 134 33002479 07 2011 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks NOTE To prevent the former standby CPU which has switched its state for RUN offline from executing communication functions you must add a condition on the status bits to disable the function if the CPU is offline NOTE Several copies of this function block can be used in the program However multiple instancing of these copies is not possible Representation in FBD EnableMSTRFunction CancelActivMSTR Operation Representation in LD Input Parameters MBP_MSTR_ Instance MBP_MSTR ENABLE ABORT ACTIVE ERROR SUCCESS CONTROL DATABUF MBP_MSTR_ Instance OperationActiv F
311. the CPU LCD Display Screens 00 0c eee ee eee Module Description 140 NOE 771 xx and 140 NWM 10000 Modicon Quantum Ethernet Modules Overview Indicators for Ethernet Modules 0000 cece eee eens Connectors and Cabling 0 0 c cece teeta Using the 140 NOE 771 11 Ethernet Module in a Quantum Safety Project Installing the Module 1 0 cee tee Before You Begin 0 eee eee Cable Schemes ec0 esi 21k Vee Be a de see E SECUN faye a aitresh criti aaa ie ae Bie ae ath tact e aa E aN Mounting the Module in the Quantum PLC Backplane Connecting the Cable 1 0 eect eae Assigning Ethernet Address Parameters 200000005 Establishing the FTP Password 2000 0c cece eens Establishing HTTP and Write Passwords for NOE Using BOOTP Lite to Assign Address Parameters Customer Support 2 0 0 0 cette eee Customer Support Documentation 000e cece eee eee Contact Information 0 00 ect eens Ethernet Communication Services 0 Modicon Quantum with Unity Ethernet Services Address Sever sesca denei at ieee ee od he dees hae SNMP and Schneider Private MIB Overview 20055 Modbus Messaging 0 cee eee teenies 11 13 17 19 20 21 22 24 27 29 39 40 44 46 47 49 50 52 54 55 57 58 61 64 67 68 69 70 7
312. the Form Update SNMP Show SNMP Configuration Click Update SNMP To set your changes use hot swap to reboot the module 280 33002479 07 2011 Embedded Web Pages Global Data Publish Subscribe Utility Configuration Overview Whether you use either the Configure Each Device Separately or the Copy Configuration method see page 186 the procedure to configure individual parameters is the same Therefore in order to use the Global Data publish subscribe utility in the NOE you need to configure the Global Data parameters including Distribution period Multicast filtering Health bit location Global Data base address Group IP address The following sections describe in detail the exact steps to configure each parameter on the Global Data Configuration page Illustration You can change the configuration in the Global Data Configuration page Global Data Configuration Reb wtelelews1239 200 255 255 EES Eae Distribution period A Termite ame 1000 Health Bits 4 Data Zone fo tol5 Update Global Data Configuration Variable Table 4 sub El Ivar_o1 FERM 48 Ie Ea Pus E fvar 02 AM 160 Wmo I Ms sue Eia os Mama 2 Non CY 33002479 07 2011 281 Embedded Web Pages Configuring Global Data After you have completed the Modeling System Configuration process see page 186 using the second method Copy Configuration you modify the following paramet
313. the PLC examines the third group and if it discovers one or more inactive connections in the third group the PLC closes the oldest inactive connection in that group and opens a new connection If the PLC fails to discover an inactive connection in any of the three groups no open connection is closed and no new connection can be opened NOTE Closure of a connection is indicated to the application by means of a status report message refused on any exchanges in progress 348 33002479 07 2011 Ethernet TCP IP Modbus Application Protocol Reference Documents Overview Introduction The following information provides a list of reference documents that you may find helpful Following is a list of related documentation ANSI IEEE Std 802 3 1985 ISO DIS 8802 3 ISBN 0 471 82749 5 May 1988 ANSI IEEE Std 802 2 1985 ISO DIS 8802 2 ISBN 0 471 82748 7 Feb 1988 RFC793 TCP Transmission Control Protocol DARPA Internet Program Protocol Specification Sep 1981 RFC 791 IP Internet Protocol DARPA Internet Protocol Specification Sep 1981 RFC826 An Ethernet Address Resolution Protocol ARP David Plummer NIC Sep 1982 RFC1042 A Standard for the Transmission of IP Datagrams over IEEE 802 2 Networks Postel amp Reynolds ISI Feb 1988 RFC 792 ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol DARPA Internet C Control Message Protocol Specification Jon Postel Sep 1981 RFC951 BOOTSTRAP PROTOCOL BOOTP Bill Croft and John Gilmo
314. thernet configuration extension table or to a specific slot To program an MBP_MSTR block to perform a write CTE operation use function code 12 see page 137 Network Implementation A write CTE operation can be performed on TCP IP Ethernet see page 157 and SY MAX Ethernet networks Control Block Usage for TCP IP Ethernet Register Meaning CONTROL 1 12 write CTE CONTROL 2 Indicates the error status CONTROL 3 The length setting a value from 12 to 37 CONTROL 4 No significance CONTROLJ 5 Routing register Least significant byte mapping index Either a value displayed in the byte of the address or is not used R significant byte network adapter module slot CONTROLI6 No significance CONTROL 9 Control Block Usage for SY MAX Ethernet Register Meaning CONTROL 1 12 Write CTE Config extension table CONTROL 2 Indicates the error status CONTROL 3 Number of words transferred CONTROL 4 Byte offset in the PLC address structure specifying where the CTE bytes are written CONTROLS Routing register Most significant byte NOE module slot Least significant byte Destination drop number 166 33002479 07 2011 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks Register Meaning CONTROL 6 Terminator FF hex CONTROL 7 No significance CONTROLI9 CTE Indicator Implementation DATABUF The values i
315. ting the Ethernet Module Introduction This chapter contains the software pages for the NOE module What s in this Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Selecting the Quantum NOE Ethernet Module 102 IP Configuration 104 Quantum NOE Ethernet Messaging Configuration 105 33002479 07 2011 101 Start Communication with Unity Pro Selecting the Quantum NOE Ethernet Module General Description After configuring Ethernet communication see page 93 the Ethernet module parameters can be configured When you select the model family all the corresponding communication module configuration options are displayed automatically The module services allow the following settings to be made Setting Description No Setting deactivated Yes Setting activated Parameters are set using the Unity Pro menu window Web Setting activated Parameters are set using the configured NOE Web pages Unity Pro menu window deactivated Note Not available for every model family NOTE The availability of the displayed settings depends on the selected model family and can vary The screen shot shows an example of the menu window of the NOE Ethernet module TCP IP 10 100 Regular connection Model Famity Module Utlties Z 10 Scanning Global Data Module IP Address S Z sNwP IP Address Subnetwork Mask eae Ni NTP TCPIP 10100 Regular correction x
316. tion supports the free mode of Unity Soft That means the user can first configure the module and then the communication or the user can configure the communication and then the module This will be provided through a NetLink that must be selected in the module configuration The network variables including in the VAR folder are linked with a group name that defines an IP domain over Internet network The illustration shows the three parts involved in communication configuration S S Cg Network VAR Fe S K Variables Data Le fe base GROUP NAME A E Se Network COMM lt Parameters Data base CONF Parameters Data base 98 33002479 07 2011 Start Communication with Unity Pro Link between Configuration and Communication NetLinks During Unity Pro application design the NetLinks are created and inserted on sub folder Communication under Network These are the names of logical networks Under configuration folder on the communication module node included in the current station the list of existing NetLinks is proposed to select and attach one network to one module Only the NetLink that can be managed by this module are displayed in the list box on module configuration screen No NetLink can be edited and created here no edit box but this list contains at least the No_Link field The following figure shows the window for the Ethernet link for the Quantum NOE module
317. tistics registers cannot be exceeded CONTROLJ5 CONTROL 9 Routing address 1 5 of the node The last byte in the routing path that is not 0 is the destination node Conirol Block Usage for TCP IP Ethernet Register Meaning CONTROL 1 7 get remote statistics CONTROL 2 Indicates the error status CONTROL 3 Number of addresses to be read from the statistics data field 0 38 Note The size of databuf must be at least the size of this entry CONTROLI4 First address from which the node statistics must be read The number of available statistics registers cannot be exceeded 154 33002479 07 2011 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks Register Meaning CONTROL 5 Routing register Most significant byte network adapter module slot CONTROLJ 6 Each address contains 1 byte of the 32 bit IP address where the value in CONTROLJ6 is the MSB and the value in CONTROL 9 is the LSB CONTROL 9 33002479 07 2011 155 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks Clear Remote Statistics Description A clear remote statistics operation clears remote node values from words 13 22 in the statistics table of the local node It uses a master transaction path and may require several cycles to complete To program an MBP_MSTR block to perform a clear remote statistics operation use function code 8 see page 137 Netwo
318. to 64 for the Global Data network Variable Public Status Automatic information of the correct publication status of the Global Data network Only by using the Microsoft Excei spreadsheet Information per symbol Device Publication Status Automatic information of the correct publication status of the Global Data network Only by using the Microsoft Excei spreadsheet Information per device Total Publication Size per Node Publication size for the specific node The maximum publication size is 512 words registers per node Total Subscription Size per Node Subscription size for the specific node The maximum subscription size is 2048 words registers per node Group IP Address Enabled IP address for multicast networking Identifies the stations distribution group The address range is from 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 Multicast Filtering Enabled A check box for Ethernet switches that support multicast filtering 180 33002479 07 2011 Global Data Publish Subscribe Parameter Description Default Address for Health MW 4x register MW 4x register address for the Health bits This is the memory area where the Health bits are stored It has the size of 4 words registers Distribution Period Is the minimum number of controller scan times before an update will occur Health Timeout Is the maximum time between received subscriptions be
319. tribution group I O Scanning general diagnostics of the I O scanning utility and a summary of the see page 298 status of all modules Messaging current information on open TCP connections on Port502 see page 299 Bandwidth Monitoring load distribution of the Embedded Server module between the global see page 300 data utilities 1 O scanning messaging and other utilities Statistics Ethernet module statistics with the reset counters link see page 300 NTP see page 301 time synchronization service parameters Email see page 302 Email notification service parameters Upload MIB file upload the private MIB source file Crash Log file crash message after crash and status message normal see page 303 operations 33002479 07 2011 273 Embedded Web Pages CPU Configuration Page Overview Sample Page Dynamic Data The CPU Configuration Page provides up to date information about the controller and its configuration Access this page by selecting the CPU model from the Configured Local Rack see page 273 or the hyperlink Controller Status Here is an example of a CPU Configuration page QUANTUM CONTROLLER STATUS Status Battery Rack Slot Running OK 1 2 Reference CPU 534 14 Product Type Quantum Exec ID 883 Logged In No Oo Some of the data provided on this page is dynamic Dynamic data is constantly
320. uantum Ethernet Modules Overview 40 Indicators for Ethernet Modules 44 Connectors and Cabling 46 Using the 140 NOE 771 11 Ethernet Module in a Quantum Safety Project 47 33002479 07 2011 39 Product Description Modicon Quantum Ethernet Modules Overview Overview General Description The following information provides overviews of all Modicon Quantum Ethernet modules The Modicon Quantum Ethernet module shown below is one of the latest models in a line of Modicon Quantum Ethernet TCP IP modules designed to make it possible for a Modicon Quantum PLC to communicate with devices over an Ethernet network The electronics for the Ethernet modules are contained in a standard Modicon Quantum single width case that takes up one slot in a Modicon Quantum backplane The module which is capable of being hot swapped can be plugged into any available slot in the backplane The NOE 771 x0 and NOE 771 x1 modules provide real time peer to peer communications and I O scanning and a Modbus TCP server The included HTTP services provide maintenance and configuration utilities to the module 40 33002479 07 2011 Product Description Front View The following figure shows the front of the NOE 771 00 Ethernet module as an example for all Ethernet modules I 1 eer a WRITE ASSIGNED IP ADDRESS ABOVE Do Not Duplicate Addres
321. ules 33002479 07 2011 13 Validity Note This document describes the procedures for e setting up the modules to transfer data using either the Global Data modules the 140 NOE 771 01 140 NOE 771 11 or 140 CPU 651 x0 or I O scanner utility in the 140 NOE 771 00 01 11 and the 140 CPU 651 50 60 e using an embedded Web server to access diagnostics and online configurations for the module and its associated controller e using the FactoryCast Web server to customize your configuration via embedded Web pages in the 140 NOE 771 10 11 and the 140 NWM 100 00 e using an NOE module in a hot standby solution for fault tolerant remote I O and communications Nomenclature The following table describes the naming scheme for various groups of modules The Name Refers to the 140 NOE 771 xx 140 NOE 771 00 140 NOE 771 01 140 NOE 771 10 and 140 NOE 771 11 modules 140 NOE 771 x0 140 NOE 771 00 and 140 NOE 771 10 modules 140 NOE 771 x1 140 NOE 771 01 and 140 NOE 771 11 modules 140 NOE 771 Ox 140 NOE 771 00 and 140 NOE 771 01 modules 140 NOE 771 1x 140 NOE 771 10 and 140 NOE 771 11 modules 140 CPU 651 x0 140 CPU 651 50 and 140 CPU 651 60 modules NOTE Before adding a node to an existing corporate network consult with your information technology IT department about any possible consequences This document is valid for Unity Pro version 6 0 The technical characteristics of the device s d
322. ure the 140 CPU 651 x0 using the Unity Pro editors Configuring allows you to add to remove from and edit devices in the BOOTP server s database which is maintained in the module s non volatile memory NOTE The DHCP server is available on the 140 NOE 771 x1 models The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP is a superset of the BOOTP protocol Your 140 NOE 771 x1 has a DHCP server The DHCP server is compliant with RFC 1531 The DHCP server can be used to provide the IP configuration to devices using BOOTP or devices using DHCP 74 33002479 07 2011 Ethernet Communication Services The DHCP server has entries that use the MAC address to serve the IP configuration and entries in the server that use the role name to serve the IP configuration Elsewhere in this book are details for the NOE address server configuration see page 219 If you are migrating a BOOTP configuration from a 140 NOE 771 x0 module to the new 140 NOE 771 x1 module see Address Server Configuration Faulty Device Replacement see page 219 for details on the automatic upgrade of your configuration for the new DHCP server NOTE Before placing the NOE on a corporate network Schneider Electric recommends that you discuss the installation with your MIS department It is likely that your company s corporate network has at least one DHCP server running already If the NOE s DHCP server is running on the same network it may disturb the network To av
323. us TCP IP SY MAX CIP Code Plus Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet 1 Write data X X X 2 Read data X X X 3 Get local statistics X xX 4 Clear local statistics X xX 7 Get remote statistics X X 8 Clear remote statistics see page 156 X X 10 Reset optional module xX X 11 Read CTE Config extension X X 12 Write CTE Config extension X X 13 Send E mail see page 168 X 14 CIP Explicit message X 15 Send Modbus Request see page 170 X 16 Close Connection Request see page 175 X 23 Read write data see page 176 X where e X indicates Yes e indicates No 33002479 07 2011 137 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks Network Control Block Structures Summary The structure of the MBP_MSTR control block varies according to the type of network you are using Structures for Modbus Plus TCP IP Ethernet and SyMax Ethernet are described below Control Block for Modbus Plus Register Contents CONTROL 1 Indicates an operation that is valid for Modbus Plus CONTROL 2 Indicates the error status CONTROL 3 Indicates the length i e the number of data units transferred max 100 CONTROL 4 Indicates MSTR operation dependent information CONTROLJ 5 Routing register 1 used to specify a destination node during network transfer routing path addresses one of five Most significant byte source node address i e the slot for t
324. ut in the network configuration as well as the data editor The variables for the publish subscribe procedure are configured in the data editor The screen shot shows the network configuration global data configuration settings Module Utilities NO 10 Scanning Module Address Rack Module Channel S at Model Family NOE 0100 2 NOE 0110 2 z YES Global Data Module IP Address NO v Address Server YES NTP IP Configuration Messaging 10 Scanning Global Data snme address Server NTP Bandwidth Global data configuration Health time out 200 pen ms Group address 239 255 255 255 Distribution period E pa 10ms Group name Multicast Filtering IGMP z None Health bit block 1 IW MW umwo Parameter description Parameter Description Health time out After this time period expires the received data becomes invalid Group address Class D multicast IP address All nodes in the global data procedure use the same multicast address for distributing or receiving data The address range is 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 Distribution period Time after which the data is received or sent Minimum scan time of the PLC Group name Logical name Defines the varibale allocation to different communication configurations in the variable editor Health bit block Address for retrieving the status information of the global data procedure
325. ver client server services which require multiple transmissions to specific destinations There are two immediate benefits e reduces overall network traffic e ensures tighter synchronization of multiple subscribers 33002479 07 2011 81 Ethernet Communication Services Time Synchronization General The time service synchronizes computer clocks over the Internet For example the time of one client is synchronized either with another server or to a referenced time source like a radio or satellite receiver Typical time service configurations utilize multiple redundant servers and diverse network paths to achieve high accuracy and reliability Time service accuracy can be within a millisecond on LANs and up to a few tenths of milliseconds on WANs Use the time service for e event recording sequence events e event synchronization trigger simultaneous events e alarm and I O synchronization time stamp alarms Time Synchronization and Time Stamps On an Ethernet network all controllers should be synchronized with the same clock time which is provided by an NTP server In each application program events or application data I O values for example can be time stamped using the application stacks The Ethernet interface module connects to an NTP time server and provides the source time synchronization signal which is sent to the CPU To read the clock a function block is used in the controller s project application
326. y objects as are required If needed a new branch will be added at the same level as Transparent_Factory_Ethernet 1 This subtree will be created for product specific objects such as the ATV58 object under the IndustrialControl Products 3 subtree When a new device is created a corresponding object description is created in the ASN 1 format The ASN 1 file s are then given to producers of SNMP manager software for inclusion in their products 33002479 07 2011 237 SNMP Port502 Messaging Subtree The Port502_Messaging 2 subtree or group provides connection management and data flow services The following list describes the function of each object Service Indicates port502Status 1 status of the service idle operational port502SupportedProtocol 2 supported protocols MODBUS Xway port502IpSecurity 3 status of the Port502 IP Security service enabled disabled port502MaxConn 4 maximum number of TCP connections supported by the Port502 entity port502LocalConn 5 TCP connection number currently opened by the local Port502 entity port502RemConn 6 TCP connection number currently opened by the remote entity to the local Port502 entity port502IpSecurityTable 7 a table containing the number of unsuccessful TCP connection open tries from a remote TCP entity port502ConnTable 8 a table containing Port502 TCP specific information MsgIn MsgOut port502
327. you must be familiar with the routing procedures used by your network e For technical reasons this function block does not allow the use of ST and IL programming languages Symbol Block representation BOOL DINT INT WORD WordArrs WRITE_REG REQ DONE BOOL SLAVEREG ERROR BOOL NO_REG REG_WRIT AddrFld STATUS WORD Parameter Description Description of parameters Parameter Data Type Meaning REQ BOOL start write operation once SLAVEREG DINT offset address of the first MW word 4x register in the slave to be written to NO_REG INT number of registers to be written from slave AddrFlid WordArr5 data structure transferring the TCP IP address REG_WRIT WORD first MW word 4x register of the source data area DONE BOOL set to 1 for one scan after writing data ERROR BOOL set to 1 for one scan in case of error STATUS WORD error code 128 33002479 07 2011 Transferring Data Using Communication Blocks Elementary Description for WordArr5 with TCP IP Ethernet Elementary description for WordArr5 with TCP IP Ethernet Element Data Type Meaning WordArr5 1 WORD high value byte Slot of the NOE module low value byte MBP on Ethernet Transporter MET mapping index WordArr5 2 WORD byte 4 MSB of the 32 bit destination IP address WordArr5 3 WORD byte 3 of the 32 bit destination IP addre
328. ype of error Type of Error Value Component OK and running 0 Excessive network traffic or server overload 1 Bad parameters in the configuration 3 Component is disabled 4 Incorrect IP 9 Time zone file absent 14 Syntax error in the customrules file 15 33002479 07 2011 305 Embedded Web Pages NOE Properties Page Introduction to the NOE Properties Page You can navigate to the NOE Properties page from the Diagnostics page The NOE Properties page displays the versions of the Exec Kernel and Web Pages and the Physical Media NOE Properties Exec Version version 4 5 Kernel Version version 3 1 Web Pages Version version 4 5 Physical Media 10 100BASE T Copyright 1999 2008 Schneider Automation SAS All rights reserved NOTE This page only reports this information The fields cannot be changed 306 33002479 07 2011 Embedded Web Pages Contacting Schneider Electric Page Schneider Electric Contact Page The following figure shows the Contacting Schneider Electric page which contains information about how to obtain support for the NOE 771 xx modules Contacting Schneider Electric Technical Information Click here to go to the Schneider Electric Automation web site Contact Us Click here to contact Schneider Electric in your country Copyright 1998 2003 Schneider Automation SAS All rights reserved 33002479 07 2011
329. zone is configurable and customizable including daylight savings time e Web page diagnostics for the time synchronization service NTP Time Synchronization and Time Stamps The Schneider Electric Ethernet interface module NOE 771 11 provides the source time synchronization signal sent to a controller The module s firmware includes an NTP client which provides time synchronization Action Result NTP Client requests a time synchronization NTP Server responds with a signal signal from an NTP server Request is sent over an Ethernet network NTP Client stores the time NTP Client sends a message to the The controller updates its internal clock with controller s clock system counter the following granularity e ims 246 33002479 07 2011 Using the NTP Time Service EN R_NTPC ENO OUT1 OUT2 STATUS To read the clock from the PLC application e Use the R_NTPC function block see page 249 in either MAST FAST or Interrupt sections On an Ethernet network all controllers should be synchronized with the same NTP server NTP Server Clock System NTP Request Counter Ethernet Network NTP Response Modicon Quantum System NTP Time Synchronization Definitions Term Description of Service Local clock offset Accurate local time is maintained by adjusting the time by using a local clock offset The local clock offset is calculated by the formu

Modicon Quantum with Unity - Guillevin Industrial Automation Group

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents